Diversity Descriptions

DiversityDescriptions (version 4) is part of the database framework Diversity Workbench. Each DWB module is devoted to a specific data domain. The domain of DiversityDescriptions covers the knowledge about descriptions of organisms and descriptions of any other item/ element/ entity which are object of diversity research. It can be used to describe individual organisms, research items/ objects (e.g. specimens, observation and measurement events, plots) as well as taxa, syntaxonomic entities (e.g. species, plant-sociological entities, ecosystems).  

  • The descriptions are characterized by a triple structure, namely ‘item-descriptor-state’ or ‘item-descriptor-value’ or ‘item-character-character state’ or ’entity-attribute-value’ or ’element-property-value’.
  • The states or values, which build the item/description, can be generalized to one of the presently supported data types (categorical states, quantitative values and statistical measures, molecular sequence data and free-form text as a fall-back option).
  • The descriptors (= characters, attributes, properties) are not limited to morphological characters and functional traits, but could address physiological, ecological, behavioral and even interview parameter, some molecular descriptors and descriptors of data content schemes.

    

The image below gives a rough overview how the triple structure is represented in the data tables of DiversityDescriptions. A detailled database diagram including all tables and their data columns can be found here. At the right side you can see the descriptors and categorical states that build the “descriptive terminology”. Currently four descriptor types are supported:

  1. Categorical descriptor
    may be used for representing discrete enumerable categorical states, e.g. color: red - green - blue  
  2. Quantitative descriptor
    may be used for storing numeric values, e.g. minimum, maximum, mean  
  3. Text descriptor
    free-form text, applicable if no other descriptor type is suitable  
  4. Molecular sequence descriptor
    may be used for storing nucleotide or protein sequences  

While the first three descriptor types are most commonly known in the context of descriptive data, the molecular sequence descriptor is designed according the SDD standard of TDWG. (An alternate entry point to SDD can be found here.) In most cases molecular sequence data may be mapped to text descriptor data, e.g. for export to a DELTA file. 

    

At the left side of the image above there are the “descriptive data”, which consist of the single description or item and the associated summary data. In analogy to the four descriptor types there are categorical and quantitative summary data, text descriptor data and molecular sequence data that reference the corresponding descriptor and store the actual values for the item ( green lines).  For an item description scopes can be specified, e.g. taxon names or specimens, which may optionally be linked to the corresponding module of the Diversity Workbench (orange lines at the very left). Additionally for each descriptor a data status may be specified, e.g. to indicate that a certain descriptor/character should be specified but actually no data are available (Descriptor Status Data).  

To make this very abstact overview a little bit more tangible, find in the image below a tiny example taken from the tutorial. The “Example plant” is a “Tree” and has the “Leaf color” “green” (Categorical Summary Data). Its “Leaf length” is between 5 and 10 cm (Quantitative Summary Data) and for “Literature” (currently) no data are available. Additionaly the taxon name “Ulmus campetris” has been associated to the “Example plant” (Description Scope). 

    

DiversityDescriptions keeps only descriptive data. Data of other realms like e.g. taxonomy are handled in separate modules. For an overview of the available modules see Diversity Workbench. DiversityDescriptions might also be used as a stand-alone application.

Besides the descriptive data that represent the summarized data e.g. for a certain species, Diversity Descriptions provides the feature of appending Sample Data to each description.  

To each description or item several “sampling events” may be appended, which build the anchor for the “sampling units”. The sampling event holds additional data like the date and time or a time span when the data were collected, the geographic location and coordinates. The sampling unit represents a tuple of values that belong to an individual probe, e.g. an evaluated organism (see image above). The sample data may be exported together with the descriptive data to the SDD format, which provides full sample data support. Optionally sample data may be exported to the DELTA format, where each sampling unit is mapped to a separate item. 

DiversityDescriptions 4 is based on Microsoft SQL-Server (version 2012 or newer recommended) and the .Net Framework, Version 4.8.

For licence and copyright see the licence section.

Even if you are already familiar with other Diversity Workbench modules, it is strongly recommended to take a look into the Tutorial to get an overview of the main features of DiversityDescriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Descriptions

Diversity Descriptions

Download

Current version

4.7.4 (2024-04-18)

Download

Previous versions

4.7.3 (2023-12-14)

Download

4.7.2 (2023-09-05)

Download  

Installation

Resources

To run a module of the Diversity Workbench framework, you need access to a database and an installation of the respective client. The following instructions explain how to install the DiversityCollection client. All other modules are installed in the same way.

If you do not yet have an account for your institutional DWB platform, please contact your institution’s DWB administrator. If you wish to set up and use your own personal, institutional, domain-specific, or research-group-internal database environment, see Installation of a database for more information.

A German-language video demonstrates the installation using the DC client as an example. Please note that the initial steps in the video are outdated, as the downloads are now available via this manual, as described below. .

Download

All DiversityWorkbench modules can be downloaded free of charge. Within each module in the manual, you will find a Download menu item. There, you can download the latest version in the Current version section.

Installation of the client

The client is currently based on the .Net framework version 4.8 from Microsoft. If not already present, the software will prompt you to install it.

After downloading the client, unzip the .zip folder. The extracted setup folder contains two files: an .msi and a .bat file.

If you want to install the client on your computer, start the installation by double-clicking the .msi file.

If necessary, you can adjust the installation location in the next step.

Once the installation is complete, the software will be added to the program menu (see below) and a shortcut will be created on the desktop.

In the next chapter Database Login the login process is explained.

Troubleshooting

If you don’t have sufficient permissions on your computer to install anything, you can use the client by following the instructions Run the program without an installer. If you receive a warning from Windows that this computer is protected, follow the instructions Windows protection warning.

Run program without installer

There are several reasons why you might prefer to run DiversityCollection without installation. E.g. if you lack administrative permissions on your computer or if you want to use several different versions of DiversityCollection in parallel.

Therefore, the downloaded .zip file contains a .bat file. With this .bat file, a folder DiversityCollection_x_x_x is created on your desktop containing all relevant files to run the client DiversityCollection.

You have to unzip the downloaded .zip file to a local folder. The unzipped folder contains the .msi file and the .bat file. Within this unzipped! folder start the .bat file with a double-click. You might get a security warning, as shown in the section Windows protection warning.

The batch file unpacks the program files to a folder on your desktop named DiversityCollection_x_x_x, where "x_x_x" stands for the program version.

To start the DiversityCollection program, go to the folder and double-click on the file DiversityCollection.exe.

The login process is explained in the next chapter Database Login.

Technical notes and additional information

The software will be placed in the programs directory, as shown below.

Additionally, a folder is created in the user directory. This folder contains files and templates, for example, for label printing. It also contains hidden folders, such as Query. User input is saved there so that it can be loaded again the next time the program is started.

Windows protection warning

If you receive the following warning from Windows

please click on Weitere Informationen. A button Trotzdem ausführen will appear.

Please click on Trotzdem ausführen to install the software.

 

Mar 26, 2024

Database login

To use a module from the DiversityWorkbench framework, such as “DiversityCollection”, you need access to a database. If you do not yet have an account for your institutional DWB platform, please contact your institution’s DWB administrator. If you wish to set up and use your own personal, institutional, domain-specific, or research-group-internal database environment, you will find instructions here.

Connect to a database

  1. At the top left of the main window, go to ConnectionDatabase … or click the Connect button . A dialog form “Connect to database” opens.

  2. In the “Server” section, add the server name or the IP address and the port number.

  3. In the “Login” section, choose an option:

    • Windows authentication: Using the Windows Login information.

    • SQL-Server authentication: User and password as defined in the database.

  4. Click on the Connect to server button.

  5. If the connection information is valid, you can Choose a database from the drop-down list at the bottom.

  6. Choose the database you want to work with and click OK.

  7. If you access a database for the first time, you will be asked to consent to the storage and processing of your personal data (see below) according to the General Data Protection Regulation. Without your consent the access is not possible.

Important The standard port number for SQL-Server is 1433 and is set as default. If the database server is configured to use a different port, you must change the port number in the port input field.

Previous connection

If you have been connected to a database in previous sessions, you can select one of these connections:

  1. At the top of the “Connect to database” dialog form, click on the Previous connections button .
  2. Select a connection from the drop-down list. This inserts the name or IP address and the port in the corresponding input fields in the server section.
  3. To log into a database, proceed as described above starting from step 3.

Testing a connection

To test the connection, you can send a ping by clicking the button .

Switch between databases

  1. At the top left, go to ConnectionDatabase … or click on the Connect button .
  2. If you are already connected to a server, you can select a database from the drop-down list Choose database at the bottom of the dialog box.

Reset and Cancel

Reset: If you are connected to a server, there is a Reset button below the “Login” section of the “Connect to database” dialogue box. Click the Reset button to change your server or login settings.

Cancel: If you do not want to change anything, click on Cancel.

Encryption

By default, the connection to the databases is encrypted. The icon next to the Connect to server button indicates an encrypted connection. By clicking on the icon, you can switch to an unencrypted connection, indicated by the icon .

Videos

  • Login to a database: Video starten.
Mar 26, 2024

Database Access

Database - access

The database engine for DiversityDescriptions is Microsoft SQL-Server 2012 or higher.

If you are connected to a database this is indicated by the icon of the connection button in left upper corner. If you are not connected this will be indicated by the icon . To access any database, you must specify the server where the database is located. For the configuration of this connection choose Connection → Database… from the menu or click on the button.

If you want to use a database on a local or remote SQL-server, start the program DiversityDescriptions.exe and in the main window click on the button or choose Connection → Database … from the menu. A window as shown below will open. Here set the connection parameters as described below.

 

Database name, IP-address and Port

A dialog will open, to specify the name or IP-address and port number of the server and to select the authentication mode. The SQL-Server may be addressed by its IP-address, e.g. 127.0.0.1 or by its name, e.g. localhost. You can either choose Windows authentication (see left image below) or SQL-Server authentication (see below - central middle image).

The standard port number for SQL-Server is 1433 and will be set as a default. If the database server is configured using a port different from that port, you must give the port number in the field Port. Click on the button to connect to the server. If the connection informations are valid, you can choose a database from the server from the combobox at the base of the window (see right image above). To restart the connecting process click on the button. In menu you find a list of the latest login data (server and port) used.

If you access a database for the first time you will be asked to consent to the storage and processing of your personal data (see below) according to the General Data ProtectionRegulation. Without your consent the access is not possible.

 

Password

If you are logged in with a SQL-Server account and are not restricted to the group DataUser or DataReader, you can change your password. Choose Administration → Change password... from the menu. In the window that will open, enter your current password and the new password (see below). The password must match the restrictions set by the database server.

 

Module connections

The program will automatically try to get connect to Diversity Workbench databases and webservices. For further details see the Connections section.

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Database Access

Data Availability

Availability of the data

In the description data descriptors may be marked with the data status Data withheld (see below). 

   

When you export data the export forms include the “Withheld data” options where you can decide how to handle those data (see below).  

 

  • The default setting Suppress whole description will exclude the whole description dataset from the export.  
  • The setting Hide withheld descriptor will include the description dataset in the export, but descriptor data that are marked as “Data withheld” will be suppressed.  
  • The setting Export withheld data will include all data in the export.  

The options mentioned above are also available for the cachedatabase. Additionally there are powerful filters to restrict the exported description items and dedicated descriptor and scope data may be excluded from export.  

Finally the document generation by default excludes all descriptions that have any descriptor with data status “Data withheld”. This is indicated by the button in the upper right corner of the form. By clicking this button the descriptions may be included, which is indicated with the inactive icon . Withheld descriptors will be skipped. For the document generators there is no option to include them.  

Jan 14, 2025

Login Administration

Login administration

To administrate the logins on the database server, their permissions resp. roles and access to projects choose Administration -> Database … → Logins … from the menu. A window as shown below will open.

 

Statistics

To see the activity of a login click on the button. A window will open as shown below listing all databases and tables together with the timespan (From - To) and the number of data sets where any activity of the current login has been found.

To see the current activity on the server click on the button. A window as shown below will open listing all user related processes on the server.

 

Create a login

To create a new login, click on the button in the lower left corner. Another window will open.

Here you can enter the name of the new login and the password. To assign the user information click on the button to search for a name in the DiversityAgents database.

 

Copy a login

To copy a login including all permissions etc. into a new login, select the original login in the list and click on the button.

 

Edit login data

To edit the access for a login on the server, select the login in the list. If a login should be disabled , uncheck the enabled checkbox.

All databases on the server will be listed, with the current database showing a yellow background. The databases where the login has no access will be listed in gray while the databases accessible for a login are black.

 

Access of a login to a database

To allow a login the access to a database, select the database from the list and choose the database as shown below.

 

Roles of a login in a database

Use the > and < buttons to add or remove roles for the login in the database (see below). By clicking the button you get an overview of the access rights for the selected role.

 

Projects for a login in a database

Depending on the database you can edit the list of projects accessible for a login (see below). Next to the projects with full access a second list provides projects with Read Only access (see image below). Use the and buttons to move projects between Accessible and Read Only.  Projects are related to the module DiversityProjects. To get additional informations about a project, select it in the list and click on the button. 

If a project is not used within DiversityDescriptions (see cachedprojects) you may delete it by shifting it to No Access and clicking button Remove project . To load additional projects, click on the Load projects button. A window as shown below will open. Projects already in the database will be listed in green,
missing projects in red (see below). Check all projects you need in your database and click the Start download button.

 

Overview for a login

If you want to se see an overview of all permissions and project for a login, click on the button. A window as shown below will open. It lists all modules and their databases, the roles, accessible projects and read only projects for a login. 

To copy the permissions and projects of the current login to another login, select the login where the settings should be copied to from the list at the base of the window and click on the button to copy the settings for all databases or the button to copy the settings of the selected database into this login. 

 

Overview for a database

If you see an overview of all user and roles in a database, click on the button. A window a shown below will open. It lists all user and roles in the database. 

To remove a user, select it in the list and click on the button. 

 

Correction of logins

If you select one of the databases, at the base a button may appear. This indicates, that there are windows logins listed where the name of the login does not match the logins of the server. This may happen if e.g. a database was moved from one server to another. To correct this, click on the button. A list of deviating logins will be shown, that can be corrected automatically.

If logins with the same name but different server are found, one of them has to be deleted to make the correction possible. You will get a list where you can select those that should be removed.

Select the duplicate logins that should be removed and click OK.

Jan 14, 2025

Projects

Projects

Within DeversityDescriptions you have to distinguish the local projects and linked projects, which are connected to an entry in DiversityProjects. Administration of both projects is done in editprojects mode. For linked projects data of DiversityProjects are inserted during data publishing, e.g. by the cache database.

To link an entry, first the project data must be downloaded from DiversityProjects. For logins with Administrator rights there are two ways available, the menu item Administration-> Projects … and the Login administration.

In the login administration you may only download projects that are not yet present in DiversityDescriptions. With the menu item Administration-> Projects … you can additionally update loaded projects, e. g. if their name has been changed in DiversityProjects. In both cases a window as shown below will open. 

Projects already in the database will be listed in green, missing projects in red. Check all projects you need in your database and click the Start download button. After downloading a new project it is not yet accessible within DiversityDescriptions. Therefore use the Login administration to grant access rights to the users.

Within the Get Projects window you may get an overwiew of the present project by opening the Present projects tab and clicking the button (see image below). You can distinguish local project from linked projects by their negative “ID” and a missing “ProjectURI”. 

 

 

Checking projects data 

With DiversityDescriptions version 3.5.0 a new project handling has been introduced. Now for each project there is an entry in table Project and ProjectProxy with identical name. Therefore each project appears in the Login administration and individual access rights may be administrated. During the database update of earlier versions to database version 03.03.00 the existing project entries are processed the following way:

  1. Projects that are uniquely assigned to a DiversityProjects entry and have the same name in DiversityDescriptions stay unchanged.
  2. Projects that are uniquely assignment to a DiversityProjects entry but have a different name, are renamed in DiversityDescriptions. The original project name is entered in field Wording of the project table.
  3. All other projects become local projects, i.e. they are not linked to an DiversityProjects entry. Usually they keep their name, unless it would collide with projects mentioned in the previous items. In case of a collision a numeric value is appended to the original name and the original name is inserted in the Wording field of the project table. 

With menu item Administration-> Database …-> Check projects … you may check the consistency of the Project and ProjectProxy table. It shows you required database commands according the rules mentioned above. If you are a system administrator, you will be asked if the suggested actions shall be performed.

   

Projects and descriptions 

Each description is uniquely assigned to a project that determines its “terminology”, i.e. the descriptors and categorical states (see picture below from Edit description). Usually only projects that are assigned to the user are displayed in the project tree. The example beloe shows two projects assigned to the user that have a parent that is not assigned to the user. Therefore the parent (“Vögel”) is displayed with grey text colour and icon to indicate missing access rights. The project “Vögel weltweit” is set to read-only for the current user, therefore the display text has a grey text colour and icon is grey, too.

 

 

Projects and descriptors 

A descriptor is not directly assigned to a project, instead “descriptor trees” are used. One descriptor may be included in several descriptor trees and therefore belong to several projects or it might be unassigned. The picture below (from Edit descriptor) shows that one descriptor belongs to several projects, since it is part of different descriptor trees. As in the description example, the picture shows a parent project (“Vögel”) that is not accessible for the actual user and therefore displayed in grey text colour. Contained in that parent project there are two parallel projects that include the same descriptor: “Vögel Deutschlands” and “Vögel weltweit”, which is read-only and therefore displayed in grey colour. 

The Edit project panel provides the panel to edit descriptor trees, too. Here all descriptors for the selected projects are displayed (see picture below). For special purposes, e.g. copy of descriptor trees, other projects and their trees may be included in this view.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Security

Security

A user can be in 6 groups with diverse rights in the database where certain higher groups have all rights of lower groups in addition to special rights for this group, e.g. the group DataReader can only read the data while DescriptionsEditor has the rights of DataReader and additionally can edit the data in descriptor tables - see overview below.

Summarzied overview of the permissions of the groups

Role Permissions in addition to lower role resp. user group Inculded rights
Administrator Edit own user permissions; use database maintenance functions ProjectManager, CacheAdmin
ProjectManager Create, edit and delete project data; import data with project information TerminologyEditor
TerminologyEditor Create, edit and delete descriptor data; import data without changing project information   DescriptionsEditor
DescriptionsEditor Create, edit and delete description data DataReader
DataReader View description, descriptor, project and cache mapping data; export data DataUser
DataUser View descriptions without “withheld” descriptors and without resource data  

Two additional roles have been introduced for the handling of the cachedatabase

Role Permissions in addition to lower role resp. user group Inculded rights
CacheAdmin Edit cache related table data CacheUser
CacheUser View cache database and project data DataReader

In addition to the mentioned roles a “System Aministrator” may use the Login administration to add other users to one of these groups and grant access to one ore more projects. If you are an “Administrator” you have the right to modify the projects assigned to your own login.

To place a user in one of the groups, go to the loginadministration. In the window that will open select a login and a database. The roles available in the selected database will be listed as shown below. Use the > and < buttons to add or remove roles for the login in the database (see below).  

 

To see the detailed permissions of a role, select it in the list of Available roles and click on the button. A window as shown below will open listing all objects in the database the role has permissions for (see below).

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Tutorial

Tutorial - first steps

This tutorial will guide you through the first basic steps in DiversityDescriptions. After the installation, make sure you have access to the database. To start the programm double click on the DiversityDescriptions.exe in the directory where you copied the files of DiversityDescriptions. The main window will open.

 

In this tutorial it is assumed that you installed a local database server and are running DiversityDescriptions with the DiversityDescriptions_Worshop database available at our training server. If you are running a private environment with sufficient rights, you may create an empty DiversityDescriptions database. If you open this window for the first time, you need to connect to the database. Click on the button or choose Connection → Database… from the menu. A window will open where you may enter your account information and choose the database (see image below, for further information see databaseaccess).

 

After connecting to the server and choosing a database click on the OK button to return to the main form. As indicated by the symbol in the right upper corner, you are now connected to the database. The tooltip of the button will show your current login information (see below). 

 

 

Tutorial files

For DiversityDescriptions a number of tutorial files are available that provide examples, e.g. for using the matrix import wizard. The whole example demonstrated in the following pages is available as an SDD file and can easily imported. To copy the tutorial files into your resources directory select Administration->  Tutorial files … from the menu. 

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Tutorial

Tutorial Categorical Descriptor

Tutorial - Enter categorical descriptors

To create a new categorical descriptor, select edit mode descriptors from menu Edit->Descriptors. Now click on the button in the upper left panel (see point 1 in image below). 

The new descriptor is created with a numeric name. Change it to “Leaf length” (see point 2 in image above) and set the sequence number to “3” (see points 3 in image above). Now switch to the main tab and check that the descriptor type is “Categorical” (see points 4 and 5 in image above). Finally save the descriptor (see point 6 in image above) and the descriptor name will be updated in the header and the query panel at the left side of the window.

As for the other descriptors we want to attach a resource link to our new categorical descriptor, that symbolizes the descriptor’s duty (see image below, a link to Wikipedia was used).

 

Certainly the categorical descriptor shall be attached to the “Descriptor tree for tutorial” that was created in the last step. In the descriptor tree tab select “Descriptor tree for tutorial” and click button at the right tool bar (see image below).

 

For categorical descriptors we have to define categorical states, which define the possible character values. Select the “Categorical states” tab (see point 1 in image below) and enter the three categorical state names “green”, “yellow” and “red” in the table (see points 2 in image below). Finally save the descriptor (see point 3 in image below).

For each categorical state resources may be assigned. Therefore select the categorical state where you want to enter the resources (see point 1 in image below) and enter a resource name (see points 2 in image below). In this case we do not assign an URL to a picture but attach color values. Therefore click the color button in the task bar and select a color value (see points 3 to 5 in image below). Finally save the descriptor (see point 6 in image below).

For our tutorial we need a second each categorical descriptor. Create the categorical descriptor “Plant growth type” (see points 1 to 4 in image below). This descriptor shall always be used in the descriptions, therefor mark it as mandatory (see point 5 in image below). Finally save the descriptor (see point 6 in image below).

For descriptor “Plant growth type” enter the categorical states “Tree”, “Shrub”, “Herb”, “Succulent” and “Other” (see image below).

Finally append descriptor “Plant growth type” to the descriptor tree for tutorial (see image below).

A more detailled description of all editing options can be found in the Edit descriptors section of this manual.

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jan 14, 2025

Tutorial Descriptions

Tutorial - Enter description data

Now that we have entered several descriptors and categorical states we have defined a “terminology” to enter descriptive data. To create a new description, select edit mode descriptions from menu Edit->Descriptions. Now click on the button in the upper left panel (see point 1 in image below). If you are asked for the project, select “Tutorial”.

The new description is created with a numeric name. Change it to “Example plant” (see point 2 in image above) and check that project “Tutorial” is assigned to the new description (see points 3 in image above). Finally save the description (see point 4 in image above) and the description name will be updated in the header and the query panel at the left side of the window.

 

Enter resources for the description

As described for the descriptors, for each description resources may be assigned. Therefore click on the “Resource links” tab, which looks exactly the same as described in chapter “Enter a textdescriptor” (see image below, a link to Wikipedia was used).

 

 

Enter descriptive data

Now let’s start entering the descriptive data. Open the “Descriptor view” tab (see point 1 in image below). In the left part of the window there is a list of the desriptors. Select descriptor “Plant growth type” (see point 2 in image below) and on the right side the associated categorical states are diplayed. Click on the square in columne “x” besides the state “Tree” to set the check mark (see point 3 in image below). Finally save the description (see point 4 in image above).

 

Next select the descriptor “Literature” tab (see point 1 in image below). In principle you could enter a text in the right area “Descriptive text”, but for this example two other things shall be demonstrated. In the first column of the descriptor list the sequence number (“Nr.”) is displayed. A small square behind the number indicates that resources have been attached to the descriptor (see point 2 - upper arrow - in image below). You can view the attached resources by a double-click on the sequence number (see point 2 - right arrow - in image below). In some cases you do not have data available for a certain descriptor but you want to express that data should be entered. Therefore you can sen one or more “Status data” values in the right lower part of the window  (see point 3 in image below). Finally save the descriptor (see point 4 in image below).

For each categorical state resources may be assigned. Therefore select the categorical state where you want to enter the resources (see point 1 in image below) and enter a resource name (see points 2 in image below). In this case we do not assign an URL to a picture but attach color values. Therefore click the button in the “…” column and select a color value (see points 3 and 4 in image below). Finally save the descriptor (see point 5 in image below).

The last descriptor not yet used is “Leaf color”. Select it from the descriptor list an chek the categorical state “gree” (see points 1 and 2 in image below). The square in column “Nr.” of the “Categorical states” indicates that resources are attached. Double-click it to view the resources (see point 3 in image below). Since we attached three different colors for that categorical state, you may scroll through the different resources by using the “right” and “left” arrow key on the keyboard (see point 4 in image below). Finally save the descriptor (see point 5 in image below).

 

An alternate description data view

If you have defined many descriptors and one specific description references only a small amount of the descriptors, the “Descriptor view” might be quite confusing. In this case an alternate representation, the “Continuous view” might be helpful (see image below). Here only the descriptors that have been referenced in the description data are shown and the values (categorical states, statistical measures or plain text data) are attached at the descriptors. Additionally some extra information is color coded, e.g. “Plant type” is displayed in light red text because it is a mandatory descriptor. For details check the Editdescriptions section of this manual.

 

Enter description scope

As last step in this section the insert of “Description scopes” shall be demonstrated. In our example we want to enter a taxon name and link it to a taxon name service in the internet.

First select the “Main attributes” tab and click button if visible (see points 1 and 2 in image above). When you now select the scope type “Taxon name” (see point 3 in image above) you could enter a taxon name, e.g. “Ulmus campestris”, in the text box that appears right from the scope type. But we want to create a link to the internet service “Catalogue Of Life”, therefore press button . Now a separate window opens (see image below). Select “CatalogueOfLife” as database (see point 1 in image below). Enter the search string “ulmus camp” in the query field and start a search (see points 2 and 3 in image below). When you select a search reult (see point 4 in image below), you can watch the stored data in the lower part of the window. Finally click “OK” to store the link (see point 5 in image below).  

For scope type “Taxon name” links to three different internet services may be set. If you use the DiversityWorkbench module DiversityTaxonNames, you can build an own taxon database and link entries to descriptions. Other scoe types that allow linking to DiversityWorkbench modules are “Geographic area” (DiversityGazzeteers), “Reference” (DiversityReferences), “Specimen” (DiversityCollection) and “Observation” (DiversityCollection also). Additionally there are the scope types “Sex”, “Stage”, “Part” and “Other scope”, which have certain values defined in the Edit projects section. Remember that in step Create a new project we inserted the sex values “Male” and “Female” and assigned them for the tutorial project. Try to insert the scope value “Female” for the example description!

A more detailled description of all editing options can be found in the Edit descriptions section of this manual.

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jan 14, 2025

Tutorial Descriptor Dependencies

Tutorial - Enter descriptor dependencies 

In our final tutorial step we take a short look on the descriptor applicability rules. In out example we have two descriptors dealing with leaf properties, “Leaf color” and “Leaf length”. If you have chosen the categorical state “Cactus” for the descriptor “Plant growth type”, it usually does not make sense specifying leaf properties. You can enter such kind of descriptor dependencies in a formal way. 

Select edit mode projects from menu Edit->Projects , search for project “Tutorial” and open the “Descriptor applicabilities” tab (see points 1 to 3 in image above). Select the controlling descriptor “Plant type” (see point 4 in image above) and in the section “Controlling states” a list of the descriptor’s categorical states is displayed. Select the controlling state “Succulent” (see point 5 in image above) and then click on button to enter the first controlled descriptor (see point 6 in image above). This opens a selection window where you select descriptor “Leaf color”  (see point 7 in image above). Repeat the last step to insert descriptor “Leaf length” as second controlled descriptor. 

After that check that for the two dependent descriptors the applicability rule “inapplicable” is set (see point 1 in image below). Finally save all changes (see point 2 in image below). 

To try out the applicability rules,  select edit mode descriptions and search for the example plant (see points 1 and 2 in image below). Open the “Descriptor view” tab, expand the tree and select descriptor “Plant growth type” (see points 3 to 5 in image below). Click on button to show the “Categorial states”. Deselect state “Tree” and select state “Succulent” instead (see point 6 in image below). In the “Summary data” section the text color of the descriptors “Leaf color” and “Leaf length” changes to grey to indicate that the descriptor is not applicable. Since for that descriptors values have been specified, the backround color is changed to yellow to indicate that the applicability rules are broken (see point 7 in image below).

In the “Descriptor view” tab the “descriptor inapplicable” property is indicated by an “x” in column “!” of the descriptor list (see image below).

 

Jun 5, 2024

Tutorial Html

Tutorial - Generate an HTML document

Now that we have entered our first description data and learned how to find them in the database, we want to share that data. Search for the description of the example plant as described in the previous tutorial step (see image below).

      

From the menu choose Data →  Generate document … and a window will open as shown below. Select the “Example plant” (see point 1 in image below). Then set the options Include resources to show the images we have assigned and Include descriptors to generate the descriptor definitions in the same document (see point 2 in image below). Finally click on button Create HTML documentation and the data will be shown in the HTML window (see point 3 in image below). If you scroll down or click on a descriptor name in the description data you will find the descriptor data. In the working directory of Diversity Descriptions a HTML file has been generated that might be used to publish your data. 

 

  

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jul 5, 2024

Tutorial Modifiers

Tutorial - Assign modifiers 

Modifiers may be used in the description data for an additional characterization of categorical or quantitative descriptor data. There are five different modifier categories: Certainty, Seasonal, Diurnal, Misinterpretation and Other. An additional modifier class, Frequency is only applicable for categorical descriptors. Although you are allowed to define own modifier values, there is a large number of commonly used predefined modifier and frequency values, which should be preferred. We now want to insert those predefined values into the database. 

Select edit mode projects from menu Edit->Projects and open the “Modifier/Frequency” tab (see point 1 in image above). The modifier and frequency tables should both be empty. A click on button in the modifier section (see point 2 in image above) opens a window with the predefined values (see impage below left). Click on button selects all values from the list. Click “OK” and all modifier values are now inserted in the modifier table. Proceed in the same way with the frequency values (see point 3 in image above and image below right). The values are now available for all projects in the database. 

   

To use certain modifiers in the descriptive data, the allowed values must be assigned to certain descriptors. This is done int the descriptor tree in almost the same way as the assignment of statistical measures to quantitative descriptors. Select the “Descriptor tree” tab (see point 1 in image below) and click button to dispay the recommended values. Then select descriptor “Leaf color” and select some modifier and frequency values (see point 3 in image below). Finally save all changes (see point 4 in image below). 

Now let’s try out the modifiers in our example description. Select edit mode descriptions and search for the example plant (see points 1 and 2 in image below). Open the “Descriptor view” tab and select descriptor “Leaf color” (see points 3 and 4 in image below). In the “Categorial states” section you can now find two additional columns “Modifier” and “Frequence” where you may select from the values you assigned in the previeous step (see point 5 in image below). Finally save all changes (see point 6 in image below).

 

This tutorial is continued in the section listed below. ow.

May 3, 2024

Tutorial New Project

Tutorial - Create a new project

To create a new project, select edit mode projects from menu Edit->Projects. Now click on the button in the upper left panel and confirm with “Yes” (see point 1 in image below). 

The new project is created with a numeric name. Click on button  to change it to “Tutorial” (see point 2 in image above). Then check that no other project is selected as a parent of the new one (see point 3 in image above). Finally save the project (see point 5 in image above) and the project name will be updated in the header and the query panel at the left side of the window (see image below).

If you like, you may now enter additional project data like a detailled project descripition (“Details”), a copyright text (“Rights”), the address of a license text in the internet (“License” - button opens a browser window to navigate to the license page) and you may select the project’s lanuage (see point 1 in image below).

 

If you want to use scope values for sex in your descriptive data, select the scope category “Sex” (see point 2 in image above). Now the “Add” button is enabled. When you click on the button (see point 3 in the image above) a drop-down menu offers predefined sex values. Select “Male”, then again click on the “Add” button and select value “Female”. The two values are now appended to item “sex”. To make them available for the tutorial project click on the boxes before the values to set them checked (see point 4 in image above). If you click on one of the scope values, additional options are available in the task bar at the right (see image below). Finally save the project (see point 5 in image above)

 

For the other scope categories no predefined values exit. When you click the “ Add” button, values with a numeric name will be appended that can be renamed by clicking on button “ Edit” and selecting menu item “ Edit scope name”.

When you create a new project, your user account automatically gets access rights for that project. If you are “Administrator” - which is the case for user “Workshop” in the training database, you may take a look to the login administration from menu Administration->Database …->Logins …. Select the entry “Workshop” from Login, then click on the database “DiversityDescriptions_Base” and open the Projects tab in the login administration (see below). You find the new project “Tutorial” in the Accessible projects list.

If you are working with a private database installation and are logged in with the same Windows accout that has been used for installation of the Microsof SQL-Server, you are the “database owner” (dbo), which has the highest database access rights. In this case select entry “dbo” from Logins. As “dbo” you can administrate access rights of any user and create or delete logins. 

A more detailled description of all editing options can be found in the Edit projects section of this manual.

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jan 14, 2025

Tutorial Quantitative Descriptor

Tutorial - Enter a quantitative descriptor

To create a new quantitative descriptor, select edit mode descriptors from menu Edit->Descriptors. Now click on the button in the upper left panel (see point 1 in image below). 

The new descriptor is created with a numeric name. Change it to “Leaf length” (see point 2 in image above) and set the sequence number to “2” (see points 3 in image above). Now switch to the main tab and set the descriptor type to “Quantitative” (see points 4 and 5 in image above). For the quantitative descriptor we enter the measurement unit “cm”, a minimum and a maximum value (see points 6 and 7 in image above). Finally save the descriptor (see point 8 in image above) and the descriptor name will be updated in the header and the query panel at the left side of the window.

As for the text descriptor we want to attach a resource link to our new quantitative descriptor, that symbolizes the descriptor’s duty (see image below, a link to Wikipedia was used).

 

Certainly the quantitative descriptor shall be attached to the “Descriptor tree for tutorial” that was created in the last step. In the descriptor tree tab select “Descriptor tree for tutorial” and click button tab select “Descriptor tree for tutorial” and click button at the right tool bar (see image below).

 

For quantitative descriptors a number of statistical measures are defined, for which values can be entered in the descriptive data. In the descriptor tree fo each descriptor of descriptor tree node may be specified, which values shall be used in the descriptive data. A click on button opens the recommended statistical measures on the right side of the window (see image below). Select the quantitative descriptor in the descriptor tree and then check the statistical measures “Minimum value”, “Maximum value” and “Mean” (see image below).

A more detailled description of all editing options can be found in the Edit descriptors section of this manual.

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jan 14, 2025

Tutorial Query

Tutorial - Searching the database

To search for data in the database use the query sector in the left part of the window. Depending on the actually chosen edit mode - Descriptions, Descriptors or Projects - the query searches for descriptions, descriptors or (local) drojects. The query conditions are changed depending on the edit mode, too (see images below).

      

To select the query conditions click on the button in the top panel. A window will open as shown below.

 

With the Maximum number of results you may limit the package size which should be retrieved from the server. For a slow connection to the database server choose a low value (e.g. 100 as set by default).

The Limit for drop-down lists restricts the maximum number of drop-down lists which should be created. For a slow connection to the database server choose a low value. The default is set to 0 which means no drop-down lists will be created.

Click on the Check none button to clear the previous selection or click Check all to select all conditions. Alternatively you may display or hide each single query condition by checking or unchecking the entry in the list.

After all query conditions are set, click on the button to start the query. In the result list you should find the description, descriptors or project created in this tutorial. To save your current query click on the button on the right of the button. A window will open as shown below. For more details see the section Savequery.

When you enter new descripors to the databas it may happen that you forgot to assign it to descriptor tree. That means, those desriptor cannot be used for entering description data. Another action that may generate such orphaned descriptors is to delete a project. With that action implicitely the associated descriptions and descriptor trees will be removed from the database, but the descriptors will not be deleted, because they might be assigned to a different descriptor tree (and project).

To find and delete orphaned descriptors, set mode “Edit descriptors” (see point 1 in image below). Then set query condition “Descriptor tree - Assignment” to “missing” (see point 2 in image below) and start the search (see point 3 in image below). If you want to deleted the found descriptors, you can select them in the resulg list (multiple selection is possible) and click button to delete them. 

  

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jan 14, 2025

Tutorial Sort Descriptors

Tutorial - Sort the descriptors

In the tutorial steps when we created a new descriptor, we usually set the field “Nr.” (sequence number), which determines the sequence the descriptors are displayed in several lists, e.g. when you enter description data. If you like to change that display sequence, it is quite uncomfortable, to go through all descriptors and change the sequence numbers manually, but there is a much more comfortable way. Select edit mode projects from menu Edit->Projects or from the bottom control (see point 1 in image below). Now click on the button to find the project “Tutorial” (see points 2 and 3 in image below). Open the “Descriptor tree” tab and expand the trees (see points 4 and 5 in image below). 

The “Descriptor tree” tab in the “Edit projects” mode looks almost like that one in the “Edit descriptors” mode. But there are some important differences. If you are in the “Edit descriptor” mode, only the actually selected descriptor will be displayed in the tree. In the “Edit projects” mode all descriptors are diplayed! Therefore the descriptors may now be shifted up and down to change the order (see points 1 and 2 in image below). 

 

Now select the “Descriptor tree for tutorial” and click button (see image below left). With this action you indicate that this descriptor tree should be complete, i.e. it contains all descriptors for the project. Now the additional button is displayed that allows to take over of the descriptor tree order to the descriptor’s sequence numbers (see image below right).

   

When you click on button a window opens that displays the changed sequence numbers of the descriptors (see imabe above). After confirming the changes with “OK” the new order will be effective in the descriptor list of the “Edit descriptions” (see image below).

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

May 3, 2024

Tutorial Text Descriptor

Tutorial - Enter a text descriptor

To create a new text descriptor, select edit mode descriptors from menu Edit->Descriptors. Now click on the button in the upper left panel (see point 1 in image below). 

The new descriptor is created with a numeric name. Change it to “Literature” (see point 2 in image above), because this descriptor shall allow insert of literature references or citations as free form text into the description data. Then set the descriptor type to “Text” (see points 3 in image above) and set the sequence number to “1” (see points 4 in image above). Finally save the descriptor (see point 5 in image above) and the descriptor name will be updated in the header and the query panel at the left side of the window.

If you like, you may now enter additional descriptor data like a detailled project descripition (“Details”) or “Notes”. But we want to attach a resource link to our new text descriptor, that symbolizes the descriptor’s duty. Therefore select the “Resource links” tab (see point 1 in image below) and enter the resource name “Literature” (see point 2 in image below). Now you can enter the URL of a picture that is reachable in the internet (see point 3 in image below, a link to Wikipedia was used). Alternatively you may double-click on the “URL” field to open a browser window, where you can navigate to the picture location. Finally, don’t forget to save your changes (see point 4 in image below).

 

Until now the descriptor is not assigned to any project, i.e. it cannot be used for entering descriptive data. Assignment of descriptors to projects is done by using “descriptor trees”. This allows on the one hand a thematical grouping of the descriptors, on the other hand the descriptors may be appended to several trees simultaniously. I.e. descriptors my be used in several distinct projects.

Since no descriptor tree has been created yet, select the “Descriptor tree” tab (see point 1 in image below), right-click the project “Tutorial” and select context menu entry “Add descriptor tree” (see point 2 in image below). A new descriptor tree is appended to the project “Tutorial” with a numeric name. Right-click the descriptor tree and select “Edit name” from the context menu to change the name to “Descriptor tree for tutorial” (see point 3 in image below). To append the actual descriptor to the tree, click button at the right tool bar (see point 4 in image below). In the “Descriptor tree” tab most functions are alternatively accessible by the tool bar at the right or by the context menu that opens when you right-click a tree node. Finally, don’t forget to save your changes (see point 5 in image below).

 

A more detailled description of all editing options can be found in the Edit descriptors section of this manual.

 

This tutorial is continued in the sections listed below.

Jan 14, 2025

Query Overview

Queries - overview

With the user defined queries, you can define any query condition - this is the default query mode.

Depending on the active edit mode you get one of three different query option panels as shown in the pictures below.

In the lower part you may adjust the Query conditions to restrict the Query results shown in the upper part of the panel. In search texts you may enter SQL wildcards to specify ambigious conditions to match the data. By default only the most importand query conditions are displayed. To modify the query settings, refer to the Query options. Finally section Save query describes how to save and restore a certain query.

Description query window is available from the menu Query Description query …, where you may select and accumulate descriptions in a list. The regular description query is not capable to select descriptions with specific descriptor data. Therefore the Extended query is accessible from the menu Query Extended query …

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Query Overview

Queries Saved

Save query

If you want to save a current query, click on the button. A window as shown below will open where you can specify the title and description of you query.

After you entered title and description of the query, click OK to specify the query group. A window as shown below will open.

Choose a group from the tree or create a new one an click OK. The new query will be included in the selected group.

 

Finally you can edit the titles and descriptions of the groups an queries. Click the button to store the changes. To delete items from the tree, select it and click on the button. Click OK to save the new query and close the window.

 

Load query

If you want to load a query that has been stored previously, click on the button. A window as shown below will open.

 

Choose a query from the tree and click OK to close the form and filter the datasets according to the selected query.

May 3, 2024

Query

Query conditions

Depending on the activated edit mode you get one of the three query options pannel below. The options for a fast search are displayed in the main window beneath the list of the items. You can change this arrangement using the / button to place the query options on the left side of the item list.

To search for an item enter the restrictions in the fields for the search conditions and click on the button. The entities found in the database will be shown in the result list. To add items with differing search conditions click on the button. To clear all entries in the query fields use the button. If the list of items is longer than your maximal number of returned items you can browse the next items with the button. To move back to the previous block of items click on the button.

With button you can select all entries in the result list. If you want to remove entries from the selected list, choose them and click on the button. If you want to keep the selected entries in the list and remove the rest, click on the button. This will not delete the data from the database, but remove them from your query result. With the resp. buttons you can change the order of the results between ascending and descending. To hide the area containing the search fields click on the  button. If the search area is hidden and you want to start a new search, just click on the  button.

To see the command generated by the program to retrieve the data right-click on the button to open the context menu (see below).

A window will open containing the command used to retrieve the data (see below).

With the button you may control auto-remember of the last submitted query parameter. If you re-start the application and connect to the same database, the last used query will automatically be submitted. If you prefer to switch off auto-remember, click the button and it will change to . In the main menu Query → Preferred project … you may select a project that will be used as a pre-selection for Description and Descriptor query, if no other query parameter have been restored. 

Within the query options you have several possibilities to specify your search restriction. Use the drop down button to change between the operator. The available operators are shown in the table below.

Operator Meaning Example
Text
search for an entry like … Pinus s[iy]lvestris % (you can use wildcards)
= search for an entry exactly equal to … Pinus silvestris L.
search for an entry not like … Pinus s[iy]lvestris % (you can use wildcards)
search for an entry where a value is missing …
search for an entry where a value is present …
- search for an entry between … and … 2000 - 2005
| search within a list of entries, separated by “|” 2000 | 2003 | 2005
Numeric
= search for an entry exactly equal to … 2006
< search for an entry lower than … 2006
> search for an entry bigger than … 2006
- search for an entry between … and … 2000 - 2005
| search within a list of entries, separated by “|” 2000 | 2003 | 2005
search for an entry where a value is missing …
search for an entry where a value is present …
Date
= search for an entry exactly equal to … 20.3.2006
< search for an entry lower than … 20.3.2006
> search for an entry bigger than … 20.3.2006
search for an entry where the date is missing …
search for an entry where the date is present and complete …
Hierachy
= search for an entry exactly equal to … M-Fungi
search for an entry that is not equal to … M-Fungi
search for missing entry …
search for present entry …
Δ search including childs in a hierarchy … M-Fungi
XML
/ Search for entries containing a given XML node settings
¬ Search for entries not containing a given XML node settings
search for missing entry …
search for present entry …

For yes/no fields you will get an checkbox with 3 options: = yes, = no, = undefined 

 

Query in modules

In the query for scopes linked to another module click on the button to open a window where you can search for values within the linked module. A click on the button will show a list of the selected items, button the related database (see image below).

Module related restriction
Operator Meaning Example
Search for entries with a list ... Rosa | Rosa caninia | ...
Search for entries not within a list Rosa | Rosa caninia | ...
+H search for entry including lower hierarchy Picea | Picea abies | ...
+S search for entry including synonyms Picea abies | Pinus abies | ...
+HS search for entry including lower hierarchy and synonyms Picea | Picea abies | Pinus abies | ...
Change filter mode between link and text http://tnt.diversityworkbench.de/TaxonNames_Plants/4269
Picea abies L.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Query Options

Query options

The maximal number of items shown in a query result can be set in the window for the query options. The default value is set to 100. If you have a fast connection to your database or need to see more or less results, you may change this value to any number you like.

To change the displayed search fields click on the  button. This opens a form where you can select and deselect the fields shown for searching specimens. You might also change the maximum number of items that will be shown in the result list.

The limit for the creation of drop down lists is by default set to 0, that means no dropdown lists will be created. If you set the limit to e.g. 1000 and connect to a database, the programm will create drop down list based on the entries in the database to ease the entry in the query. For slow connections you may set this to lower value to speed up the start of the program. If you set the value to 0 no drop down lists will be created.

The minimal numbers of characters for a selection from the drop down list is by default set to 3.

After having edited the query options click OK to store your selection. The new selection will become active for the next query. To ease the selection and deselection of query options you may use the buttons Check all, Check none, Expand and Collapse.

To search for a field within the database, use the search function that will check the names and descriptions of the fields and mark them as shown below.

After having edited the query options click OK to store you selection. The new selection will become active for the next query.

May 3, 2024

Query Window

Collect descriptions

With menu item Query Collect descriptions … you can open a query window for descriptions as shown below. This window will also open when you click a description selection button in several other forms. 

Start a query and select the entries you want to take over into the result list. By clicking the button Add you insert the selected entries. With button Delete all you can clear the result list. By clicking on button you may open an extended query window and take over the results in the query result window. 

You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. To export the checked results to a tab-separated text file, click the button and view the exported list by clicking . If you want to view a single entry of the result list, you may select it in the result list and press the button. When you close the window by a click on the OK button, the checked entries are passed to the main window of Diversity Descriptions. 

May 16, 2024

Result list

Result list

The result list displays the descriptions, descriptors or projects found in a query.

With combobox order by: you may adjust the sorting and presentation of the query results. For example the descriptors may be displayed with their sequence number, name or ID on as shown in the images above.

You can restrict the maximal number of results together with the queryoptions (click on the button), for example if you have a slow connection to the database. As a default the maximal number is set to 100. If the number of datasets according to your query is higher than the maximal value set in the query options this will be indicated in the header of the list.

To search for items, enter the restrictions in the fields for the search conditions and click on the button. The items found in the database will be shown in the result list. To add items that match differing search conditions click on the button. If the list of items is longer than your maximal number of returned items you can browse the next items with the button. With button you can select all entries in the result list. If you want to remove entries from the selected list, choose them in the list and click on the button. If you want to keep the selected entries in the list and remove the rest, click on the button. This will not delete the data from the database, but remove them from your query result.

Jan 14, 2025

Wildcards

Wildcards in SQL

There are 4 different possibilities for wildcards in SQL:

%     any string consisting of no, one or many characters, e.g. Pinus % will find anything like Pinus, Pinus sylvestris, Pinus strobus etc.

*     any string consisting of no, one or many characters, e.g. Pinus * will find anything like Pinus, Pinus sylvestris, Pinus strobus etc.

_      a single character, e.g. Pinus s**_lvestris will find Pinus sylvestris and Pinus si**lvestris etc.

[]     ** any character out of a given range like [abcde] or [a-e], e.g. Pinus s[iy]**lvestris will find Pinus sylvestris and Pinus silvestris.

[^]   any character not in a given range like [^abcde] or [^a-e], e.g. Pinus s**[^i]**lvestris will find Pinus sylvestris but not Pinus silvestris.

May 3, 2024

Extended Query

Extended query - introduction

With this form you can search description data from the database that match specific conditions of the description data, description scopes and descriptor values. Choose Query → Extended query … from the menu to open the extended query window (see image below). With the button  you can set the timeout for critical database queries, with button you can set the timeout for the web access to resource data. Feedbacks can be sent with the button .

 

First the Project must be selected from the combo box in the upper window area. If you want to include matches that are assigned to the selected project only in the additionalprojects field, check the Additional projects option. The Matches: field shows the number of available description datasets. If any matches are available, the Show matches button is active and by clicking it the datasets are listed in the Result list section (see image below).

 

If you want to view a single entry of the result list, you may select it by a single click on the entry and press the View in separate window button. You may check all entries by clicking the all button, uncheck all entries by clicking the none button or toggle the check marks by clicking the swap button. You may export the checked results to a tab-separated text file by clicking the button and view the exported list by clicking . When you close the window by a click on the OK button, the checked entries are passed to the parent form, e.g. the main window of Diversity Descriptions (see below). If you do not want to take over the query results to the parent form, close the extended query by pressing the Cancel button.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Extended Query

Extended Query Parameter

Extended query parameter

As you have seen in the introduction the basic filter in the extended query are the selected Project and Additional projects. You may introduce additional query restrictions for description data, description scopes and descriptor conditions, which are shown in the Query parameter area. By clicking on button Add description, Add scope or Add descriptor in the Query parameter tool strip a query parameter control is inserted at the end of the query parameter list. When you enter query parameter, the field Matches: will be updated immediatly. To see the Result list, you will have to click on button Show matches (see picture below). 

If you have entered several parameter controls, you might wish to de-activate one of them temporarily, e.g. to check its effect on the result list. Remove the check mark in the beginning of the first line of the query parameter (see item 1 in image below) and the whole condition will be ignored. Below this check box you find by default the symbol (see item 2 in image below), which means “logical AND”. If you specify several query parameter controls, which are all adjusted to , a matching description must fulfill all entered query conditions simultaneously.

You may click on the symbol to change it to (see item 3 in image below), which means “logical OR”. In this case the result list will include all descriptions that fulfill the first descriptor condition and additionally all descriptions, which fulfill the second condition. I.e. each “AND” condition will reduce the list of matching descriptions and each “OR” condition will add its matching descriptions to the result list.  

By clicking on a parameter control it is selected as the active control (see above). The active parameter control is shown with light blue background. The resulting SQL query may be viewed with button . You can delete the current query control by clicking on button Remove or all query controls by clicking on button in the Query parameter tool strip.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Extended Query Parameter

Extended Query Description

Extended query parameter - Description conditions

Press button Add description in the Query parameter tool strip to insert a new query parameter condition to search for specific values in the description data. A control representing a single description data filter will be added at the end of the query parameter list. You may enter filter criteria for the description ID, Title text, Details text and AID text (alternate id). To enable a certain item, select the check box before the parameter text (picture below). For the numeric parameter ID you may enter a number and select the comparer by clicking the  button . Available comparers are = (equal), (not equal), < (less), > (greater), (less or equal) and (greater or equal).   

 

For the text parameters (title, details and AID) you may enter a search text and select one the matching options Contains, Starts with, Ends with or Exact match. Capitalization is not taken into account. For option Contains the database text must contain the search text. The options Starts with and Ends with only check the database text begin rsp. end for a match. Finally option Exact match requires identical texts. For option Exact match you may enter an empty text, which will match if in the database an empty text or a NULL value (if a NULL value is allowed) is present. For the other matching options an empty search text does not make sense because it will allways match. By checking the Invert option you may invert the search criteria. E.g. the option Exact match with empty search text and Invert will search for “text present” (“not empty string”). You may use the wildcards _, [] and [^] in your search text, but not %. % is automatically inserted in the correct places by selecting the matching option.

If you entered more than one condition as shown in the image above (ID and Title text), the default adjustment is that all conditions must match. This is indicated by the symbol behind the text Description data in the header line, which means “logical AND”. If you want to get a match for any of the entered conditions, you may click on the symbol to change it to “logical OR” (see image below). 

The next example shows how two description conditions are used to exclude a certain number range of the ID from the result list. The first condition restricts the result list to all IDs smaller than 343. The second condition adds all results with IDs larger than 426, which is achieved by a logical OR of the condition operator (). In this example it does not matter which one of the two conditions is marked as “AND” rsp. “OR”. If both conditions would be marked as “OR”, there would not be any restriction left except the project.  

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Extended Query Descriptor

Extended query parameter - Descriptor conditions

Press button Add descriptor in the Query parameter tool strip to insert a new query condition for the search of specific values in the description summary data. A control representing a single descriptor filter will be added at the end of the query parameter list. Now you have to select the descriptor that shall be included in the search filter. This can be done by selecting the descriptor’s sequence number with combo box No.:, from an alphabetical descriptor list with combo box Descriptor: or by selecting from the descriptor tree with button (see picture below). 

 

After selecting the descriptor the query control shows query parameters depending on the descriptor type (see below). You may search for descriptions that do not have any data for the selected descriptor by checking option absent. The currently marked parameter control is shown with light blue background. You can delete the current query control by clicking on button Remove or all query controls by clicking on button in the Query parameter tool strip.

In the parameter control the descriptor type is indicated by symbols in the beginning of the first line ( categorical, quantitive, text or sequence). If additional information for the descriptor are available in the database, you can show them as bubble help by moving the mouse cursor over the symbol. If resource data are available for a descriptor, the symbol is displayed with coloured background and you can view them by double-clicking it (see image below).

   

Each parameter control has two main sections:

  • At the left you find the section for the descriptor parameter, depending on its type (Categorical states, Statistical measures, Descriptive text or Molecular sequence). If this section is checked and no other data have been entered, the query filters for all descriptions that include any value for that descriptor, e.g. any descriptive text or any categorical state. You may search for descriptions without descriptor data by checking option no value. By entering additional query data, the filter becomes more restrictive.  
  • At the right you find the section for the descriptor Status data. If this section is checked and no status value has been selected, the query filters for all descriptions that include any status data value for that descriptor. At the end of the Status data check box by default the symbol indicates that all selected data status values must be present in the matching descriptions. By checking dedicated status data values, the filter becomes more restrictive (logical AND). If you click on the symbol you can change it to (logical OR) to find matches for any of the selected status data values.  

If both sections are selected, matching descriptors must fulfill both conditions, i.e. the value must be present and the status data value must be set.

 

Notes

In the descriptive data you may enter free text notes to all text and sequence data. Furthermore individual notes may be entered for every selected categorical state and statistical measure. You may include additional query contitions for each of those notes, therefore the symbol is included at the appropriate places. To enter a query condition, click the button and a window as shown below will be opened.

You may enter a Search text that shall be part of the notes text. Capitalization is not taken into account. For option Contains the notes text must contain the search text. The options Starts with and Ends with only check the descriptor text begin rsp. end for a match. Finally option Exact match requires identical texts. Check the option Invert to invert the search criteria. You may use the wildcards _, [] and [^] in your search text, but not %. % is automatically inserted in the correct places by selecting the matching option.When you click OK the additional query condition will be active and the icon background changes to red (). If you want to remove the query condition, open the notes form, uncheck the Enable notes filter option and click OK.

For text and molecular sequence data exactly one note is possible for each descriptor value, therefore you find exactly one symbol for entering a query condition. For categorical and quantitative data you may enter a note for each single state rsp. statistical measure. Here you may search for notes of the specific state rsp. measure by clicking on the symbol located at the element. Additionally you may search for notes entered at any state or measure of the descriptor. Therefore an additional symbol is located in the header section besides the no value check box (see image above). 

 

Modifier and frequency

In categorical and quantitative descriptive data you may select modifier values for every selected categorical state and statistical measure. For categorical data additionally a frequency value may be selected. You may include additional query contitions for each of those modifier and frequency values, therefore the symbols (modifier) and (frequency) are included at the appropriate places. To enter a query condition, click the button and a window as shown below will be opened.

You may select the modifier rsp. frequency values for filtering from the recommended values of the current descriptor. Check the option Invert to invert the search criteria. A hint text explaining the resulting filter will be displayed in the lower area of the window. When you click OK the additional query condition will be active and the icon background changes to red (, ). If you want to remove the query condition, open the form, uncheck the Enable filter option and click OK.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Extended Query Descriptor

Extended Query Categorical

Extended query parameter - Categorical states

In this query control the categorical states are listed. If pictures or colours are assigned to the categorical states, they can be viewed by clicking on the state name (see picture below). You may switch off automatic loading of the resource view by clicking the button (“no web”), which will be indicated by a yellow symbol background. If this “no web” option is activated, only local resources, e.g. colours, will be shown. If during loading of remote resources an error occurs, e.g. due to a timeout, the “no web” option will automatically be activated. 

You may change the display order of the states between the standard numeric order , alphabetical order and reverse alphabetical order by clicking the appropriate button. If the state list exceeds the standard height of the control, a scroll bar will show at the right side of the state list. You can enlarge the control by clicking the button at the lower left side (see picture above). To return to the standard size, click on button  (see picture below).

Categorical states that are not checked are not relevant for the filter. If you want to search for a categorical state that is NOT present, check the option invert behind the categorical state name (see picture below). You may search for descriptions that do not have selected any of the categorical states by checking option no value.

By default all categorical states of a descriptor that are selected must be present in the matching descriptions. You may change this logical AND to a logical OR by clicking on the symbol behind the no value check box, which will change to symbol (see picture below). Now all descriptions will match, which include one of the selected states. 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Extended Query Quantitative

Extended query parameter - Statistical measures

In this query control the recommended statistical measures are listed. You may enter a single value for an exact match in the from: field or a value range in from: and to: (see picture below). If you enter no numeric values (or only a value in to:), a search for value presence will be performed. Remark: If you modify a value in a from: or to: field, you must leave the field to update the Matches: count. If you want to exclude the specified value range from the query, check the invert option. If you do not enter a value, the statistical measure is checked for presence.

If the statistical measure list exceeds the standard height of the control, a scroll bar will show at the right side of the statistical measure list. You can enlarge the control by clicking the button at the lower left side (see picture above). To return to the standard size, click on button  (see picture below).

Statistical measures that are not checked are not relevant for the filter. If you want to search for a statistical measure that is NOT present, check the option invert and do not enter any values (see picture below). You may search for descriptions that do not have specified any statsistical measure by checking option no value.

By default all statistical measure conditions of a descriptor that are selected must be fulfilled in the matching descriptions. You may change this logical AND to a logical OR by clicking on the symbol behind the no value check box, which will change to symbol (see picture below). Now all descriptions will match, which include one of the selected measure conditions. 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Extended Query Sequence

Extended query parameter - Molecular sequence

In this query control you may enter a Sequence that shall be part of the molecular sequence data. Capitalization is not taken into account. For option Contains the sequence text must contain the search string (see image below). The options Starts with and Ends with only check the descriptor text begin rsp. end for a match. Finally option Exact match requires identical texts. You may use the wildcards _, [] and [^] in your sequence text, but not %. % is automatically inserted in the correct places by selecting the matching option.

Check the option Invert to invert the search criteria (see picture below), i.e. there is a match if the molecular sequence does NOT contain, start or end with the specified Sequence. The query condition Invert with Exact match and empty Sequence is the query for molecular sequence present. A molecual sequence can only be absent if notes are present, because otherwise the descriptor had no value. You may search for descriptions that do not have specified any descriptor data by checking option no value

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Extended Query Text

Extended query parameter - Descriptive text

In this query control you may enter a Search text that shall be part of the text descriptor data. Capitalization is not taken into account. For option Contains the descriptor text must contain the search string (see image below). The options Starts with and Ends with only check the descriptor text begin rsp. end for a match. Finally option Exact match requires identical texts. You may use the wildcards _, [] and [^] in your search text, but not %. % is automatically inserted in the correct places by selecting the matching option.

Check the option Invert to invert the search criteria (see picture below), i.e. there is a match if the descriptive text does NOT contain, start or end with the specified Search text. The query condition Invert with Exact match and empty Search text is the query for descriptive text present. A descriptive text can only be absent if notes are present, because otherwise the descriptor had no value. You may search for descriptions that do not have specified any descriptor data by checking option no value.   

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Extended Query Scope

Extended query parameter - Scope conditions

Press button Add scope in the Query parameter tool strip to insert a new query parameter condition to search for specific description scope data. A control representing a single description scope filter will be added at the end of the query parameter list. Now you have to select the Scope type that shall be included in the search filter. You have the choice between the general scope types ( Geographic area, Sampling plot, Reference, Observation, Specimen and Taxon name) and the project specific scope types (Other scope, Sex, Stage and Part). The project specific scope types are only shown if values have been entered in the database (see Editing the project). 

 

General scopes

After selecting the scope type a query control as shown in the image below is available. You may search for descriptions that do not have any scope of the selected type by checking option no value. Otherwise the two text search fields Scope text and Scope URI are available, which can be activated by checking the box before the text. 

 

You may enter a search text and select one the matching options Contains, Starts with, Ends with or Exact match. Capitalization is not taken into account. For option Contains the database text must contain the search text. The options Starts with and Ends with only check the database text begin rsp. end for a match. Finally option Exact match requires identical texts. For option Exact match you may enter an empty text, which will match if in the database an empty text or a NULL value (if a NULL value is allowed) is present. For the other matching options an empty search text does not make sense because it will allways match. By checking the Invert option you may invert the search criteria. E.g. the option Exact match with empty search text and Invert will search for “text present” (“not empty string”). 

With the query option Module filter you may build a item list from a linked database using a remore query. You may search for scopes that match one of the entries (operator ) or do not link any of the entries (operator ). You may select the operator by clicking the drop down button . To build the list click on the button to open a window where you can search for values within the linked module. A click on the button will show a list of the selected items, button the related database (see image below).

 

A click on the button switches the filter mode between link search and text search. For some scope types, e.g. Taxon names, additional operations are available (see image below). While for the standard operations all elements of the query result are entered into the item list, they will take the selected value as starting value and add synonym/hierarchy values.

Operator Meaning Example
Search for entries with a list ... Rosa | Rosa caninia | ...
Search for entries not within a list Rosa | Rosa caninia | ...
+H search for entry including lower hierarchy Picea | Picea abies | ...
+S search for entry including synonyms Picea abies | Pinus abies | ...
+HS search for entry including lower hierarchy and synonyms Picea | Picea abies | Pinus abies | ...
Change filter mode between link and text http://tnt.diversityworkbench.de/TaxonNames_Plants/4269
Picea abies L.

If you entered more than one condition, the default adjustment is that all conditions must match. This is indicated by the symbol behind the text Description scopes and the no value check box, which means “logical AND”. If you want to get a match for any of the entered conditions, you may click on the symbol to change it to “logical OR”. 

 

Project scopes

After selecting a project specific scope all available values inserted in the database will be listed (see image below). You may select one ore more of the avalable values. Furthermore you may check the invert option to search for description entries that do not include the specified scope value. 

If you entered more than one condition, the default adjustment is that all conditions must match. This is indicated by the symbol behind the text Description scopes and the no value check box, which means “logical AND”. If you want to get a match for any of the entered conditions, you may click on the symbol to change it to “logical OR” (see image below). 

The project specific scope values must be marked as “recommended” for each project. In the query control you will be shown every value, but the not recommended ones will be listed with an appropriate text shown in the image below. 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Extended Query Save

Save and load extended query

The complete query schema may be saved into an XML file using the button , which opens a dialog window to enter the file name and location. By default the schema file name is generated as:

     <working directory>\ExtendedQuery\DescriptionQuery_<Database name>_<Project>.xml 

The XML schema file includes information concerning the database, the project and the query parameter. By pressing the button in the Query parameter section, a query schema file can be opened. If the schema does not meet the active database you will be informed by a message box. In the query file all relevant parameter are identified by the database internal numeric IDs. If no matching values are found, it is tried to get them by their names. Since the names might be ambigious, the corresponding element are displayed with a yellow background colour (see image below).

 

If the parameter could not even be assigned by their names, this is indicated by a red background color (see picture below).   

May 3, 2024

Data Editing

Editing the data

The database of DiversityDescriptions consists of three major areas:  

  • The descriptive data (descriptions) reference elements of the descriptive terminology and add specific data, e.g. numeric values.
  • The descriptive terminology, consisting of descriptors, categorical states, statistical measures and modifiers. 
  • The project data build the administrative frame for terminology and descriptions. Each description belongs to exactly one project. By additional entities (descriptor tress) it is possible to restrict the descriptors, statistical measures and modifier that shall be used in a certain project.  

In almost all forms an Extended text editor can be opened for single text fields that provides additional editing features.  

Corresponding with that three major sections of the data model, the DiversityDewscriptions application provide three edit modes. The edit mode is diplayed at the bottom of the main window (see picture below). After the first start the edit mode is preselected to “Edit descriptions”. You can switch the edit mode using the menu Edit-> DescriptionsEdit→ Descriptors or Edit-> Projects. Alternatively you may switch the edit mode by click the mode button in the upper left corner of the header area (item 3 in picture below) or on the tiny triangle besides the edit mode display in the status line at the bottom (see item 4 in picture below).

The main window of the DiversityDescriptions client contains two main areas. At the left you find the query and the results of this query. In the right part the data of the dataset selected in the result list is shown.

 

Basic operations

In each edit mode there are some common functions for storing and reloading data, to create a new dataset or delete or copy the actual dataset. On top of the query results (item 1 in image above) there is button to store the actual dataset, button to delete the actual dataset and button to create a new dataset. By pressing button  the actual dataset is reloaded, i.e. changes that have been made will be dropped. Finally, button copies the data of the actual dataset to a new one.

Some of those buttons can be found in the tool bar at the right side of the edit window (item 2), too.

Additionally to explicit saving by pressing the button, an automatic saving of the dataset is done, if an entry in the query result list is selected or a new query is performed. If a dataset has been modified without saving, a message window will appear and ask if changes shall be saved for several actions, e.g. change of edit mode, connetion to a database or if the application is closed. 

 

Translations

For many database tables the text columns may be translated into different languages. To enter, modify or view the translated texts, use the translations editor. For an overview on multilingualism in Diversity Descriptions see chapter translations.  

 

Description HTML form

When you have started a query and selected a description, you may open an HTML form to view and edit the data (button marked as item 5 in image above). It provides a simplified user interface for access to a subset of the description data. 

 

Description grid view

An alternate form for editing or viewing the data of several descriptions in a grid is provided by the description gridview. It provides a simplified user interface for access to a subset of the description data. 

 

Sample data grid view

An alternate form for editing or viewing the sample data of several descriptions in a grid is provided by the sample data gridview

 

Table editors

For a selected set of database tables a direct data editing in a grid is provided by the table editors

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Editing

Edit Description

Editing the description

After starting a database query and selecting an entry in the result list the dataset is diplayed in the edit window. In the header area the dataset name, the default project language and the URI of the current dataset are show (see picture below). Below the header area the description name may be edited in a text box. Changes of the description data, e.g. the name, will be visible in the header after saving the dataset. To check dataset changes, click on the button to open the history. By clicking button you may open a simplified HTML form to view and edit the description data.

The main description data may be accessed in the first Mainattributes tab, which is described below. Click on one of the other tabs in the picture below to go directly to the appropriate manual chapter.

img/DD_Description_Main

 

Main attributes tab

The main attributes tab provides in the upper area a field to enter additional description details and a wording for natural language support. The optional filed AID may keep an alpha-numeric alternate ID of the dataset. If used, it should be unambigious within the project, but this is not checked by the program. Click on to get an overview of the used keys. 

 

Scopes

The next section Description scopes allows specification of description scopes. This sections consists of the scope table with scope type and value and a edit section to modify a seleted scope entry or to enter e new scope. The scope types Geographic ares, Reference, Specimen, Observation and Taxon name allow input of a free-form text or reference to the corresponding DiversityWorkbench module or a web service. The connection to to a module or web service is done using the button . After selecting the entry in the referenced database the text will be taken over and the backround colour of the scope value field changes to yellow. A further editing of the text will not be possible (see below).

 

Additionally the edit section now shows the buttons to view the database link and  to remove the database link. In the latter case editing of the scope value will be possible again.

If a scope entry has been selected in the scope table, it can be modified in the edit section. If you want to enter a new scope value instead, press the button at the end of the edit line. The scope entry in the scope table will be deselected and a selection box for the scope type appears in the edit section (see below).

You may insert mutiple scope values with links to a DiversityWorkbench module or a webservice. Therfore enter a new scope value with scope type Geographic ares, Reference, Specimen, Observation and Taxon name (or select one, which is not yet linked). Besides the scope type dropdown box the button is shown, which allows insert of multiple scopes (see image below).

You may insert mutiple scope values with links to a DiversityWorkbench module or a webservice. Therfore enter a new scope value with scope type Geographic ares, Reference, Specimen, Observation and Taxon name (or select one, which is not yet linked). Besides the scope type dropdown box the button is shown, which allows insert of multiple scopes (see image below).

In the remote query panel you find the section Unit list, where you may add the currently selected query result by clicking the button. When you select an entry in the Unit list, you may remove it by clicking or view the data in a separate window by clicking . When you have collected all query results click the OK button and the scopes are inserted for the description (see below).

 

Project scopes

Besides the already mentioned scope types that allow input of a free text or reference to a database entry, the scope types Sex, Stage, Part and Other scope provide pre-defined scope values. The values can be administrated as described in the Editing theProject chapter. For each project a different set of values can be selected as “recommended” values. If for the current description project scope values are defined/assigned, they are shown in the right part of the description scopes as Project scopes (see below).

Selecting or deleting of a scope entry can be easily done by selecting clickin on the check box before the scope value. You may select rsp. deselect all scope values of a certain scope type (Sex, State, Part or Other scope) by clicking the check box of the category. If for a scope value a detailled description text has been stored, you may view it as bubble help by moving the mous cursor over the values.

If for a description a scope value is selected, that is not assigned to its project, the value ist show with yellow background (see below). Such a situation can occur, if the scope value has been removed for the project or if a description has been moved to a different project. 

 

Project

The section Project allows the selection of the project the description is assigned to. This adjustment has influence of the available values of scope types Sex, Stage and Other scope, the available descriptors and recommended modifier/frequency values and statistical measures of the description. Therefore this unambiguous adjustment might be seen as the “terminology project” of the description item. The access rights for a certain user to the projects are controlled with the login settings (see chapter Loginadministration). When you click on a project name, you may view some additional project data (see image below middle). 

     

If access to a certain project is restricted to “read only”, it is displayed with grey colour and symbol in the Project section (see pictures above). A “read only” project cannot be selected for the actual description. If the selected description has already been assigned to a “read only” project by another user with appropriate rights, this is indicated at the right bottom corner of the application window (see above below right).

 

Additional projects

In section Additional projects you may make the description accessible for additional projects. To assign a description to a project click on the  button. To remove it from a project, select the project from the list and click on the  button. Additional projects without write access are shown in the upper part of the window, projects with full access in the lower (or only) part (see image below). If you do not have any access to a project, it is shown as red text. Be aware that by entering additional projects you may grant editing rights for single descriptions to users that have no write access to the current project!

     

Be aware that by entering additional projects you may grant editing rights for dedicated descriptions to users that have no write access to the current project! If you have write access to the terminologyproject of a description item and granted access to another project, where you have read-only access, you nevertheless may withdraw these rights by removing it from the Additional projects.

   

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Edit Description

Edit Description Continuous View

Editing the description - Continuous view tab

The continuous view tab provides an alternate view on the descriptive data. In the Summary data only the descriptors are included where data have been entered. At the right side there is a tool strip. The displayed buttons will change depending on the selected entry. The descriptor types categorical, quantitive, text and sequence are indicated by different colours and icons as shown in the example at the bottom. By pressing the button on the tool strip this example may be hidden. Descriptors that are marked as mandatory are displayed with light red text, descriptors that are inapplicable are greyed out. Additionally coloured background indicated possible problems, e.g. if an inapplicability rule has been ignored or a not allowed descriptor has been used. A tool tip text shows the error or warning reason when the mouse curser is moved over the element.

By pressing the button the tree view may be expanded to display the contained categorical states, quantitative measures or texts. By pressing the button the tree will be collapsed to descriptor level.

To insert a descriptor press , to delete a descriptor select the entry and press . If only a single value shall be removed, select the entry and use the button. All these functions can alternatively be accessed by the context menu by a right-click on the tree node.

If for a descriptor resources, e.g. pictures, are avaialble, this is indicated by the background color of the descriptor icon. Categorical states with resources are marked with icon (see first entries in picture above). The resources may be accessed by a right-click on the tree node and selecting context menu item View resources (see picture above).

 

Structured descriptor view

If for the project a structured descriptor tree is defined, i.e. a descriptor tree that contains at least one descriptor tree node, the Descriptor tree: drop-down list is shown below the descriptor tree (see image below left). If a descriptor tree is selected, the descriptor tree node hierarchy will be included in the output and the descriptors will be arranged accordingly. The names of the descriptor tree nodes and the descriptors will be reduced by parts contained in the supriour hierarchy nodes (see image below right).  

If for a descriptor tree node resources are available, this is indicated by the grey background color of the descriptor tree icon. The resources may be accessed by a right-click on the tree node and selecting context menu item View resources. Additional descriptor tree node information, e.g. an optional abbreviation or details text can be viewed as bubble help by placing the mouse cursor over the item.  

 

Editing summary data

A click on opens an edit window at the right part of the tab. This window provides the same functions as available in the descriptor view tab. The picture below shows the resource linked to a categorical state that can be opened by doule-clicking the state ID in the Categorical states section. 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Description Descriptor View

Editing the description - Descriptor view tab

The left part of the descriptor view tab shows all descriptors available for the description’s project. The entries in column “!” indicate some additional information about the descriptor:

  • Descriptor is referenced in the summary data (●)
  • Descriptor is referenced in the status data (○)
  • Descriptor is mandatory, values must be specified (!)
  • Descriptor is inapplicable because of other specified descriptors/categorical states (x)
  • Descriptor is exclusive, only one categorical states shall be selected (e)

If resources are linked to a descriptor, the entry is marked by a square (□) behind its sequency number and a tool tip appears when the mouse cursor is moved over the “No.” column (see below). By double-clicking the sequence number a “Media view” window can be opened to view the resources.

 

If for the project descriptor trees are defined, the Descriptor tree: drop-down list and Restricted check box are shown below the descriptor list (see image below left). If a descriptor tree is selected, the names of the descriptor tree node hierarchy is included in the descriptor names (see image below right). This feature is useful, if several descriptors with ambigious names exist the can now be distinguished. E.g. two descriptors “colour”, one at descriptor tree node “Leaf”, the other at descriptor tree node “Blossom” will become “Leaf colour” and “Blossom colour”. If the descriptor name already includes the hierarchy, the duplicate parts will be filtered. In the mentioned example the descriptor names “Leaf colour” and “Blossom colour” will not be changed, if the descriptor tree is selected.

If additionally the Restricted option is set, only the descriptors included in the selected descriptor tree are displayed (see image below right, missing descriptor number 14). So you have the option to create several descriptor trees that include only special aspects of the description’s property (e.g. morphology, molecular biology and so on) to get a clearly arranged descriptor list. 

 

Editing summary data

The right part of the descriptor view tab shows at the bottom the Status data values of the selected descriptor. It is possible to select several values for each descriptor. In the “Notes” column additional information concerning the selected data status may be entered. By a double click on the “Notes” entry a separate edit window can be opened.

Depending on the descriptor type you can find at the top either Categorical states (see large picture above), Statistical measures, Descriptive text or Molecular sequence (see pictures below). In the “Notes” columns additional information concerning the specific categorical state rsp. statistical measure may be entered. By a double click on the “Notes” entry a separate edit window can be opened.

  

To enter a statistical measure value click in the “Value” field and enter the value, the check mark in field “x” will be set automatically. If recommended modifier values are defined (see “Editing the Descriptor” and “Editing the Project”), a value may be selected from the drop down list “Modifier”. If no modifier values are available, the appropriate table column may be hidden. In the “Notes” field an additional text may be added. By double-clicking the “Notes” field the Extended texteditor can be opened.

The descriptive text may be edited diretly in the window, which shows the pure text without any formatting. In the notes field an additional text may be entered. By double-clicking the text fields the Extended text editor can be opened. 

The molecular sequence window displays in the status line below the edit area the sequence type (“Nucleotide” or “Protein”), the symbol length (“Len:”) in case of proteine sequences, the gap symbol (“Gap:”) if defined, the long text of the actual element and the position (“Pos:”) (see image below). In case of three-letter proteine symbols the position is the number of the amino acid symbol, not the character position. By pressing the TAB key the cursor jumps to the next symbol. 

When characters are entered in the edit area that are recognized as valid symbols, they will automatically be formatted. One-letter symbols are converted to upper case characters, three-letter symbols are converted according the “Xxx” schema, e.g. “Ala” for “Alanine”. The sybols for the nucleotide bases "Adenine", "Cytosine", “Guanine”, "Thymine" and "Uracil" are dispayed with different colors. Ambiguity symbols and gap symbols are shown in grey color. If the ambiguity symbols have not been enabled in the descriptor data, they will be displayed with yellow background. Symbols that have not been recognized are displayed with red background. 

The molecular sequence window offers some additional functions available in the sequence menu. It may be opened by moving the mouse cursor over the control header (“Molecular sequence”, see window below left) or from the context menu (right-click on the sequence edit area, see windows below right). With menu item Import you may read the seqeunce data from a file and insert them to the description. With menu item Export you may export the actual sequence data to a file.  

   

By double-clicking the molecular sequence area or from sequence menu Open → Sequence a separate edit window may be opened (see image below). On the top of the window there is the drop-down menu Insert symbol: where a value may be selected from a list. After selecting the value press the [ENTER] key or click on to insert the selected symbol at the cursor position. 

To select a categorical state set a check mark in field “x” with a mouse click. If recommended modifier or frequency values are defined (see Editing the Descriptor and Editing the Project), values may be selected from the drop down lists “Modifier” rsp. “Frequency”. If no modifier or frequency values are available, the appropriate table column may be hidden. In the “Notes” field an additional text may be added. By double-clicking the “Notes” field the Extended text editor can be opened. 

If a “Modifier” or “Frequency” value is selected, the multiple specification of a dedicated categorical state is possible. A tool tip offers to add a row by doouble-click, if mouse cursor is moved over the “State” field (left picture below, picture in the midddle after double click). Multiple specifications of one categorical state are only allowed if they have been assigned different modifier and frequency values. Inputs offending these restrictions will be ignored an a cell error will indicate the problem (right picture below).

   

If resources are linked to a categorical state a tool tip appears when the mouse cursor is moved over the ID (left picture below). By double-clicking the ID a “Media view” window can be opened to view the resources (right picture below).

 

If more than one resources have been assigned to one entry, a slider will be visible at the bottom of the “Media view” window. To switch through the available resources the slider can be moved using the mouse or the right and left arrow keys (see below).

 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Description HTML

Edit description in HTML form

With this form you can easily edit the description data in an HTML form. After starting a description query and selecting an entry choose Edit -> Edit as HTML form … from the menu or click on the button at the right side of the main Diversity Descriptions window. A window as shown below will be opened.

 

When you move the mouse cursor over embedded pictures, they are slightly magnified, by clicking on the resource, you may show it in full size (see below). Use button  Home to return to the HTML form. 

 

With drop down button Options you may insert some additional input fields in the form, e.g. item details or notes. With drop down button Scope you may insert input fields for the vasiour scope types and drop down button Color lets you select the background color. All that changes come into affect, when you reopen the form or redraw the HTML form using the Reload button.

After clicking the Reload button you will be asked if you want to discard all changes. By selecting No the HTML form data will be written into the local data store, otherwise all inputs will be reset. To exit the form and save all changes in the local data store, click the OK button. To ignore your changes, click the Cancel button and you will be asked if you want to discard all changes. The HTML form utility works completely on the local data store. I.e. if you edited the description data in the main form of Diversity Descriptions and start the HTLM form editor without saving the data, all changes are only present in the application dataset. To store the data in the database, click the save button of the main form!

 

 

May 3, 2024

Edit Description Molecular Sequences

Editing the description - Molecular sequence symbols

The editor for sequence data recognizes predefined symbols for nucleotide and protein sequences according the IUPAC definitions.

 

Nucleic acid symbols

Symbol Name
A Adenine
C Cytosine
G Guanine
T Thymine
U Uracile
W Weak (A or T) 
S Strong (G or C)
M aMino (A or C)
K Keto (G or T)
R puRine (G or A)
Y pYrimidine (C or T) 
B not A (B comes after A) 
D not C (D comes after C)
H not G (H comes after G)
V not T (V comes after T and U)
N No idea (not a gap)

The symbols with grey background are ambiguity symbols. The difference between “N” and a gap symbol (usually “-”, but any other symbol may be defined in the descriptor) is that a gap symbol represents an unspecified number of unknown symbols but “N” stands for exatly one nucleic acid. 

 

Amino acid symbols

Name 1-letter sybmol 3-letter sybmol
Alanine A Ala
Arginine R Arg
Asparagine N Asn
Aspartic acid S Asp
Cysteine C Cys
Glutamic acid E Glu
Glutamine Q Gln
Glycine G Gly
Histidine H His
Isoleucine I Ile
Leucine Leu
Lysine K Lys
Methionine M Met
Phenylalanine F Phe
Proline P Pro
Serine S Ser
Threonine T Thr
Tryptophan W Trp
Tyrosine Y Tyr
Valine V Val
Selenocysteine U Sec
Pyrrolysine O Pyl
Asparagine or aspartic acid B Asx
Glutamine or glutamic acid Z Glx
Leucine or Isoleucine J Xle
Unspecified or unknown amino acid X Xaa

The symbols with grey background are ambiguity symbols. The difference between “X” rsp. “Xaa” and a gap symbol (e.g. “—”, but any other symbol may be defined in the descriptor) is that a gap symbol represents an unspecified number of unknown symbols but “X” rsp. “Xaa” stand for exatly one amino acid. The amino acids “Selenocysteine” and Pyrrolysine" are non-standard amino acids that only occur in certain species. 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Description Resources

The resouce links tab allows assigment and inspection of resource links for the description. In the lower Resources part of the tab there are two tables. Ar the left the “Resource” table specifies the single resources, at the right the “Resource variant” table contains the associated URLs to images, video or sound resources.

To enter a new resource select the empty line at the end of the “Resource” table and click on the “Resource name” field. After entering the “Resource name” (leave the cell by pressing the TAB key) automatically a new value for the sequence number (“No.”) is initialized. The sequence number determines the display order in tables and may be changed manually. You may order the resource entries by clicking on the column header or by using the arrow buttons in the left tool strip ( and for up and down, and to shift the selected entry to top or bottom). After ordering the resources click button to renumber the entries starting with “1” and make the changes effective. In field “Ranking” you may enter a numeric value in range 0 … 10 expressing the suitability of the resource. In field “Role” you may select one of the offered values.

If you want to delete a resource, you have three choices:

  1. Select the resource and press the button in the left tool strip.
  2. Select the resource and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
  3. Enter the sequence number column (“No.”) and remove the value. After leaving the cell the entry will be deleted.

In any case you will be asked if you want to delete the data row, if resource links are present. 

To view or edit the additional resource data and copyright information press on the button besides the resource table. In field License: and a link to the license text in the web may be entered, in field Rights: you may enter a copyright text. By pressing the button a browser window can be opened to navigate to the license page in the web. Furthermore you may enter a detailled text (field Details:), the resource language (field Language:) and set the Display embedded flag (see picture below). If any additional resource data have been entered, this will be indicated by a square (□) behind the resource name’s sequence number (see picture above).

 

To enter a resource link, first select the entry in the “Resource” table, then select the empty line at the end of the “Resource variant table”. By clicking on the “URL” field a web address may be entered. By double-clicking the “URL” field a browser window opens to navigate to the resource. For each resource several URLs to resource variants with different quality levels, e.g. different resolution, may be inserted. For each entry in the URL table a different value of “Variant” must be selected.

As an alternative to a resource URL a colour may be spcified in the format “color://#rrggbb” where “rrggbb” specifies a hexadecimal colour code. The colour can simply be seleced by clicking the button besides the resource variant table.

To remove a resource variant, select the entry and press the button in the right tool strip or the Delete key on the keyboard. Alternatively you may delete the “URL” entry in the resource variant table. 

The button besides the resource variant table allows you to view a resource URL in the system browser.

The upper part of the resource links tab consists of a preview window on the left side and the complete list of resource links. By selecting one of the links the preview is shown on the preview window. If you press button in the preview window, the resource is opened in a separate viewer window.

At the bottom of the resource links tab the media data of a selected URL are displayed. These data can be edited by double-clicking the “Type” entry in the resource variant table, by clicking at one of the media data value fields or the button. The edit dialog provides the possibility to access the URL to get available data. Additionally the values may be edited manually.   

 

Copy description resources to a descriptor

If you have write access to descriptors of the currently selected description’s project, you may copy a selected resource URL to a descriptor. After clicking the button a window will open to select one of the accessible descriptors (see image below). Remark: To see the copied resources in the Descriptorview or the Continuous view, you will have to reconnect to the database. 

 

Continue with::

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Description Samples

Editing the description - Sample data tab

The sample data tab allows assigment and inspection of sampling events and associated sampling units for the description. In the upper left Sampling events part of the tab there is a list of the sampling events stored for the description. By selecting a sampling event entry the Event data are shown in the upper right part of the tab. Here you may edit the event name, a detailled description, the date and time rsp. a date and time span and geographic data. To insert a new sampling event click on the button in the Sampling events section, to delete the selected sampling event and all stored sampling unit data press the button (see image above). 

The geographic area may be linked to an entry of a DiversityGazetteers database (see section Module related entry). If latitiude and longituede have not yet been entered, the coordinates of the selected DiversityGazetteers entry will be inserted. By pressing the button a window to select the coordinates by Google maps will be opened. Field Geo. datum allows entering short text concerning the geodetic datum. If coordinates are entered using Google maps a remark that WGS84 coordinates are used will be inserted.

 

Editing sampling unit data

For each sampling events one or several Sampling units may be entered. A sampling unit represents a tuple of values that belong together, e.g. because they represent a single specimen. For each descriptor, which is represented by the table column, a value may be entered in a sampling unit, which builds a single table line. The background colour of each table column indicates the type of sample data: categorical, quantitative, text or sequence . If the number of sampling units is displayed in field Units of the Sampling units section in the lower part of the tab. If sampling units are present, the number is displayed with yellow background (see image below).

To view the unit data, select a Descriptor tree and choose the descriptor sequence range (From descriptorto descriptor) to restrict the number of columns displayed in the unit table. Finally press button and the sampling untis will be displayed (see image below). If you prefer to display the present sampling units automatically whenever you select a sampling event, click on the number behind Units. The background changes from yellow to red to indicate this mode. When you select a cell and resources are available for the selected descriptor column, the button will be shown. You may click it to view the descriptor resources. 

To insert a new sampling unit press button . By clicking on the free space at the beginning of a table line you mark the whole sampling unit (see picture below). Now you have the additional options to delete the unit by pressing button or to copy the data to a new sampling unit by pressing the button. Keep in mind that all unit data will be copied, even if you do not see all descriptor columns due to the display restrictions.

 

When you select the Sampling unit ID cell you may enter a collection specimen in the Unit specimen control below the units table. By clicking the button (see section Module related entry) you can link it to an entry in a DiversityCollection database. If the sampling unit is linked to a database entry in DiversityCollection, the text of the Unit specimen: control is shown with light yellow background. You may view the linked data by clicking the button or double clicking the Sampling unit ID cell.

To modify categorical sampling data enter the table cell and press the button within the cell. A control will be opened where you can select the categorical states and enter notes or modifier values (if defined) for each single state (see image below).

 

For all other sampling data the value can be entered directly in the table cell. Notes for the selected table cell are entered in the Notes: text box directly below the units table. For categorical, text and molecular sequence sample data a separate edit window can be opened by double-clicking the table cell. For molecular sequence data the tool strip buttons (import) and  (export) allow import and export from rsp. to dedicated file formats as described in sections Import sequencedata and Export sequence data.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Export Sequence

Editing the description - Export sequence data

With this form you can export data from the database to a file. Choose Export from the sequence menu to open the window for the export. Format specifies the file format, currently FASTA and FASTQ are supported.

 

In the Header settings you may specify if a new header shall be generated or if the notes shall be searched for a FASTA rsp. FASTQ header. In case of FASTA export you may specify in the Comments settings section if FASTA comment lines from the notes (starting with “;”) shall be inserted after the header, the whole notes shall be inserted as FASTA comments or if the notes shall be ignored. If Insert description comments is checked, two comment linsed wit the description and descriptor title will be generated.

In the Header preview section you may check and edit the resulting header, in the Sequence preview section the converted sequence in one-letter notation is displayed.

In case of FASTQ export the Comments settings are irrelevant. If the notes include a QUALITY STRING sections, it is inserted in the FASTQ output (see image below). If no quality string can be found or the Find FASTQ quality from notes has been unchecked, the lowest quaality value “!” is inserted.

 

Click on the button to select the file where the data shall be exported. By default the data are appended at the end of the selected file, check the Overwrite existing file option to overwrite it. Finally click the Save file button to write the data.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Description Grid

Description grid view

After starting a database query for descriptions select Grid → Description grid view … from the menu. The query result list is passed to the description grid view form and a window as shown below opens (click the button Display description table to build the table output). In the first line the database name is displayed. If you move the mouse cursor over the database name, a tooltip shows the actual connection paramter. 

img/DD_Description_Main

The table in the lower part of the window shows the description titles in the first column and the summary data in the other columns. Each summary column holds the data of a certain descriptor. If a cell with summary data is selected, the summary details and the descriptor status data are displayed in the upper right part of the window. The upper left part of the window shows the selection parameters that are used for building the description table. You may change the table colors by clicking the button . A form as shown below will be opened. 

Click on buttons categorical, quanitative, text or sequence to select the corresponding table colors. By clicking the Reset button below the color, the corresponding default value will be selected. After changing the table colors by a click on the OK button, you must re-draw the table.

 

Selection parameters

In the upper left part of the parameters for the description table can be adjusted. If in the query list passed to the form descriptions of different projects are present, the displayed project can be selected with the Project: drop-down box. The entries in the drow-down list include the project name, followed by the number of descriptions for that project in brackets and an asterisk (*) if the user has only read access for that project.

The Descriptor tree drop-down box restricts the descriptor columns to the descriptors contained in the selected tree. Furthermore the tree hierarchy is included in the descriptor names if a structured descriptor tree is selected (see images below).

  

The values From descriptor and to descriptor limit the range of descriptor sequence numbers that is included in the discription tabe. Be aware that this restiction is additionally effective to a selected desriptor tree! If you want to de-activate this restriction, select “from” value 0 “to” value 999999 by a double-click on the labels From descriptor rsp. to descriptor. The limitation of the number of descriptor columns makes speeds up the description table generation, especally if many descriptor (e.g. some hundrets) are present.

If you select option Separate statistical measures, separate columns will be insterted in the data grid for each quantitative descriptor and its recommended statistical measures. This option may be useful for editing quantitative summary data that use other statistical measures than Min, UMethLower, Mean, UMethUpper and Max (see section Data editing for details.

Finally click the button Display description table to build a new description table according to your settings. During output of the description table the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Edit Description Grid

Edit Description Grid Copy

Description grid view - Copy or create descriptions

To copy one or more descriptions select the whole data rows by clicking in the area left from the “Description title” column. In the tool strip the copy button appears (see image below).

img/DD_Description_Main

After clicking the button you may be asked if you want to copy description resources, too. Be aware that the copy operation is directly performed within the database. I.e. that local changes that have been done in the sources desrcriptions will not be included in the targets unless you save your data before copy (see image below, second and last line in descriptors 28 and 29). 

img/DD_Description_Main

 

New description

To enter a new description, click on button and a new row will be appended (see image below). Same as for copy the new description is created directly within the database.

  

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Description Grid Editing

Description grid view - Data editing

The first column of the description table shows the description titles, which are fixed. I.e. if you scroll the summary data to the right, the titles are still visible at the left. The other columns show the summary data, where the descriptor type is indicated by the background colour: categorical, quantitative, text or sequence. The column titles include the descriptor name, the mesurement unit in square bracket for quantitative descriptors and the descriptor’s sequence number (see image below).

When a summary cell in the description table is selected, the field Description: shows the description title and field Descriptor: shows the symbols according the descriptor type ( for categorical, for quantitative, for text and for sequence) and the descriptor title. If for a descriptor resources are available, this fact is indicated by a coloured symbol background. You may view them by a double-click on the descriptor title. If for a description resources are available, the symbol is displayed before the title. Double click in that symbol to view the resources. 

For the selected cell the summary data and the descriptor status data are displayed in the upper right area of the window (see image above). You may edit the data within these controls as described in section Editing the description - Descriptor view tab of this manual. For modified summary cells the text colour changes to blue and the description titles will be shown with yellow background in the table.

 

Changing the description title

To change the description title, double-click on it in field Description: to open a separate edit window. After comitting the changes with “OK” the description will be marked as modified (see images below).

  

 

Changing the summary data in the table

Categorical summary data

Categorical, states are specified by their sequence number. Multiples are separated by a forward slash ("/", see image below). Existing “notes” will be removed, if the corresponding categorical state is not specified in the input.

  

 

Quantitative summary data

If you did not check the option Separate quantitative measures, for quantitative summary data only the five quantitative measures  

Min Minimum value
UMethLower Lower range limit (legacy data stat. meth. unknown)
Mean Mean (= average)
UMethUpper Upper range limit (legacy data stat. meth. unknown)
Max Maximum value

can be specified within the summary table. The values must be specified in theis given order and separated by a forward slash ("/"). E.g. 1////100 means “Min=1, Max = 100”. If only one value without any slashes is entered, it is assumed than only the “Mean” value is specified. To indicate that values for other than the five mentioned statistical measures are present in the data, an asterisk ("*") is appended in the summary table (see image below, cell value 1////100 *).

  

 

If you checked the option Separate quantitative measures, for each statistical measure in the quantitative summary data a separate column will be allocated in the data grid view. I.e. you can direcly enter your values into the table (see image below).

  

 

Text descriptor and Molecular sequence data

For Text and sequence data the texts may be edited directly within the table. The corresponding “notes” will not be affected.

 

Changing values in a table column

It is possible to modify several values of a single table column. Therefore select the table entries that shall be edited - by selecting an entry and clicking the button in section Column action you may select the whole table column (see image below). Then select the required operation: “Insert”, “Append”, “Replace” or “Clear” and enter the new rsp. new and old value. After clicking the action button - depending on the selected Column action this is (Insert), (Append), (Replace) or (Clear). Be aware that this feature performs a pure text operation in the table columns. Especially for quantitative and categorical data columns the resulting data will be interpreted according to the rules described above an might lead to unsexpected results, if not designed ver carefully. 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Description Grid Save

Description grid view - Save or discard changes

When you click in button “OK” the description grid view is closed and all changes are automatically saved in the database. If you did some changes and want to save them without leaving the form, simply click on (see image below). If you close the window, e.g. by clicking the “Cancel” button, and still have unsaved changes, you will be asked to save or discard the changes.

img/DD_Description_Main

 

Undo all changes

You may discard all unsaved changes without leaving the form by clicking the button and the data will be reloaded form the database (see image below).

  

 

May 3, 2024

Edit Descriptor

Editing the descriptor

After starting a database query and selecting an entry in the result list the dataset is diplayed in the edit window. In the header area the dataset name is shown (see picture below). Below the header area the descriptor name may be edited in a text box and the sequence number (No.) can be set, which determines the display order in descriptor lists. Changes of the descriptor name will be visible in the header after saving the dataset. To check dataset changes, click on the button to open the history.

The main descriptor data may be accessed in the first Main attributestab, which is described below. Click on one of the other tabs in the picture below to go directly to the appropriate manual chapter.

img/DD_Descriptor_Main

 

Main attributes tab

The main attributes tab provides access to an abbreviation, a detailled descriptor text, notes and wording information for natural laguage descriptions. In the bottom area the Descriptor type, Descriptor settings, Measurement data (only for quantitative descriptors) and Molecular sequence data (only for sequence descriptors) can be adjusted. The descriptor type can only be modified, if the descriptor is not referenced by any description. If the descriptor type “Categorical” is changed, already entered categoricalstates will be deleted.

The check box Exclusive (only for categorical descriptors) indicates that only one state shall be specified in a description. Check box Mandatory indicates that for this descriptor always data shall be specified. Statistical measurement scale specifies for categorical descriptors, if the states are unordered (e.g. red/green/blue) of ordered (e.g. bad/medium/good). For quantitative descriptors it specifies if intervals or ratios are measured. Repeatability and Availability specify how reliable (different measurements or scorings by different observers) and accessible the descriptor is, e.g. for identification.

For quantitative descriptors the Unit of the measurement values my be specified either by directly entering the string or alternatively by selecting a Prefix (e.g. “k” for “kilo” = 1000) and the Base unit (e.g. “g” for “gramm”). Unit is prefix indicates that the measurement unit preceeds the measurement value. Minimum and Maximum specify the absolute range limits expected for the measurement values. If in a description specific values, e.g. “Mean”, exceed these limits, a warning will be shown. Values are integer indicates that dedicated values, e.g. “Min” or “Max”, are expected to be integer values. Take care that statisical measures like “Mean” certainly may be real numbers. If this condition is violated in the description data, a warning will be displayed.

For sequence descriptors the sequence type Nucleodide sequence or Proteine sequence must be selected. Enable ambiguity symbols determines if in the sequence data ambiguity symbols like “S” for “C or G” in nucleotide sequences, are allowed. In case of protein sequences the Symbol length may be chosen from one letter sybols (e.g. “A” for “Alanine”) and three letter symbols (e.g. “Ala” for “Alanine). The Gap symbol is a symbol that indicates gaps of unspecified length and must meet the selected symbol length.

 

Project assignement

Descriptors are not directly assigned to a project, instead descriptortrees are used. One descriptor may be included in several descriptor trees and therefore belong to several projects or it might be unassigned. In both cases dedicated hints will be displayed at the bottom of the application window (see pictures above and below).

You can easily find descriptors that are not included in any descriptor tree by setting “Descriptor tree” → “Assignment” to “Ø” in the search criteria. By opening the Descriptor treetab these descriptors may be easily inserted into a tree by selecting the tree (node) and clicking

If the actually selected descriptor is referenced by more than ony project and not all of the projects can be modified by the actual user, the descriptor data cannot be changed, which will be indicated at the lower right corner of the application window (see above).

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Edit Descriptor

Edit Descriptor Modifier

Editing the descriptor - Modifier/Frequency tab

The Modifier/Frequency tab allows definition of modifier and frequency values. The sequence number column (“No.”) determines the display sequence in selection lists. You may order the entries by clicking on a column header. With the arrow buttons ( ) you can move the selected entries up or down within the table, clicking button or shifts the selected entries to the top respective bottom of the table. After ordering the entries click button to renumber the table entries (starting with “1” for the first table entry) and make the changes effective. After pressing button column “Use” shows the number of references in the database for each modifier rsp. frequency value.

To enter a new modifier or frequency value, select the empty line on the end of the table and click on the “Modifier” rsp. “Frequency” field to enter the new values. After entering the new entry name automatically a new value for “No.” is initialized. To delete an entry, select the entry and press the tool strip button, the Delete key or remove the value in the sequence number column (“No.”).

There is a number of predefined modifier and frequency values commonly used. These values can be accessed by pressing the  button, which opens one of the windows shown below.

 

 By checking of uncecking the values, they can easily be inserted or deleted from the modifier rsp. frequency list. Values that are already used in the database are marked by a grey text colour. When these values are marked to be removed from the list, you will be asked for each single value if it really shall be deleted after pressing OK. New values are inserted at the end of the list (see below).

  

You may order the modifier and frequency values according the sequence of the predefined values by pressing the  button, which opens one of the windows shown below. Values that are not in the predefined lists will be shifted to the end of the list.

 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Descriptor Resources

The resouce links tab allows assigment and inspection of resource links for the descriptor. In the lower Resources part of the tab there are two tables. Ar the left the “Resource” table specifies the single resources, at the right the “Resource variant” table contains the associated URLs to images, video or sound resources.

To enter a new resource select the empty line at the end of the “Resource” table and click on the “Resource name” field. After entering the “Resource name” (leave the cell by pressing the TAB key) automatically a new value for the sequence number (“No.”) is initialized. The sequence number determines the display order in tables and may be changed manually. You may order the resource entries by clicking on the column header or by using the arrow buttons in the left tool strip ( and for up and down, and to shift the selected entry to top or bottom). After ordering the resources click button to renumber the entries starting with “1” and make the changes effective. In field “Ranking” you may enter a numeric value in range 0 … 10 expressing the suitability of the resource. In field “Role” you may select one of the offered values.

If you want to delete a resource, you have three choices:

  1. Select the resource and press the button in the left tool strip.
  2. Select the resource and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
  3. Enter the sequence number column (“No.”) and remove the value. After leaving the cell the entry will be deleted.

In any case you will be asked if you want to delete the data row, if resource links are present. 

To view or edit the additional resource data and copyright information press on the button besides the resource table. In field License: and a link to the license text in the web may be entered, in field Rights: you may enter a copyright text. By pressing the button a browser window can be opened to navigate to the license page in the web. Furthermore you may enter a detailled text (field Details:), the resource language (field Language:) and set the Display embedded flag (see picture below). If any additional resource data have been entered, this will be indicated by a square (□) behind the resource name’s sequence number.

 

To enter a resource link, first select the entry in the “Resource” table, then select the empty line at the end of the “Resource variant table”. By clicking on the “URL” field a web address may be entered. By double-clicking the “URL” field a browser window opens to navigate to the resource. For each resource several URLs to resource variants with different quality levels, e.g. different resolution, may be inserted. For each entry in the URL table a different value of “Variant” must be selected.

As an alternative to a resource URL a colour may be spcified in the format “color://#rrggbb” where “rrggbb” specifies a hexadecimal colour code. The colour can simply be seleced by clicking the button besides the resource variant table.

To remove a resource variant, select the entry and press the button in the right tool strip or the Delete key on the keyboard. Alternatively you may delete the “URL” entry in the resource variant table. 

The button besides the resource variant table allows you to view a resource URL in the system browser.

The upper part of the resource links tab consists of a preview window on the left side and the complete list of resource links. By selecting one of the links the preview is shown on the preview window. If you press button in the preview window, the resource is opened in a separate viewer window.

At the bottom of the resource links tab the media data of a selected URL are displayed. These data can be edited by double-clicking the “Type” entry in the resource variant table, by clicking at one of the media data value fields or the button. The edit dialog provides the possibility to access the URL to get available data. Alternatively the values may be edited manually.   

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Descriptor States

Editing the descriptor - Categorical states tab

The Categorical states tab is only enabled, if the descriptor type has been set to “Categorical”. The upper part of the state tab shows the table of categorical states. To enter a new state select the empty line at the end of the table and click on the “Categorical state” field. After entering the “Categorical state” name (leave the cell by pressing the TAB key) automatically a new value for the sequence number (“No.”) is initialized. The sequence number determines the display order in tables and may be changed manually. You may order the state entries by clicking on the column header or by using the arrow buttons in the tool strip right besides the states ( and for up and down, and to shift the selected entry to top or bottom). After ordering the states click button to renumber the entries starting with “1” and make the changes effective.

If you want to delete a categorical state, you have three choices:

  1. Select the state and press the button in the tool strip right besides the states.
  2. Select the state and press the Delete key on the keyboard.
  3. Enter the sequence number column (“No.”) and remove the value. After leaving the cell the entry will be deleted.

In any case you will be asked if you want to delete the data row. If the categorical state is already used in any description items, the number of affected entries will be shown and you have the option to abort the action. 

If for a state at least one assigned resource is present, the state is marked by a square (□) behind its sequence number (see image above). After selecting the categorical state its assigned resources ar displayed in the lower part of the state tab, the State resource links. It allows management of resources linked to a categorical state marked in the upper table. For a detailled description take a look at the Resource links tab section.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Descriptor Trees

Editing the descriptor - Descriptor tree tab

The Descriptor tree tab provides the possibility for a structured assignment of the descriptors to the projects. The Descriptor tree consists of three node types, which show the administered projects, descriptor trees, descriptor tree nodes and descriptors. The tree parts’ colours are shown in the example at the bottom. By pressing the button on the tool strip at the right side the example may be hidden. The buttons displayed on the too strip will change depending on the selected entry.

The descriptor trees support three main functions:

  • Assignment of descriptors to a certain project
  • Selection of recommended Frequency/Modifier values and Statistical measures for a certain descriptor
  • Structured arragement of the descriptors, e.g. for hierarchical selection lists and definition of descriptor subsets for description editing and export

 

Descriptor trees are the root of a tree and may only be appended at a project. To insert a new descriptor tree select a project and press . Descriptor tree nodes may be appended at a descriptor tree or another descriptor tree node. To insert a new descriptor tree node, select the parent and press . Descriptors may be appended to a descriptor tree or a descriptor tree node. To append a descriptor select the parent and press , to remove it select the descriptor and press . All these functions can alternatively be accessed by the context menu by a right click on the entry. The descriptor type is indicated by different icons. Categorical descriptors are marked as , quantitative descriptors as , text descriptors as and sequence descriptors as .

You may change the name of a Descriptor tree or a Descriptor tree node in three different ways:

  1. Select the tree element (single click) and then click once on it.
  2. Select the tree element (single click) and click on button in the tool bar on the right.
  3. Right-click the tree element and select item Edit name from the context menu.

You may edit the name of the selected node within the tree. The Descriptor tree must be globally unique. The Descriptor tree node names must be unique with respect to their tree position, i.e. all nodes with the same parent within a descriptor tree must have distinguished names.

If a Descriptor tree or a Descriptor tree node does not contain any other element, it may be deleted by pressing  (delete descriptor tree) rsp. (delete descriptor tree node). Please be aware that in edit mode “Descriptor” the descriptor tree shows only the descriptor that as actually selected in the query panel! To get a complete overview of all descriptors assigned to a certain descriptor tree and to delete trees or nodes with all included objects, select edit mode “Project” (see Editprojects).

If projects and their associated descriptor trees cannot be changed, because the project has been set to “read-only” state, these parts are displayed with grey text color (see project “Schmetterlinge” in picture above).

Descriptor trees can be marked as “tree complete”, to indicate that they should contain all descriptors of the project. In this case the symbol of the descriptor tree changes from to . Setting and resetting the “tree complete” flag is described in the Edit projects section, where additional edit options are availabe.

When a new descriptor tree or descriptor tree node is inserted it gets a numeric name, which may be changed by clicking on the node or selecting from the context menu. Take care that the names of the discriptor trees must be unambiguous within the whole database! The names of the descriptor tree nodes must only be unambiguous within one parent.

If no descriptor tree is installed for a certain project, all descriptors, modifier/frequency values and statistical measures will be usable in the project’s descriptions. Anyway, if you export data or generate documents an do not have an appropriate descriptor tree, you might have missing data! If a project contains several descriptor trees, the available descriptors are the superset of the descriptors assigned to all contained trees.

 

Sorting of descriptor tree elements 

By pressing the button you can expand the tree view to display all elements, by pressing the tree will be collapsed to descriptor tree level. With the arrow buttons ( rsp. ) you can move descriptor tree nodes up or down rsp. to the top or the bottom. An additional ordering option is to select the descriptor tree node you want to move and click the button. The button’s back color changes to red and you may now select the new position in the tree.

In operation mode Edit projects you may take over the descriptor order from a descriptor tree to the descriptor sequence numbers of all project’s descriptors. This will affect the descriptor presentation for description data editing or document generation.  

 

Descriptor tree node details  

For Descriptor tree nodes you may enter an abbreviation a details text and assign resource data. Select the Descriptor tree node (single click) and click on button in the tool bar on the right. Alternatively you may right-click the Descriptor tree node and select Edit details from the context menu. An edit window as shown below will be opened.

If resources are assigned to a Descriptor tree node, its symbol is shown with grey background in the descriptor tree. You may view the resources by right-clicking it and selecting View resources from the context menu.  

 

Recommended statistical measures, modifiers and frequency values 

Click on in the tool bar to close the edit window in the right part of the tab or on  to reopen it. In the edit window you can select recommended modifier/frequency values and statistical measures. The recommended values can be administered for a selected descriptor or for a selected descriptor tree node. In the latter case selected values are inherited by all subordinate nodes, which will be indicated by the background colour if a subordinate node is selected in the descriptor tree. 

To define the available modifier and frequency values and their display sequence, please refer to the Modifier/Frequency tab. The statistical measure values are predefined, nevertheless their display sequence may be modified using the  button (see image above). A form as shown below will appear. With the arrow buttons ( ) you can move the selected entries up or down within the table, clicking button or shifts the selected entries to the top respective bottom of the table. After ordering the entries click button to renumber the table entries (starting with “1” for the first table entry) and make the changes effective.  

The picture below shows an example for a descriptor where the recommended statistical measures Minimum value, Maximum value and Mean are inherited by the superior node.  

For the contained descriptor only additional values may be selected, but the inherited values cannot be de-selected.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Project

Editing the project

After starting a database query and selecting an entry in the result list the dataset is diplayed in the edit window. In the header area the dataset name and the project language are shown (see picture below). To check dataset changes, click on the button to open the history.

The main project data may be accessed in the first Main attributestab, which is described below. Click on one of the other tabs in the picture below to go directly to the appropriate manual chapter.

img/DD_Project_Main

In DiversityDescriptions a project may be a pure local project or it can be linked with DiversityProjects. By clicking the button above the query window, a new local project is created. For a local project the name can be set freely - as long as it is unambigious within the database - by clicking the  button behind the project name (see image below). By clicking the button you may view the login names that have access to the project.  

If a project is linked with DiversityProjects, the name is fixed to the value set in DiversityProjects. If the name is modified in DiversityProjects, it will change in DiversityDescriptions, too, when the project data are downloaded. The linking of a local project to DiversityProjects is described below in the Cachedprojects section.  

For a linked project some additional buttons are available (see above): With URI you may view the symbolic address of the referred DiversityProjects entry and with you may view the data in DiversityProjects. By clicking the button you may view the login names that have access to the project. With the button you may release the connection to DiversityProjects. I.e. the current project will become a local project.  

  

Main attributes tab

The main attributes tab provides access to a license URI, a short rights text and a detailled project text. The project language can be selected from a list. In field Rights you may enter a copyright text, in field License and a link to the license text in the web may be entered. By pressing the button a browser window can be opened to navigate in the web.

In the Wording field you may enter an alternative project name, which is used for the cache database. When a project has been published in a cache database and it is renamed, this field offers the opportunity to keep the published name. If a project published in the cache database and is renamed, the original project name will be automatically be inserted in the Wording field, if it is empty. Therefore publishing with the old project name will still be possible. To modify the published project name, too, update or remove the Wording entry and re-create the project in the cache database.

With combo box Language you can select the project’s default language. You man change the display and sorting of the entries in the Language combo box from “<code> - <description>” to “<description> - <code>” (and back) by clicking the button . If you need language codes that are not included in the list, click the button. For more details see Edit language codes.

 

Parent project

In the bottom area at the left side the Parent project can be adjusted. If the project has no parent, select “Root” (symbol ). The Parent project adjustment has an influence on the available descriptors, recommended modifier and frequency values and recommended statistical measures, because these adjustments are inherited by the subordinate project. If for a project in the Parent project tree no write access is possible, this is indicated by grey text colour and symbol . The missing write rights for a parent project has no influence on accessability of the actually selected project, except that the parent project adjustment cannot be changed. 

 

Cached projects

The Cached projects section shows entries that are downloaded fromDiversityProjects and not yet used within DiversityDescriptions (see image below, left). Accessible projects are shown with symbol , read-only projects as and projects wihout any access rights as . When you click on the project name, additional buttons are displayed (see image below, right). You may view the database link by clicking on URI or view the data stored in DiversityProjects by clicking on symbol . By clicking the button you may view the login names that have access to the project. With button you may link the current project to the selected DiversityProjects entry.

            

 

Scope values

In the Scope values section at the right the values for scope types “Sex”, “Stage” and “Other scope” may defined. When you mark one of the entries, a tool strip with the available operations is shown at the right border of the control. To insert a new value, select the scope type and press button . In case of “Sex” one of the predefined “sex status” values derived from the SDD standard has to be selected. In all other cases a new value with a numeric key is appended, that can be renamed by pressing the button and selecting Edit scope name or by clicking at the name. 

In case of “Sex” scope the “Edit” menu offers the additional menu items Reset scope name, which appears if the name differs from the original “sex status”. Further the “sex status” value may be changed with menu item Set sex status. For the other scope types you may enter a details text by pressing the button and selecting Edit scope details.

To remove a scope value, select it and press the button. To make a value available for the project, the check box must be checked. If the selected project has a parent and a value has already been checked in the parent project, this is indicated by the background colour (see image below).

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Edit Project

Edit Project Dependencies

Editing the project - Descriptor applicability tab

The Descriptor applicability tab serves the administration of dependencies between categorical states and dependent descriptors. First a descriptor has to be selected either by its name in the alphabetically ordered drop down list or its sequence number (“No.”) in the first line of the descriptor dependencies tab. If for the selected project a descriptor tree is present, the  button allows selecting the descriptor form the descriptor tree (see picture below). 

The table Controlling states in the upper left part of the tab shows the categorical states if a categorical descriptor has been selected. When you have adusted the restrichted descriptor view, visible by the button in the toolbar of the Dependent descriptor section, only the actually set dependent descriptors are displayed here. You can switch to an alternate Full descriptorview as described below. For each categorical state Dependent descriptors can be inserted by pressing the button. A dialog window opens to select the descriptor either by its name, sequence number or using the descriptor tree (see picture below).

 

In column “Rule” the symbol indicates that the dependent descriptor is inapplicable if the controlling state is present in a description. The symbol indicates that the controlling state must be present in a description if the controlled descriptor shall be applicable. The rule can be toggled by clicking the symbol in the table or by pressing the corresponding button ( rsp. ) at the right. To remove a dependent descriptor select it and press the button.

In the lower part of the tab you find the States controlling this descriptor. You may double-click on the item to select navigate to it for editing. Alternatively you may edit the controlling descriptor states using the control buttons of the tool strip at the right. By double-clicking an entry in Dependent descriptors or in States controlling this descriptor you may navigate forwards and backwards in the chain of dependent descriptors.

If you want to get an overview of all the project’s descriptor dependencies or want to delete all dependencies, take a look at the Applicability tree section below.

 

 

Calculation of the descriptor applicability

To decide if a descriptor is applicable in a description, the following conditions are evaluated:

  • Inapplicable-if rule: If only controlling states are present in a description, these make the controlled descriptor inapplicable. The character remains applicable if either no state at all, or any non-controlling states are present.
  • Applicable-if rule: If any controlling state is present in a description, these make the controlled descriptor applicable. It is inapplicable if only non-controlling states are present.
  • Special condition 1: If the controlling descriptor is inapplicable (through another applicability rule, or through an explicit “Not applicable” data status value), the controlled descriptor is always inapplicable as well.
  • Special condition 2: If no data for the controlling descriptor are present in a description (data completely missing or only status is “Missing data” or “Not to be recorded”), the controlled descriptor always remains applicable.

 

 

Full descriptor view

By clicking the button in the toolbar of the Dependent descriptor section, you can chenge to the full descriptor view (see image below). In section Dependent descriptors all available project descriptors are shown. You may set a dependency by selecting the descriptor and clicking the button rsp. . To remove the dependency, click on button . Alternatively you may click on they symbol in the table column “Rule” to change the values in the sequence -> .

If you select a values for the Descriptor tree, the descriptor list is restricted to the values included in that descriptor tree. Please be aware that existing dependencies might be hidden by such a selection! 

You can return to the restricted descriptor view by clicking on button .

 

 

Applicability tree

Instead of the States controlling this descriptor you may display a complete overview of the descriptor applicability rules by pressing the button in the Dependent descriptors section (see image below). By double-clicking an item in the Applicability tree you can open it for editing.

By pressing the button in the Applicability tree section you can delete all dependencies shown in the tree.

 

Continue with::

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Project Modifier

Editing the project - Modifier/Frequency tab

The Modifier/Frequency tab allows definition of modifier and frequency values. The sequence number column (“No.”) determines the display sequence in selection lists. You may order the entries by clicking on a column header. With the arrow buttons ( ) you can move the selected entries up or down within the table, clicking button or shifts the selected entries to the top respective bottom of the table. After ordering the entries click button to renumber the table entries (starting with “1” for the first table entry) and make the changes effective. After pressing button column “Use” shows the number of references in the database for each modifier rsp. frequency value.

To enter a new modifier or frequency value, select the empty line on the end of the table and click on the “Modifier” rsp. “Frequency” field to enter the new values. After entering the new entry name automatically a new value for “No.” is initialized. To delete an entry, select the entry and press the tool strip button, the Delete key or remove the value in the sequence number column (“No.”).

There is a number of predefined modifier and frequency values commonly used. These values can be accessed by pressing the  button, which opens one of the windows shown below.

 

 By checking of uncecking the values, they can easily be inserted or deleted from the modifier rsp. frequency list. Values that are already used in the database are marked by a grey text colour. When these values are marked to be removed from the list, you will be asked for each single value if it really shall be deleted after pressing OK. New values are inserted at the end of the list (see below).

 

You may order the modifier and frequency values according the sequence of the predefined values by pressing the  button, which opens one of the windows shown below. Values that are not in the predefined lists will be shifted to the end of the list.

 

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Project Move Trees

Editing the project - Move or copy descriptor trees

Using the context menue, you may move or copy parts of a descriptor tree to other branches. Please note that for the move and copy operations the selected project, marked by its background colour in the descriptor tree, is assumed as the target project. You may copy descriptor trees or parts of projects with read-only access to your selected project. The move operation is certainly not possible in those cases. Note that by the copy operations only the tree structures will be copied, associated recommended statistical measures, modifiers and frequencies will not be copied! The move operations preserve those adjustments.

Remark: If you want to move or copy element from an other than the selected project, activate the “Show all projects” option by clicking the button in the tool strip. The icon background will be changed to red color to indicate that this option is active.

1. Move or copy a descriptor tree

Right click on the descriptor tree you want to move/copy. A context menu opens, that offers the options Copy ‘<tree name>’ to ‘<project name>’ rsp. Move ‘<tree name>’ to ‘project name’ (see picture below left). If you selected “Move”, the descriptor tree is removed from the original project and appended to your selected project. If you selected “Copy”, a copy of the tree will be appended to the selected project. In this case numeric IDs are appended to generate unique tree and tree node names (see picture below right). The copy function can be used to generate a clone of a descriptor tree in the selected project.

  

Additionally you may copy the contents of a descriptor tree to a descriptor tree node by clicking selecting the option Copy descriptor tree to descriptor tree node … rsp. Move descriptor tree to descriptor tree node … (see picture above left). A separate window opens to select the target node (see picture below left). Find the move result in the right picture below. Since the tree has been moved, the tree node names have not been changed. One duplicate descriptor has not been moved to the target node. 

   

2. Move or copy a descriptor tree node

Right click on the descriptor tree node you want to move/copy. A context menu opens, that offers the options Copy descriptor tree node … rsp. Move descriptor tree node … (see picture below left). After selecting one of there items a dialog windows opens where you may select the target descriptor tree or descriptor tree node (see picture below right).

   

If you selected “Move”, the descriptor tree node is removed from the original position and appended to the selected tree position. If you selected “Copy”, a copy of the tree node will be appended to the selected tree position. In this case numeric IDs are appended to generate unique tree node names (see picture below). The copy function can also be used to generate a clone of a descriptor tree node in the selected project.

3. Move or copy a descriptor

Right click on the descriptor you want to move/copy. A context menu opens, that offers the options Copy descriptor … rsp. Move descriptor … (see picture below left). After selecting one of there items a dialog windows opens where you may select the target descriptor tree or descriptor tree node (see picture below right).

 

If you selected “Move”, the descriptor is removed from the original position and appended to the selected tree position. If you selected “Copy”, a new descriptor node will be appended to the selected tree position (see picture below).

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Project Trees

Editing the project - Descriptor tree tab

The Descriptor tree tab provides the possibility for a structured assignment of the descriptors to the projects. The Descriptor tree consists of three node types, which show the administered projects, descriptor trees, descriptor tree nodes and descriptors. The tree parts’ colours are shown in the example at the bottom. By pressing the button on the tool strip at the right side the example may be hidden. The buttons displayed on the too strip will change depending on the selected entry.

By default only the selected project. its subordinated projects and their descriptor trees are displayed. You may select the “Show all projects” option by clicking the button in the tool strip to show alle projects. To indicate that this option is active, the icon background will be changed to red color (see images below). Be aware that this option might slow down data loading.

The descriptor trees support three main functions:

  • Assignment of descriptors to a certain project
  • Selection of recommended Frequency/Modifier values and Statistical measures for a certain descriptor
  • Structured arragement of the descriptors, e.g. for hierarchical selection lists and definition of descriptor subsets for description editing and export

Descriptor trees are the root of a tree and may only be appended at a project. To insert a new descriptor tree select a project and press , to delete it select the descriptor tree and press . Descriptor tree nodes may be appended at a descriptor tree or another descriptor tree node. To insert a new descriptor tree node, select the parent and press , to remove it select the descriptor tree node and press . Descriptors may be appended to a descriptor tree or a descriptor tree node. To append a descriptor select the parent and press , to remove it select the descriptor and press . All these functions can alternatively be accessed by the context menu by a right click on the entry. The descriptor type is indicated by different icons. Categorical descriptors are marked as , quantitative descriptors as , text descriptors as and sequence descriptors as .

You may change the name of a Descriptor tree or a Descriptor tree node in three different ways:

  1. Select the tree element (single click) and then click once on it.
  2. Select the tree element (single click) and click on button in the tool bar on the right.
  3. Right-click the tree element and select item Edit name from the context menu.

You may edit the name of the selected node within the tree. The Descriptor tree must be globally unique. The Descriptor tree node names must be unique with respect to their tree position, i.e. all nodes with the same parent within a descriptor tree must have distinguished names.

If projects and their associated descriptor trees cannot be changed, because the project has been set to “read-only” state, these parts are displayed with grey text color (see project “Schmetterlinge” in picture above).

When a new descriptor tree or descriptor tree node is inserted it gets a numeric name, which may be changed by clicking on the node or selecting from the context menu. Take care that the names of the discriptor trees must be unambiguous within the whole database! The names of the descriptor tree nodes must only be unambiguous within one parent.

If no descriptor tree is installed for a certain project, all descriptors, modifier/frequency values and statistical measures will be usable in the project’s descriptions. Anyway, if you export data or generate documents an do not have an appropriate descriptor tree, you might have missing data! If a project contains several descriptor trees, the available descriptors are the superset of the descriptors assigned to all contained trees.

 

Editing the project descriptor assignemnts for a tree node 

When you use button to append a descriptor to a tree node, you will be offered all accessible descriptors in the database. In many cases, when you have already assigned all required descriptors to the project, you may wish to build some additional structured descriptor trees. If you select a descriptor tree or a descriptor tree node, the button is shown (see image below left). After clicking this button you will get a selection list with all descriptors assigned to the project. Descriptors that are included in the tree node are selected in the list (see image below right). You may easily change the selection and click “OK” to make the changes effective.

 

Sorting of descriptor tree elements 

By pressing the button you can expand the tree view to display all elements, by pressing the tree will be collapsed to descriptor tree level. With the arrow buttons ( rsp. ) you can move descriptors or descriptor tree nodes up or down rsp. to the top or the bottom. An additional ordering option is to select the descriptor tree node you want to move and click the button. The button’s back color changes to red and you may now select the new position in the tree. If you select a descriptor tree or a descriptor tree node, you may arrange the contained descriptors in alphabedical order by clicking the buttons (ascending) or (descending).

A descriptor tree may be marked as “tree complete” to indicate that this tree shall contain all descriptors for the project. This is done by selecting the descriptor tree node and clicking the button . To indicate that the tree is marked as complete the tree icon changes to (see picture below). 

The “tree complete” flag may be removed by clicking the button and the tree icon will be changed back to (see picture below).

  

If a descriptor tree is marked as “tree complete”, it can be used to take over the sorting of the descriptor nodes to the sequence number of the descriptors. But you must be aware that the descriptor’s sequence number (field “No.” in “Edit descriptor” main panel) is not project or tree dependent, i.e. that this operations will have influence on the dispolay sequence of all descriptions using these descriptors. Click on button (see picture above) to open the descriptor sorting window below.

The first column shows the descriptor names as sorted in the descriptor tree, the second column shows the current sequence number int the database and the last column shows the new sequence number. If the sequence number stays unchanged, the new sequence number is displayed with green background, otherewise with yellow background. You may click on a new sequence number and change its value manually. By clicking on the table headers, you may sort the table display according descriptor names, old or new sequence numbers. If a descriptor may not be changed, because it is assigned to a project where the user has no write access, the whole line is displayed with grey backgound and cannot be changed. Finally click on OK to accept or Cancel to reject the changes. 

An additional option available for complete trees is to copy missing descriptors with button . The descriptors available for a certain project include all descriptors assigned to all descriptor trees of the project and its sub-projects. In our example a new descriptor tree has been assigned to the upmost project (see image below left). After clicking the button all valid descriptors are inserted to the descriptor tree (see image below right). 

 

 

Descriptor tree node details  

For Descriptor tree nodes you may enter an abbreviation a details text and assign resource data. Select the Descriptor tree node (single click) and click on button in the tool bar on the right. Alternatively you may right-click the Descriptor tree node and select Edit details from the context menu. An edit window as shown below will be opened.

If resources are assigned to a Descriptor tree node, its symbol is shown with grey background in the descriptor tree. You may view the resources by right-clicking it and selecting View resources from the context menu.  

 

Click on in the tool bar to close the edit window in the right part of the tab or on  to reopen it. In the edit window you can select recommended modifier/frequency values and statistical measures. The recommended values can be administered for a selected descriptor or for a selected descriptor tree node. In the latter case selected values are inherited by all subordinate nodes, which will be indicated by the background colour if a subordinate node is selected in the descriptor tree.  

To define the available modifier and frequency values and their display sequence, refer to the Modifier/Frequency tab. The statistical measure values are predefined, nevertheless their display sequence may be modified using the  button (see image above). A form as shown below will appear. With the arrow buttons ( ) you can move the selected entries up or down within the table, clicking button or shifts the selected entries to the top respective bottom of the table. After ordering the entries click button to renumber the table entries (starting with “1” for the first table entry) and make the changes effective.  

The picture below shows an example for a descriptor where the recommended statistical measures Mini mum value, Maximum value and Mean are inherited by the superior node. 

For the contained descriptor only additional values may be selected, but the inherited values cannot be de-selected.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Sample Data Grid

Sample data grid view

After starting a database query for descriptions select Grid → Sample data grid view … from the menu. The query result list is passed to the description grid view form and a window as shown below opens. In the first line the database name is displayed. If you move the mouse cursor over the database name, a tooltip shows the actual connection paramter.

img/DD_Description_Main

The table in the lower parThe table in the lower part of the window shows the sampling unit IDs in the first column and the sample data in the other columns. Each sample column holds the data of a certain descriptor. The upper part of the window shows the selection parameters that are used for building the sampling unit table. You may change the table colors by clicking the button . A form as shown below will be opened. 

Click on buttons categorical, quanitative, text or sequence to select the corresponding table colors. By clicking the Reset button below the color, the corresponding default value will be selected. After changing the table colors by a click on the OK button, you must re-draw the table.

 

Selection parameters

In the upper left part of the parameters for the samping unit table can be adjusted. If in the query list passed to the form descriptions of different projects are present, the displayed project can be selected with the Project drop-down box. The entries in the drow-down list include the project name, followed by the number of descriptions for that project in brackets and an asterisk (*) if the user has only read access for that project.

After selecing a project in section Descriptions and sampling events (right upper part of the window) the descriptions and their sampling events are listed. Here you may select the descriptions and sampling events that shall be used for building the sampling unit table. The buttons all, none and swap can be used to change the selection of all tree elements. By pressing the button the tree view may be expanded to display the contained sampling events, by pressing the button only the descriptions will be shown. In the bottom of the section the currently selected number of sampling events and sampling units is displayed.

When you click on a single sampling event and more than one description is in the list, the button appears in the tool strip. By clicking this button you can open a description selection window and thus shift the sampling event to a different parent description. 

The Descriptor tree drop-down box restricts the descriptor columns to the descriptors contained in the selected tree. Furthermore the tree hierarchy is included in the descriptor names if a structured descriptor tree is selected (see images below).

  

The values From descriptor and to descriptor limit the range of descriptor sequence numbers that is included in the discription tabe. Be aware that this restiction is additionally effective to a selected desriptor tree! If you want to de-activate this restriction, select “from” value 0 “to” value 999999 by a double-click on the labels From descriptor rsp. to descriptor. The limitation of the number of descriptor columns makes speeds up the description table generation, especally if many descriptor (e.g. some hundrets) are present.

Finally click the button Display sampling units table to build a new sampling unit table according to your settings. During output of the sampling unit table the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button.

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Edit Sample Data Grid

Edit Sample Data Grid Editing

Sample data grid view - Data editing

The first column of the sampling unit table shows the sampling unit IDs titles, which are fixed. I.e. if you scroll the sample data to the right, the IDs are still visible at the left. The other columns show the sample data, where the descriptor type is indicated by the background colour: categorical, quantitative, text or sequence. The column titles include the descriptor name, the mesurement unit in square bracket for quantitative descriptors and the descriptor’s sequence number (see image below).

When a sample cell in the sampling unit table is selected, the field Sampl. event: shows the sampling event titles, field Description: shows the description title and field Descriptor: shows the symbols according the descriptor type ( for categorical, for quantitative, for text and for sequence) and the descriptor title. If for a descriptor resources are available, this fact is indicated by a coloured symbol background. You may view them by a double-click on the descriptor title. If for a description resources are available, the symbol is displayed before the title. Double click in that symbol to view the resources.

For the selected cell the sample data may be edited as described in section Editing the description - Sample data tab of this manual. For modified sample cells the text colour changes to blue and the sample unit IDs will be shown with yellow background in the table.

 

Changing the sampling event

To shift samling units to a different sampling event, select the whole data rows by clicking in the area left from the “Sampling unit ID” column. In the tool strip the set event button appears. After clicking the button a window for selecting the new parent sampling event will be opened (see image below).

 

Copy sampling units

To copy one or more sampling units select the whole data rows by clicking in the area left from the “Sampling unit ID” column. In the tool strip the copy button appears (see image below).

  

After clicking the button the copied line are inserte at the end of the tabel (see image below). 

  

 

Delete sampling units

To delete one or more sampling units select the whole data rows by clicking in the area left from the “Sampling unit ID” column. In the tool strip the copy button appears.

 

New sampling unit

To enter a new sampling, click on button and a new row will be appended. After clicking the button a window for selecting the sampling event will be opened.

  

 

Continue with:

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Sample Data Grid Save

Sample data grid view - Save or discard changes

When you click in button “OK” the sample data grig view is closed and all changes are automatically saved in the database. If you did some changes and want to save them without leaving the form, simply click on (see image below). If you close the window, e.g. by clicking the “Cancel” button, and still have unsaved changes, you will be asked to save or discard the changes.

img/DD_Description_Main

 

Undo all changes

You may discard all unsaved changes without leaving the form by clicking the button and the data will be reloaded form the database (see image below). 

  

 

May 3, 2024

Table Editors

Table editors

For the data selected in the main window the table editors offer a direct access to the tables of the database. Underneath the menu Grid  select one of the Table editors. A window with the content of the table will open. Columns with a gray background can not be edited here. Columns with a light gray background are linked to the contents of lookup tables where you can change according to the contents of these tables. The following tables are included for direct access:

Depending on the edit mode the following options are available in the Table editors menue:

  • Edit descriptions
    • Sampling events to edit the sampling events of the descriptions in the query result list
    • Descriptions to edit the descriptions in the query result list
    • Description resources to edit the resource entries for the descriptions in the query result list
    • Resource variants to edit the resource variant entries for the descriptions in the query result list
    • Translations to edit the translation entries for the descriptions in the query result list
  • Edit descriptors:
    • Descriptors to edit the descriptors in the query result list
    • Descriptor resources to edit the resource entries for the descriptors in the query result list
    • Categorical states to edit the categorical states of the descriptors in the query result list
    • Categorical state resources to edit the resource entries for the categorical states of the descriptors in the query result list
    • Resource variants to edit the resource variant entries for the descriptors and categorical states in the query result list
    • Translations to edit the translation entries for the descriptors and categorical states in the query result list
  • Edit projects
    • Project to edit the projects in the query result list
    • Descriptor tree node resources to edit the resource entries for the descriptor tree nodes of the projects in the query result list
    • Resource variants to edit the resource variant entries for the descriptor tree nodes of the projects in the query result list
    • Translations to edit the translation entries for the projects in the query result list

 

As an example see below the table editor window for projects.

 

Read-only

If for parts of the query result no write access exists, the table editor will be opened in read-only mode. Especially for descriptors you should keep in mind that they may belong to more than one project. Therefore the table editors for descriptors, categorical states and their resources or resource variants may be opened for read-only, if you have not write permissions for all projects in the database. 

 

Editing

You can either edit the contents of the table directly or perform changes to any number of marked fields. To mark a whole column use the  button. Once you have selected the contents to change, select one of the modes of change that appear in the upper left corner. The modes of change are:

  • Insert: Insert the given value at the beginning of the content
  • Append: Append the given value at the end of the content
  • Replace: Replace a string in the content with the given value
  • Clear: Remove the content

After selecting the change mode, enter the text in the field where necessary and click on the corresponding button to perform the changes.

If you want to delete a line in the database, select it by clicking in the space before the line and press the button. Take care that an undo of that action is not possible.

 

Filtering

To filter the content of the table, click in the column that should be used for filtering. Then choose the mode of comparision:

  • = : The content must be exactly like the given value
  • ~ : The content must contain the given value
  • ≠ : The content must be different to the given value

If you want the filtering to be case sensitive, choose the a<>A option. After all parameters are set, click on the button. To undo the filtering, click on the button. This will reset the data to the last saved version. If you want your changes to be saved, click the button before you reset the filtering. If you close the window all changes so far will be saved automatically. If you do not want to save your changes, click on the button to close the window without saving.

 

Export

To export the data as a tab separated text file, click on the button. The file will be automatically saved in the client-folder.  

Jan 14, 2025

Text Editing

Extended text editor

In the most text fields you can open an extended text editor by double-clicking the text field, which provides the following features:

  • Perform basic text formatting
  • Show and convert RTF-like text formatting
  • Insert and view links to HTML pages or Diversity Workbench database entries

 

Text formatting

In the text fields you may use some HTML mark-ups <b>bold</b> <i>italic</i> and <u>underline</u> for text formatting (see image below left). Additionally the tags <br>, <br/> or <br /> may be inserted to indicate a new text line, but the most common way is to press the ENTER key instead. The format tags will have an effect if documents are generated from the database.

   

By double-clicking the text field you can open a separate edit window that shows the text formatting (see image above right). You can easily change the formatting by selecting a text and clicking the buttons B, I or U.

To reload the original text into the edit window click the button. By clicking OK the changes are taken over to the text field, to ignore the changes, click the cancel button.

 

RTF-like text formatting

In some projects RTF-like mark-ups are used to indicate text formatting, e.g. \iitalics\i0{} for italics. If you double-click on the text field you can open the separate edit window and button indicates that RTF-like format mark-ups have been detected (see image below).

<

By clicking the button the edit window will show you the formatted text (see image below left). After clicking OK the text will be stored using the HTML mark-ups, which is the standard for DiversityDescriptions (see image below right).

  

 

You may open an internet browser by clicking the button . After navigating to your target page, click OK to insert the link at the current cursor position. By clicking the drop-down button you can select a Diversity Workbench database and search for a certain database entry (see image below).

After selecting a found entry and clicking OK the database link is inserted at the current cursor position (see image below). 

When the link is clicked either the web browser opens (for regular HTML links) or the Diversity Workbench application to display the databease entry (see image below).

Jun 5, 2024

Import Export

Import / Export

An overview of some options for the import, export and additional file based operations is given in the image below. The import wizard provides a very flexible tool to import data from tab-separated text files, e.g. generated from a foreighn tool or database. With the list export you may generate tab-separated text files from the database. The export and re-import of tab-separated list allows external editing of the data in e.g. spread sheet programs. For this purpose especially the Matrix wizard is very suitable. As an alternative the questionnaires allow editing of data in an HTML form, which can be done with any internet browser. The modified data can be “downloaded” as text files and re-imported into the database. Even new description data may be collected using the questionnaires without the need of a direct database access.

The CSV export provides a direct copy of selected database tables by means of the Microsoft SQL Server. These copies might be used for archiving purposes or if a foreighn application shall be supplied with data.

The most popular genuine formats for storing and exchanging descriptive data are DELTA and SDD, which are both supported for import and export. The structured export additionally allows generation of EML files, that provide metadata as XML and descriptive data as text table. A spin-off of the import and export functions for structured data is the file conversion, which may even be used without any database access. Additionally the SDD and EML structured XML files may be checked for conformance to their XML schemas. 

Finally the cache database is providing descriptive data to external partners, e.g. a webportal. 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Import Export

Cache Database

Cache database

The cache databases for DiversityDescriptions are designed as sources for preformatted data for publication in e.g. public user portals like GBIF. The cache database by default has a name corresponding to the main source database, e.g. DiversityDescriptionsCache and is located on the same server. By itself it is the source for the data in Postgres (Version 10 or above) cache databases located on any Windows or Linux server (see image below). An overview for the basic steps is provided in chapter Basic steps for publication of data via the cachedatabase.

 

 

Generating the cache database

To create a cache database you need to be a system administrator (s. Login administration). The creation of the cache database is described in the chapter Creation of the cachedatabase.

 

Projects

The publication and transfer of the data is always related to a project . Every project has its own database schema containing the data tables etc. The metadata are defined via settings in a DiversityProjects database. The Projects module provides a stable identifier for each Project. The basic address has to be set in the Project module (choose Administration - Stable identifier … in the menu). Please turn to the module DiverisityProjects for further information. The metadata will be transferred into a table in the cache database. For further details see chapter Projects in the cache database.

 

Collections, references, taxonomy and other sources

As well as data from DiversityDescriptions, data from other modules like DiversityCollection containing specimen or observations, DiversityReferences containing citations and DiversityTaxonNames containing the taxonomy, including accepted names and synonyms are transferred into the cache database and may be retrieved from the local server or a linked server. The data of these sources are stored and transferred independent from the project data. For further details see chapter Sources from other modules

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Cache Database

Cache Database Basic steps

Basic steps for publication of data via the cache database

1 - Create the cache database

To create a cache database as shown in the chapter Creation of thecache databasee you need to be a system administrator (s. Login administration). After this step the cache database should be available and you can create a Postgres database as final target of your data. To grant access to the cache database for other users, see chapter Login administrationof the cache databases.

2 - Create a Postgres database

The final formatting of the data e.g. for publication via webservice are performed in a Postgres database. If no server providing Postgres is available, you may install Postgres on your local machine (see https://www.postgresql.org/ for further information). The creation and administration of a Postgres database is described in chapter Administration of the Postgres cache databasess. To grant access to the Postgres cache database for other users, see chapter Login administration of thecache databases.  

3 - Insert sources for taxonomic names, collection specimen, references etc.

This step is optional and depends upon the availability of a source for e.g. taxonomic names. You may either use sources from your local server or the public available sources provided by tnt.diversityworkbench.de (turn to http://www.snsb.info for further information). The needed settings are described in chapter Sources from othermodules.  

4 - Insert a project

The data published in the cache database are organized according to the projects. Add a project as shown in chapter Projects in the cache database. Check the Mapping of IDs in the source database and make sure that the data within this project are not withheld from publication and that the ranges you want to publish are set properly (see chapter Restrictions for the datatransfer into the cache database).  

5 - Transfer the data

The final transfer of the data is described in chapter Sources forother modules and chapter Transfer of the data.

6 - Publish or export the data

To export the data or prepare them for publication according to the specifications of webservices etc. the data frequently need to be formatted. This is done with packages as described in chapter Administration of the Packages.

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Create

Create the cache database

To create a cache database you need to be a system administrator (s. Login administration). To create the cache database, choose Data → Cache database … from the menu. If so far no cache database exists, you will be asked if a new one should be generated. After the generation of the cache database a window as shown below will open.

Click on the Update button to update the database to the latest version. A window as shown below will open. Click on Start update to execute all the scripts needed for the latest version of the database.

To grant access to the cache database for other users, see chapter Login administration of the cache databases.  

You should now close an re-open the cache database window. During transfer to the cache database the project metadata are read from a local Diversity Projects database, if in DiversityDescriptions the project is linked to it. By default the name of this “project definitions” database is assumed to be “DiversityProjects” and the same postfix as the DiversityDescriptions database. If this assumption is not fulfilled, you will find the button Please check function ProjectsDatabase (see image below).

   

After clicking the button, a message window might inform you about Projects databases you cannot access due to insufficient access rights (see image below).

   

After closing the message window you find all accessible projects database located on the same database server as your DiversityDescriptions database (see image below). In columns “Fitting projects” and “Non fitting projects” you see the number of projects with fitting rsp. not fitting links to the lsited DiversityProjects database. Click on the database you want ti use for the cache transfer. If not fitting projects are present, the button  may be used to see more details.

   

After selecting a database click on button OK.

If there are non fitting links in your projects database, you will find the button Check missing links for ProjectsDatabase (see image below). Click this button to view the details. Afterward you will have get the projects selection window as shown above.

   

You may now continue with the Administration of the Postgres cachedatabases or insert Sources from other modules. Anyway, close and re-open the cache database window before you insert Projects in the cachedatabase.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Id Mapping

Mapping of IDs for the data transfer into the cache database

In the Diversity Descriptions database the main tables Description, Descriptor and CategoricalState have a numeric “id” as key, which is set by the MS SQL server when the dataset ist crated. All relations between the tables are set by using these unique values. For various reasons those internal IDs are not seen as suitable for all purposes of the cache database. Therefore a mapping of the internal IDs is performed before the transfer of data to the cache database.

 

Default mapping

The default mapping of the IDs is mainly oriented on the way the states and characters are identified in the widely spread DELTA standard:

  • Descriptors are numbered starting with “1” in ascending order and transferred into the cache database table CacheCharacter. The order is determined by the descriptor parameter “display_order” and the alphabetical order. The original “id” is stored as “CharID” in the target table, the descriptor number as “CID”.
  • CategoricalStates are numbered for each character starting with “1” in ascending order and transferred into the cache database table CacheState. The order is determined by the categorical state parameter “display_order” and the alphabetical order. The original “id” is stored as “StateID” in the target table, the categorical state number as “CS”.
  • Since the categorical state numbers (“CS”) are not unique, each state is identified, e.g. in a description item, by the character and state number (“CID”, “CS”).
  • Descriptions are numbered starting with “1” in ascending order and transferred into the cache database table CacheItem. The order is determined by the alphabetical order. The original “id” is stored as “ItemID” in the target table, the description number as “IID”. As an alternative the “IID” may be derived from the field “alternate_id” of the “Description” table (see following section.

The mapping data are stored related to the project in the tables CacheMappingDescriptor, CacheMappingState and CacheMappingDescription of the original database.  

 

Mapping adjustment

To set the mapping adjustments, click on the  button (see below).

A window as shown below will open.

If no option is selected, the default mapping algorithm described above will be performed for every transfer to the cache database. Any changes, e.g. insertion of a descriptor or re-arrangement of categorical states, will affect the “CID”, “CS” and “IID” of the cache database.

If option Keep fixed IDs after first export is selected, the default mapping algorithm described above will be performed only for the first transfer to the cache database. Any changes, e.g. insertion of a descriptor or re-arrangement of categorical states, will NOT affect the “CID”, “CS” and “IID” of the cache database. New elements will get a number higher than the last one present. If an element is deleted, this will result in “missing” numbers in the cache database. Pure re-arrangements will have no effect.

The last option Take “IID” from “AID” field only affects the description mapping. By default the descriptions are numbered in alphabetical order. If this option is chosen, it is tried to use the field “alternate_id” (“AID” in the GUI) as item number. Preconditions are that the “AID” is a pure number and that the values are unique. If the “AID” is not supplied or an alpha-numeric string or if the number is already occupied, a new ascending value will be set. By using this option a foreign numbering scheme may be used for the cache database. When selecting this option you might want select Re-initialize “IID” fields to build the description mapping at the next cache transfer. 

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Infrastructure

Infrastructure for the cache database

For the administration of the data that are published via the cache database, certain tables as shown below are used. These are either placed in the schema dbo or a schema named according to the published project, e.g. Project_Test for a project with the name “Test”. Additionally some basic data are stored in dedicated tables of the main DiversityDescriptions database.

 

Tables in the main database

In the main DiversityDescriptions database there is a number of tables holding the cache database name, information about datawithholding and mapping information of the IDs. This information is needed to restore the cache database in case of loss. For the database diagram take a look at the database section of this manual.  

 

Central tables in the cache database

There are a number of tables placed in the schema dbo that are accessible by all projects.

 

Published project tables

The central published project tables contain the information about the projects that are published together with the target (Postgres) databases and the packages including optional add-ons into which they had been transferred. This information is used to ensure a recovery in case of a loss of the targets.

 

 

Source tables

To access sources from other modules (e.g. DiversityReferences) there are tables for the storage of the principal access to the modules and a number of tables containing the data (depending on the module).

Access tables

These tables contain the principal access like the name of the view defined to access the data. The example below lists the tables defined for the module DiversityReferences, but there are corresponding tables for every module accessed by the cache database. 

Data tables

These tables contain the data provided by the module and therefore depend on the module. The example below lists the tables defined for the module DiversityReferences, but there are corresponding tables for every module accessed by the cache database. Since data from various source databases may be acumulated in the cache database, in general all the data tables include the BaseURL as part of their keys to ensure unambiguousness.  

To access the data in the source database for the module views are generated by the client. The name of these views are composed according to the name of the database and the project to ensure a unique name. Furthermore letters are appended to identify subordinated tables. These are stored in the table “<module>Source” and are used by the client for a transfer of the data from the module database into the tables in the cache database. The example below lists the view names for the module DiversityReferences. In this example the source database “DiversityReferences_Test” and project “DALI” result in the main table name. By appending “_R” the view name for subordinated table “ReferenceRelator” is built. This gives the views References_Test_DALI and References_Test_DALI_R.

 

Project tables in the cache database

These tables contain the data of the projects with every project having its own schema. The tables correspond to the tables in the main database of the module with according the following assignment. In the third columns the views of the cache database are listed to access the DiversityDescriptions data. The view access besides the main tables listed in the second table column and the ID mapping tables. For the summary data (CacheDescription) additionally subordinated tables, e.g. Modifier, are accessed to resolve relations in DiversityDescriptions as simple character strings.

Table in cache database Tables in DiversityDescriptions Views in cache database
CacheCharacter Descriptor ViewCacheCharacter
CacheCharacterTree DescriptorTree ViewCacheCharacterTree
CacheCharacterTreeNode DescriptorTreeNode ViewCacheCharacterTreeNode
CacheDescription CategoricalSummaryData,
QuantitativeSummaryData,
TextDescriptorData,
MolecularSequenceData,
DescriptorStatusData
ViewCacheCategorical,
ViewCacheQuantitative,
ViewCacheText,
ViewCacheSequence,
ViewCacheStatusData
CacheItem Description ViewCacheItem
CacheResource Resource,
ResourceVariant
ViewCacheResourceCharacter,
ViewCacheResourceCharacterTreeNode,
ViewCacheResourceItem,
ViewCacheResourceState
CacheScope DescriptionScope ViewCacheScope
CacheState CategoricalState ViewCacheState,
ViewCacheMeasure
CacheTranslation Translation ViewCacheTranslationCharacter,
ViewCacheTranslationState,
ViewCacheTranslationItem

 

Besides the tables mentioned above, the auxilliary tables ProjectLockedDescriptor and ProjectLockedScope contain the descriptor IDs and scope types that shall be excluded from the transfer to the cache database. The auxilliary tables ProjectPublishedTranslation and ProjectPublishedDescriptorTree contain language codes of translations (columns label, wording and detail of source tables Descriptor, CategoricalState and Description) and the descriptor tree IDs that shall be included in the cache database transfer. Together with the extended query parameter, which are stored in the columns FilterCommand and FilterParameter of the table ProjectPublished, they build the transferrestrictions of the cache database. Finally, in table CacheMetadata some data from the DiversityProjects database are stored.

The main tables CacheItem, CacheCharacter and CacheState have a numeric key (ItemID, CharID and StateID), which is identical to the unique key in the main database. However, in the cache database the main adress attributes are IID, CID and CS. CID and SD are in principle the descriptor and categorical state sequence numbers, where the mapping algorith guarantees unique ascending values. In this adressing schema a single state is identified by the combination of CID and CS.

Additionally in table CacheState the recommended statistical measures of quantitative descriptors are inclueded, where the measure code (e.g. “Min”, “Max” or “Mean”) is inserted in CS. In table CacheDescription, which holds the single descriptor or data status values, the CID and CS are specified for a specific categorical state. For quantitative data in CS the measurement type is identified by the measure code. For text and molecular sequence data CS is supplied with the fixed texts “TE” and “MS”. In case of descriptor status data CS is set NULL. Instead the data status code is inserted in column Status.  

 

Project procedures for the data transfer into the project tables

For every project table there is a set of procedures that transfers the data from the main database into the cache table. The names of these procedures are procPublish + the name of the target table without “Cache” e.g. procPublishCharacter for the transfer of the data into the table CacheCharacter. The first steps of the data transfer perform an update the ID mapping tables in the main database. This is done in the procedures procPublishMappingItem, procPublishCharacter and procPublishState, which call dedicated procedures in the DiversityDescriptions database. As mentioned above, the original IDs (ItemID, CharID and StateID) are stored together resulting mapped IDs (IID, CID and CS) in the cache database tables. To view the mapping information, the views CacheMappingItem, CacheMappingCharacter and CacheMappingState select the appropriate values from the cache tables.

 

List of tables mentioned above

Table ProjectPublished

The projects published via the cache database (Details about the projects are defined in DiversityProjects)

Column Data type Description Nullable
ProjectID int ID of the project to which the specimen belongs (Projects are defined in DiversityProjects) NO
Project nvarchar (255) The name or title of the project as shown in a user interface (Projects are defined in DiversityProjects) YES
ProjectURI varchar (255) The URI of the project, e.g. as provided by the module DiversityProjects. YES
FilterCommand varchar (MAX) The SQL command to select description IDs to be transferred to the cache database. YES
FilterDescription nvarchar (MAX) The XML description of the filter command to transferred description IDs. YES
CoordinatePrecision tinyint Optional reduction of the precision of the coordinates within the project YES
LastUpdatedWhen datetime The date of the last update of the project data
Default value: getdate()
YES
LastUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) The user reponsible for the last update.
Default value: suser_sname()
YES
TransferProtocol nvarchar (MAX) The protocol created during the transfer of the data YES
IncludeInTransfer bit If the project should be included in a schedule based data transfer YES
CompareLogDate bit If the log dates of the transferred data should be compared to decide if data are transferred
Default value: (0)
YES
TransferDays varchar (7) The days the transfer should be done, coded as integer values with Sunday = 0 up to Saturday = 6
Default value: '0'
YES
TransferTime time The time when the transfer should be executed
Default value: '00:00:00.00'
YES
TransferIsExecutedBy nvarchar (500) If any transfer of the data is active YES
TransferErrors nvarchar (MAX) Errors that occurred during the data transfers YES
TranslationDescription bit If the description item translation should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (1)
NO
TranslationDescriptor bit If the descriptor translation should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (1)
NO
TranslationCategoricalState bit If the categorical state translation should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (1)
NO
OmitLockedDescriptors bit If the locked descriptors and their states shall be omitted in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceDescription bit If the description item resources should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceDescriptorTreeNode bit If the descriptor tree node resources should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceDescriptor bit If the descriptor resources should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceCategoricalState bit If the categorical state resources should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceTypeAll bit If all resource types should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceTypeImage bit If the resource type "image" should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceTypeColor bit If the resource type "color" should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceRankingRestriction tinyint The minimum resource ranking (0-10) that should be included in the data transfer
Default value: (0)
NO
ResourceRoleRestriction varchar (255) The resource roles that should be included in the data transfer
Default value: NULL
YES

Table ProjectTarget

The targets of the projects, i.e. the Postgres databases

Column Data type Description Nullable
ProjectID int ID of the project to which the specimen belongs (Projects are defined in DiversityProjects) NO
LastUpdatedWhen datetime The date of the last update of the project data YES
TransferProtocol nvarchar (MAX) The protocol created during the transfer of the data YES
IncludeInTransfer bit If the project should be included in a schedule based data transfer
Default value: (1)
YES
CompareLogDate bit If the log dates of the transferred data should be compared to decide if data are transferred
Default value: (0)
YES
TransferDays varchar (7) The days the transfer should be done, coded as integer values with Sunday = 0 up to Saturday = 6
Default value: (0)
YES
TransferTime time The time when the transfer should be executed
Default value: '00:00:00.00'
YES
TransferIsExecutedBy nvarchar (500) If any transfer of the data is active YES
TransferErrors nvarchar (MAX) Errors that occurred during the data transfers YES
TargetID int The ID of the server, relates to table Target NO

Table ProjectTargetPackage

Packages for projects as documented in the table Package in the Postgres database

Column Data type Description Nullable
ProjectID int Refers to ProjectID in table ProjectTarget NO
TargetID int Referes to TargetID in table ProjectTarget NO
Package nvarchar (50) Package installed for this project target NO

Table ProjectTransfer

The transfers of data of a project

Column Data type Description Nullable
ProjectID int ID of the project, part of PK NO
TransferDate datetime Date of the transfer. Part of PK
Default value: getdate()
NO
ResponsibleUserID int The ID of the user as stored in table UserProxy of the source database, responsible for the transfer
Default value: (-1)
YES
TargetID int If the transfer regards a postgres database, the ID of the target (= Postgres database) as stored in table Target YES
Package nvarchar (50) If the transfer regards a package, the name of the package, otherwise empty YES
Settings nvarchar (MAX) The versions, number of transfered data etc. of the objects concerned by the transfer [format: JSON] YES

Table ReferenceRelator

Column Data type Description Nullable
BaseURL varchar (500) - NO
RefID int - NO
Role nvarchar (3) - NO
Sequence int - NO
Name nvarchar (255) - NO
AgentURI varchar (255) - YES
SortLabel nvarchar (255) - YES
Address nvarchar (1000) - YES
SourceView nvarchar (128) - NO

Table ReferenceTitle

Column Data type Description Nullable
BaseURL varchar (500) - NO
RefType nvarchar (10) - NO
RefID int - NO
ProjectID int - YES
RefDescription_Cache nvarchar (255) - NO
Title nvarchar (4000) - NO
DateYear smallint - YES
DateMonth smallint - YES
DateDay smallint - YES
DateSuppl nvarchar (255) - NO
SourceTitle nvarchar (4000) - NO
SeriesTitle nvarchar (255) - NO
Periodical nvarchar (255) - NO
Volume nvarchar (255) - NO
Issue nvarchar (255) - NO
Pages nvarchar (255) - NO
Publisher nvarchar (255) - NO
PublPlace nvarchar (255) - NO
Edition smallint - YES
DateYear2 smallint - YES
DateMonth2 smallint - YES
DateDay2 smallint - YES
DateSuppl2 nvarchar (255) - NO
ISSN_ISBN nvarchar (18) - NO
Miscellaneous1 nvarchar (255) - NO
Miscellaneous2 nvarchar (255) - NO
Miscellaneous3 nvarchar (255) - NO
UserDef1 nvarchar (4000) - NO
UserDef2 nvarchar (4000) - NO
UserDef3 nvarchar (4000) - NO
UserDef4 nvarchar (4000) - NO
UserDef5 nvarchar (4000) - NO
WebLinks nvarchar (4000) - NO
LinkToPDF nvarchar (4000) - NO
LinkToFullText nvarchar (4000) - NO
RelatedLinks nvarchar (4000) - NO
LinkToImages nvarchar (4000) - NO
SourceRefID int - YES
Language nvarchar (25) - NO
ReplaceWithRefID int - YES
CitationText nvarchar (1000) - NO
CitationFrom nvarchar (255) - NO
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime -
Default value: getdate()
YES
SourceView nvarchar (128) - NO
ReferenceURI varchar (500) - YES
AuthorsCache varchar (1000) - YES

Table ReferenceTitleSource

Column Data type Description Nullable
SourceView nvarchar (128) the name of the view retrieving the data from the database NO
Source nvarchar (500) - YES
SourceID int - YES
LinkedServerName nvarchar (500) If the source is located on a linked server, the name of the linked server YES
DatabaseName nvarchar (50) The name of the database where the data are taken from YES
Subsets nvarchar (500) Subsets of a source: The names of the tables included in the transfer separted by "|" YES
TransferProtocol nvarchar (MAX) The protocol created during the transfer of the data YES
IncludeInTransfer bit If the source should be included in a schedule based data transfer YES
CompareLogDate bit If the log dates of the transferred data should be compared to decide if data are transferred
Default value: (0)
YES
TransferDays varchar (7) The days the transfer should be done, coded as integer values with Sunday = 0 up to Saturday = 6
Default value: '0'
YES
TransferTime time The time when the transfer should be executed
Default value: '00:00:00.00'
YES
TransferIsExecutedBy nvarchar (500) If any transfer of the data is active YES
TransferErrors nvarchar (MAX) Errors that occurred during the data transfers YES
LastUpdatedWhen datetime The date of the last update of the data
Default value: getdate()
YES
LastCheckedWhen datetime The date and time when the last check for the need of an update of the content occurred YES
Version int -
Default value: (0)
YES

Table ReferenceTitleSourceTarget

The targets of the projects, i.e. the Postgres databases

Column Data type Description Nullable
SourceView nvarchar (128) SourceView as defined in table ReferenceSource NO
Target nvarchar (255) The targets of the projects, i.e. the Postgres databases where the data should be transferred to NO
LastUpdatedWhen datetime The date of the last update of the project data
Default value: getdate()
YES
TransferProtocol nvarchar (MAX) The protocol created during the transfer of the data YES
IncludeInTransfer bit If the project should be included in a schedule based data transfer
Default value: (1)
YES
CompareLogDate bit If the log dates of the transferred data should be compared to decide if data are transferred
Default value: (0)
YES
TransferDays varchar (7) The days the transfer should be done, coded as integer values with Sunday = 0 up to Saturday = 6
Default value: (0)
YES
TransferTime time The time when the transfer should be executed
Default value: '00:00:00.00'
YES
TransferIsExecutedBy nvarchar (500) If any transfer of the data is active YES
TransferErrors nvarchar (MAX) Errors that occurred during the data transfers YES
LastCheckedWhen datetime The date and time when the last check for the need of an update of the content occurred YES

Table ReferenceTitleSourceView

Column Data type Description Nullable
BaseURL varchar (500) - NO
RefID int - NO
SourceView nvarchar (128) The name of the source view of the data NO
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when record was first entered (typed or imported) into this system.
Default value: getdate()
YES

Table Target

The postgres databases as targets for the data

Column Data type Description Nullable
TargetID int ID of the target on a postgres server, PK NO
Server nvarchar (255) Name of IP of the Server NO
Port smallint Port for accessing the server NO
DatabaseName nvarchar (255) The name of the database NO

Table CacheCharacter

Character (= descriptors, features) define variables

Column Data type Description Nullable
CharID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
CID smallint A positive number defining the sequence in which characters are displayed NO
CharName nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of character NO
Notes nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the character definition YES
CharWording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (CharName will be used if this is missing)
Default value: NULL
YES
Unit nvarchar (255) A measurement unit (mm, inch, kg, °C, m/s etc.) or dimensionless scaling factor
Default value: NULL
YES
UnitIsPrefix tinyint Set to 1 if the measurement unit precedes the value
Default value: '0'
NO
Subclass nvarchar (255) The four character subclasses of SDD are all combined here in one entity and distinguished by this attribute ("categorical", "quantitative", "text" or "sequence")
Default value: 'categorical'
NO
Mandatory tinyint Is the scoring of this descriptor mandatory (required) in each item?
Default value: '0'
NO
Exclusive tinyint Applicable to categorical charactors only. If usually exclusive = 1, then by default the user interface allows only entering one state. Nevertheless, multiple states in the data are valid.
Default value: '0'
NO
ValuesAreInteger tinyint Set to 1 if the values are integer
Default value: '0'
NO
Reliability tinyint How reliable and consistent are repeated measurements or scorings of the character by different observers and on different objects? (0-10)
Default value: '5'
NO
Availability tinyint How available is the character or concept for identification? (0-10)
Default value: '5'
NO
SequenceType nvarchar (255) Type of molecular sequence, "Nucleotide" or "Protein". The value "Nucleotide" covers RNA and DNA sequences
Default value: 'Nucleotide'
NO
SymbolLength tinyint The number of letters in each symbol. Nucleotides are always codes with 1-letter symbols, but proteins may use 1 or 3-letter codes (e.g. A or Ala for alanine)
Default value: '1'
NO
GapSymbol nvarchar (3) A string identifying the "gap" symbol used in aligned sequences. The gap symbol must always be symbol_length long
Default value: NULL
YES
NumStates smallint A positive number specifying the number of states for this character
Default value: '0'
NO
StateCollection nvarchar (255) Handling of multiple values: OrSet/AndSet: unordered set combined with or/and, OrSeq/AndSeq: ordered sequence combined with or/and, WithSeq: example is “green with brown”, Between: an example is “oval to elliptic”
Default value: 'OrSet'
NO
Order int Display order
Default value: (0)
NO

Table CacheCharacterTree

The descriptor trees

Column Data type Description Nullable
CharTreeID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
CharTreeName nvarchar (255) Descriptor tree name NO

Table CacheCharacterTreeNode

The character tree nodes

Column Data type Description Nullable
CharTreeNodeID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
CharTreeID int Reference to the character tree to which the node belongs (foreign key) NO
ParentTreeNodeID int Reference to the superior character tree node - NULL if the tree node is on top level (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
CharTreeNodeName nvarchar (255) Character tree node name - NULL if node references a character
Default value: NULL
YES
CID smallint Reference to the character to which the node belongs - NULL if the tree node is no leaf (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
Order int Display order
Default value: (0)
NO

Table CacheDescription

The description data in the database

Column Data type Description Nullable
DescrID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
IID int Reference to the description item to which the data belong NO
CID smallint Reference to the character to which the data belong NO
CS varchar (18) Reference to the state to which the data belong. Null if data status is specified
Default value: NULL
YES
Status varchar (16) Data status of the character as 16 letter code. Null if CS is specified
Default value: NULL
YES
Modifier nvarchar (255) Modifier value of description item. Relevant for categorical and quantitative charaters
Default value: NULL
YES
Frequency nvarchar (255) Frequency value of description item. Relevant for categorical charaters
Default value: NULL
YES
X float Numeric value of description item. Relevant for quantitative charaters YES
TXT nvarchar (MAX) Text value of description item. Relevant for text and molecular sequence charaters YES
Notes nvarchar (MAX) Additional text explaining or commenting on the description item. Relevant for all charaters YES

Table CacheItem

The description item in the database

Column Data type Description Nullable
ItemID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
IID int A positive number defining the sequence in which items are displayed NO
ItemName nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of description item NO
Notes nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the description item definition YES
ItemWording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (ItemName will be used if this is missing)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table CacheMetadata

Column Data type Description Nullable
ProjectID int - NO
ProjectTitle nvarchar (400) - YES
ProjectTitleCode nvarchar (254) - YES
StableIdentifier nvarchar (500) - YES
TechnicalContactName nvarchar (254) - YES
TechnicalContactEmail nvarchar (254) - YES
TechnicalContactPhone nvarchar (254) - YES
TechnicalContactAddress nvarchar (254) - YES
ContentContactName nvarchar (254) - YES
ContentContactEmail nvarchar (254) - YES
ContentContactPhone nvarchar (254) - YES
ContentContactAddress nvarchar (254) - YES
OtherProviderUDDI nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetTitle nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetDetails nvarchar (MAX) - YES
DatasetCoverage nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetURI nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetIconURI nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetVersionMajor nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetCreators nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetContributors nvarchar (254) - YES
DatasetGUID nvarchar (254) - YES
DateCreated nvarchar (254) - YES
DateModified nvarchar (254) - YES
SourceID nvarchar (254) - YES
SourceInstitutionID nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerOrganizationName nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerOrganizationAbbrev nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerContactPerson nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerContactRole nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerAddress nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerTelephone nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerEmail nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerURI nvarchar (254) - YES
OwnerLogoURI nvarchar (254) - YES
IPRText nvarchar (254) - YES
IPRDetails nvarchar (254) - YES
IPRURI nvarchar (254) - YES
CopyrightText nvarchar (254) - YES
CopyrightDetails nvarchar (254) - YES
CopyrightURI nvarchar (254) - YES
TermsOfUseText nvarchar (500) - YES
TermsOfUseDetails nvarchar (254) - YES
TermsOfUseURI nvarchar (254) - YES
DisclaimersText nvarchar (254) - YES
DisclaimersDetails nvarchar (254) - YES
DisclaimersURI nvarchar (254) - YES
LicenseText nvarchar (254) - YES
LicensesDetails nvarchar (254) - YES
LicenseURI nvarchar (254) - YES
AcknowledgementsText nvarchar (254) - YES
AcknowledgementsDetails nvarchar (254) - YES
AcknowledgementsURI nvarchar (254) - YES
CitationsText nvarchar (254) - YES
CitationsDetails nvarchar (254) - YES
CitationsURI nvarchar (254) - YES
RecordBasis nvarchar (254) - YES
KindOfUnit nvarchar (254) - YES
HigherTaxonRank nvarchar (254) - YES
TaxonomicGroup nvarchar (254) - YES
BaseURL varchar (254) - YES
RecordURI nvarchar (500) - YES
ProjectLanguageCode nvarchar (3) - YES

Table CacheResource

The available resources

Column Data type Description Nullable
ResourceID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
EntityID int Database-internal ID of the referenced record NO
TargetTable nvarchar (255) Name of the target table: "State", "Chararcter", "CharacterTreeNode" or "Item" (primary key) NO
ResourceName nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of resource NO
Ranking smallint Ranking of the resource; range: 0 to 10
Default value: NULL
YES
Role nvarchar (255) Role of the resource ("unknown"=role not known or not specified; "diagnostic"=optimized for identification; "iconic"=icon/thumbnail, needs text; "normative"=defines a resource object; "primary"=display always, informative without text; "secondary"=display only on request) NO
IPRText nvarchar (255) The license text of the resource
Default value: NULL
YES
IPRURI nvarchar (255) The license URI of the resource
Default value: NULL
YES
MimeType nvarchar (255) The type of the resource as MIME type like "image/jpeg"; color as "color/hexrgb"
Default value: NULL
YES
URL nvarchar (500) The URL of the resource
Default value: NULL
YES
Order int Display order
Default value: (0)
NO

Table CacheScope

The scope of the description

Column Data type Description Nullable
ScopeId int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
IID int Reference to the description item to which these data belong NO
ScopeType nvarchar (255) Scope type ("GeographicArea", "Citation", "Observation", "Specimen", "TaxonName", "OtherConcept", "Stage", "Part" or "Sex") NO
ScopeName nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of scope NO
DwbURI nvarchar (500) Reference to DiversityWorkbench component
Default value: NULL
YES

Table CacheState

The states available for characters

Column Data type Description Nullable
StateID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
CID smallint Reference to the character to which the state belongs (foreign key) NO
CS varchar (18) A short string identifying the states in relation to its character NO
StateName nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of state NO
Notes nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the state definition YES
StateWording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (StateName will be used if this is missing)
Default value: NULL
YES
MinValue float Applicable to quantitative characters only; in support of a plausibility check for values. Example: for tree height this could be 0, i.e. only positive values allowed
Default value: '-1e308'
NO
MaxValue float Applicable to quantitative characters only; in support of a plausibility check for values. Example: for tree height this could be 99
Default value: '1e308'
NO
Order int Display order
Default value: (0)
NO

Table CacheTranslation

The available translations

Column Data type Description Nullable
TranslationID int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
EntityID int Database-internal ID of the referenced record NO
LanguageCode nvarchar (3) Three-character language code of the translation NO
SourceColumn nvarchar (255) Name of the original table column NO
TargetTable nvarchar (255) Name of the target table: “State”, “Character” or “Item” NO
Text nvarchar (MAX) Translated text YES

Table ProjectLockedDescriptor

The descriptors (=characters) that shall not be published

Column Data type Description Nullable
DescriptorID int Database-internal descriptor ID of descriptive data that shall no be published (primary key) NO

Table ProjectLockedScope

The scope types that shall not be published

Column Data type Description Nullable
ScopeType nvarchar (255) Scope types that shall not be pulished (primary key) NO

Table ProjectPublishedDescriptorTree

The descriptor tree IDs that shall be published

Column Data type Description Nullable
DescriptorTreeID int IDs of descriptor trees that shall be published (primary key) NO

Table ProjectPublishedTranslation

The translation languages that shall be published

Column Data type Description Nullable
LanguageCode nvarchar (3) Three-letter language codes of translations that shall be published (primary key) NO
Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Logins

Cache database - User administration

There are two roles in the cache database with a general access to the data: CacheAdmin (for the administration and transfer of the data) and CacheUser (with read only access). The data in the cache databases are organized in projects. Therefore for every project you find one additional role: CacheAdmin_Project_… with the right to transfer of the corresponding project to the SQL-Server cache database. You find the project specific roles in the SQL-Server cache database, in the Postgres database only CachAdmin and CacheUser are available.

To administrate the logins in the SQL-Server database, go to the Update and Sources tab and click on the button of the cache database to open a window as shown below. To administrate the access for other logins, you have to be a System administator. For further details please see the chapter about the login administration for the main database.

To view the access rights of a selected role click on the button to open a window as shown below.

 

Postgres database

To handle the logins and user groups on the Postgres database server, go to the Update and Sources tab and click on the button of the postgres database. A window as shown below will open, where you can create and delete logins and groups. For the logins you can change their membership in groups and their properties (see below). On the left you find 2 lists, with the upper list containing the logins and the list below with the groups resp. roles. For the logins you can set the general properties as shown below. The login postgres is created with the installation of the database and is the login for the administration of the database including the updates etc. For details about predefined properties like “Is superuser”, please turn to the Postgresdocumentation

In the Membership in groups area you can define the groups in which the login is a member (see below). 

For the groups you can change their membership in other groups and their permissions (see below). 

May 3, 2024

Cache Database Packages

Administration of the Packages

The formatting of the data according to the specifications of webservices etc. is done with packages. There is a growing list of packages provided with the software. For new packages either turn to the developers or create a package of your own. The packages are realised as tables, view, functions etc. reading the data in the tables without any changes to the data. They therefore can be inserted and removed without any effects on the original data. The naming of the objects within a package follow the schema [Name of the package]_… as shown in the images below.

To administrate the packages installed within one project, click on the button (see above). A window as shown below will open listing all available packages.

Click on the button to establish the selected package. To ensure the current version of the package, click on the Update to vers. … button (see below).

A window will open where all the needed scripts will be listed. For packages keeping the data in their own tables like NaviKey it may be necessary to adapt the timeout for database commands. Click on the button and enter an appropriate value. For large amounts of data the value 0 is recommended, which means infinite.

With button you may select locked characters to restrict the exported data for the current package. This option might be useful, if for a certain target, some characters make no sense. E.g. for the NaviKey application information like the “data record revision” is irrelevant. For other targets it may be published, because it is no secret information.    

To remove a package use the button and the button to get information about the package. For some packages the button indicates that modified data may be published by using an Add-On (see below).

A package (e.g. NaviKey) may contain e.g. tables or materialized views. These need an update after the data have been transferred to the Postgres database. Click on the Transfer button to update the package data. A window as shown below will open, listing the transfer steps for the package. Choose the steps that should be transferred and click on the Start transfer button to transfer the data.

After closing the transfer window you may inspect the data provided by the package by click on the button of the package. Some packages or add-ons may install depend schemas in the database. In this case you will get a window to select the schema for display.

A window as shown below will open listing all package related objects. For every object (table, view, column, … ) the description is shown in the lower part of the window.

To export the contents of a package, click on the button. A window as shown below will open listing the main views of the package. You can export the data as XML (creating a directory with one xml file for every view) or as SQLite database (creating a SQLite database containing the tables).

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Packages Add On

Administration of the Add-Ons for Packages

For certain packages there are add-ons available to adapt a package to the special specifications of e.g. a project. To add an add-on, click on the button as shown below. A window as shown below will open listing all available add-ons.

A window as shown below will open listing all available add-ons.

Certain add-ons require the selection of an add-on parameter. E.g. the Navikey_Language add-on requires the selection of the published translation language code. In this cases an additional selection window will be shown (see image below). Remark: Selecting the add-on parameter and therefore the installation of the add-on might require that data have been trasferred to the Postgres database before! 

After the add-on has been added, you need to update it to the current version of the add on with a click on the Upd. to vers. … button (see below). A window will open where all the needed scripts will be listed. Some add-ons are exclusive, meaning that no further add-ons can be added and further updates of the package are organized via the add-on as shown below. To remove an add-on you have to remove the package with a click on the button. 

An Add-on defines a version of the package it is compatible with. Add-ons can not be removed as they perform changes in the package. To remove an add-on, remove the package and reinstall it. If a package containing an Add-on needs an update you have to remove the package as well and reinstall it.

With a click on the first button besides the package you can generate a description of all objects in the package (see below).

With a click on the second button besides the add-on you can view its description (see below).

May 3, 2024

Cache Database Postgres

Administration of the Postgres cache databases

To create a Postgres cache database, you must be connected with a server running Postgres  (Version 10 or above). To connect to a server, click on the button and enter the connection parameters. If no cache database has been created so far, you will get a message that no database is available, otherwise you may select the database as shown below.



After entering valid login data to the Postgres server, at least the button will be available (see image below). Click on the button to create a new cache database (see below). You will be asked for the name of the database and a short description.



After the database was created, you have to update the database to the current version. Click on the Update button to open a window listing all needed scripts. To run these scripts just click on the Start update button. After the update the database is ready to take your data. Subsequent updates may become necessary with new versions of the database. To remove the current database from the server, just click on the button.

In the image on the right you see a screenshot from the tool pgAdmin 4 . You may use this tool to inspect your data and administrate the database independent from DiversityDescriptions. Please keep in mind, that any changes you insert on this level may disable your database from being used by DiversityDescriptions as a sink for your cache data. The data are organized in schemas, with public as the default schema. Here you find functions for marking the database as a module of the Diversity Workbench and the version of the database. The tables in this schema are e.g. TaxonSynonymy where the data derived from DiversityTaxonNames are stored and ReferenceTitle where the data derived from DiversityReferences are stored. For every project a separate schema is created (here Project_LIASlight). The project schemas contain 2 functions for the ID of the project and the version. The data are stored in the tables while the packages in their greater part are realized as views and functions extracting and converting the data from the tables according to their requirements. 

If you connect to a Postgres database for the very first time, you must use an account with sufficient rights to create databases, e.g. "postgres". After performing the first database update the role "CacheAdmin" is available, which has sufficient rights for any cache database operation. To create new logins and grant access to the Postgres cache database for other users, see chapter Login administration of the cache databases .
May 3, 2024

Cache Database Postgres Database

Infrastructure for the postgres database

At the PostgreSQL server the tables are either placed in the schema public or a schema named according to the published project. In general the tables in postgres have the same strucure as in the Microsoft SQL cache database, so the transfer to postgres is mainly a pure copy of their contents. Only some data types are subtituted by their equivalents in postgres. Therefore you may refer to the cachedatabase documentation concerning these tables. Some additional tables, views or even schemas and appropriate transfer functions may be introduced by the packages and their add-ons.

In schema public the support functions diversityworkbenchmodule and version provide the module name “DiversityDescriptionsCache” and the postgres database version (e.g. “01.00.01”) as strings to support processing and the database update. In the published project schemas the support functions projectid and version provide the corresponding integer values.   

All schemas, functions, tables and views are owned by role CacheAdmin. The additional role CacheUser grants read access to all elements rsp. execution rights to the support functions.

 

Source tables

The data tables of the source modules (e.g. DiversityReferences) are transfered as copies to the schema public. I.e. the access tables ending with “Source”, “SourceTarget” and “SourceView”, which serve administrative purposes, are omitted. In the example for the module DiversityReferences, shown in the databaseinfrastructure page, only the tables ReferenceTitle and ReferenceRelator are tranferred to postgres.

 

Project tables

The project tables in postgres are simple copies of the cache database tables. They are placed in a schema named according to the published project, e.g. Project_Test for a project with the name “Test”. For details refer to the cache database documentation:

The view ProjectLanguage provides access to the ProjectLanguageCode stored in table CacheMetadata. The view TranlationLanguage provides access to the LanguageCode of available translations stored in table CacheTranslation.  

 

Packages and Add-Ons

The formatting of the data according to the specifications of webservices etc. is done with packages. The packages are realized as tables, views, functions etc. reading the data in the tables without any changes to the data. They therefore can be inserted and removed without any effects on the original data. The naming of the objects within a package follow the schema [Name of the package]_… . Each package provides a database command file to create the required objects. Transfer of data is done by calling dedicated transfer functions.

For certain packages there are add-ons available to adapt a package to the special specifications of e.g. a project. Each add-on provides a database command file to create the required objects. The traditional way of realizing an add-on is to modify some transfer functions of the package. Therefore only one of those add-ons can be installed for a package. A more flexible approach of handling add-ons is to build a dedicated add-on transfer function and store its name in the administration table. For package transfer there a transger step is defined that reads all associated add-ons from the database and calls their transfer functions in a defined order. With this approach insertion of multiple compatible add-ons may be realized.   

 For the administration of packages and add-ons four tables are used in the postgres database:

In table Package each installed package, its version and description are stored. After data transfer to a package transfer date and time are stored there, too. Add-on data like its version are stored in table PackageAddOn. Some add-ons may require a parameter that has to be selected during installation and ist stored in table column Parameter. If the “non-traditional” approach of realizing add-ons using dedicated transfer functions is used, this table provides optional support columns.

The table PackagePublicTable offers support, if a package or add-on needs to provide data in the schema public. A traditional way to realize this feature is to mark the package as “using schema public”. As a consequence the package can only be created in one project of the whole database. When the package is removed, all objects in schemad public with the prefix “[Name of the package]_” are dropped.

An alternative is that a package or add-on inserts the public table name in PackagePublicTable. Furthermore the public table must have a column where the source schema name is included. If the package is removed, all entries of the public table with matching package name and source schema will be deleted. If the public table is empty, the table itself will be dropped. An example is package NaviKey that enters all published schemas in the table NaviKey_Schema. This table is used by the REST service to provide data to the application DiversityNaviKey.  

The table PackageSchema offers support, if a package or add-on needs to provide data in dependent schemas. For example the add-on NaviKey_Translations provides access to all available translated data of the package NaviKey. Therefore for each available language code a dependent schema named [language code]_Project_[Name of the project] (e.g. de_Project_LIASlight for the german translation) is created with views to the data in the master schema. Each dependent schema is inserted in table PackageSchema (and the public table NaviKey_Schema for the REST service). When the package is removed, all dependent schemas will be dropped, too.

 

Available Packages and Add-Ons

Currently the following packages and add-ons are available:

Package Add-On Description
LiasGtm - Tables and views on the data for geographic visualization of LIAS trait data (https://liasgtm.lias.net/gtm.php)
NaviKey - Tables and views on the data for use with identification tool DiversityNaviKey (https://diversityworkbench.net/Portal/DiversityNaviKey)
NaviKey NaviKey_Wording Add on for package NaviKey that provides data for the DiversityNaviKey application (https://diversityworkbench.net/Portal/DiversityNaviKey):
(1) For characters/descriptors, categorical states and description items the wording text is provided instead of the original names.
NaviKey NaviKey_Language Add on for package NaviKey that provides data for the DiversityNaviKey application (https://diversityworkbench.net/Portal/DiversityNaviKey):
(1) For characters/descriptors, categorical states and description items the tranlated texts are provided instead of the original names and notes.
(2) During installation of the add on the target language is selected from the available translations.
(3) For published translations and available tables observe the cache database restrictions.
NaviKey NaviKey_Translations Add on for package NaviKey that provides data for the DiversityNaviKey application (https://diversityworkbench.net/Portal/DiversityNaviKey):
(1) For characters/descriptors, categorical states and description items the tranlated texts are provided instead of the original names.
(2) For each available language a schema is created where the data can be accessed.
(3) The dependent schemas are registered in tables PackageSchema and the public NaviKey_Schema.
(4) For published translations and available tables observethe cache database restrictions.

 

Tables for Packages and Add-Ons

Table Package

Column Data type Description Nullable
Package character varying(50) The name of the package NO
Version integer The version of the package YES
Description text Description of the package YES
URL character varying(500) A link to a website with further informations about the package YES
LogLastTransfer timestamp without time zone - YES

Table PackageAddOn

Column Data type Description Nullable
Package character varying(50) The name of the package NO
AddOn character varying(50) The name of the package add-on NO
Parameter character varying(50) An optional parameter to configure the package add-on YES
Version integer The version of the package add-on YES
TransferFunction character varying(50) An optional transfer function the package add-on; NULL for exclusive packages YES
TransferPriority integer The transfer priority of the package add-on; 0 for exclusive packages YES

Table PackageLockedCharacter

Stores for each schema the CIDs that shall not included in the package.

Column Data type Description Nullable
Package character varying(50) The name of the package NO
CID smallint The CID that shall not be included in the package NO

Table PackagePublicTable

Stores tables in schema public where data of the package are inserted. Data in this table are inserted by the package and/or Add-Ons.

Column Data type Description Nullable
Package character varying(50) The name of the package NO
Table character varying(128) The dependent table name in schema public of the package where data of the package are inserted NO
ControllingSchemaColumn character varying(128) The column name of dependent table where the controling schema name is stored YES

Table PackageSchema

Stores dependent schemas where data of the package are inserted. Data in this table are inserted by the package and/or Add-Ons.

Column Data type Description Nullable
Package character varying(50) The name of the package NO
Schema character varying(128) The dependent schema name of the package where data of the package are inserted NO
Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Projects

Projects in the cache database

The data transferred into the cache database are always transferred according to a project they belong to. Choose Data → Cache database … from the menu and select the tab Projects. If no projects were added so far the window will appear like shown below.

To add a new project for the transfer into the cache database, click on the Add project button. In the area below a new entry as shown below will appear. The area on the right shows the number of datasets in the project in the source database together with the date of the last update. To ensure the separation of the data between the projects, DiversityDescriptions creates a separate schema for every project named Project_[name of the project] together with needed roles, tables etc..

Before transferring data you have to update the project schema to the latest version, indicated by the appearance of an update button . Click on the button to open a window as shown below. Click on the Start update button to update the schema to the latest version. For adding a project and performing the database update you need to be a system administrator (s. Login administration). 

After the update the database is ready to transfer data into. 

But before starting the cache transfer you should take a look on the ID mapping, data withholding and data restrictions. The first two items are stored in the descriptions database, the latter in the cache database.

With the ID mapping you can determine how description items, descriptors and categorical states shall be identified in the cach database and how changes are handled in subsequent cache transfers. Click on the button to edit the ID mapping behaviour for the data of the project (see below).

If any descriptors are marked with the data status Data withheld, you have the options to exclude the whole description the export, to hide only the marked descriptor data or to export the whole dataset. Click on the button to edit the data withholding behaviour for the data of the project (see below).

Besides the restrictions in the source database, you can set further data restrictions for this transfer. Click on the button and choose the data restrictions for the cache transfer (see below).

To transfer the data you have 3 options as described in the Transfer chapter.

Afterwards the number and date of the transferred data are visible as shown below.

To inspect the transferred data use the View content button. A window as shown below will open where all tables containing the data of the project are listed.

Click on the button to filter the content. A window as shown below will open. Choose the column for the filter, the operator (e.g. = ) and the filter value (see below).

Now click on the button to add the filter criteria to the table filter. You may add as many criteria as needed (see below). With the button you can clear the filter..

Before you can transfer the data into the Postgresdatabase, you have to connect to the Postgres database and click on the button to establish the project and run necessary updates . After the project is established and up to date, use the button to transfer the data in the Postgres area (see below).

If a project is exported into another Postgres database on the same server, these databases will be listed underneath the Postgres block (see image below). For an overview of all target Postgres databases click on the button.

If the target is placed on the current server, the text will appear in black instead of grey (see below). Packages, if administered, will be listed in the table as well.

In some cases, when a cache database has been deleted on the current Postgres server, there might still be some administrative information left. In this case the target is shown in red and you have the option to delete the administrative data for that target (see below).

In the Postgres database you can install packages to adapt the data to any needed format.

 

 

 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Restrictions

Restrictions for the data transfer into the cache database

The restrictions of the published data are defined in the main database via projects and data withholding . In the cache database further restrictions can be set for every project. You may set a filter on description data to restrict the Descriptions, select the Descriptors, the Scopes and the Translations that are transferred.

To set the restrictions, click on the  button (see below).

A window as shown in the following sections will open.

 

Descriptions tab

The Descriptions filter works the same way as the Extended query. Use buttons Add description, Add scope or Add descriptor to insert filter items for description, scope or descriptor criteria and set the filter conditions. With button Remove filter item you may remove the currently selected filter item. In the lower right corner Matches: shows you the current count of description items that match the adjusted filter criteria. In the lower center part the resulting SQL filter is shown.

 

Descriptors tab

With the Descriptors filter you can select the descriptors for which summary data shall be transferred. Use button the arrow buttons  << ,   <  ,   >   and  >>  for moving the entries between the Not published and Published list. Click button Transfer existing to move all descriptors that are used within the database to the Published list. With button Transfer from tree you may move all descriptors connected to the selected Descriptor tree to the Published list. Option Show sequence numbers includes the descriptor sequence numbers in the lists. If you do not only want to suppress the descriptive data but also want to hide the descriptors and their state from the cache database, select the option Omit descriptors.

Note: With this option you may keep the selected descriptors completely away from the cache database. If you want to suppress certain descriptors only for selected targets, there is an additional possibility to control the export based on the Packages (refer to “locked characters”).

 

Scopes tab

With the Scope filter you can select the scope type for description scopes that shall be transferred. Use button the arrow buttons  << ,   <  ,   >   and  >>  for moving the entries between the Not published and Published list. Click button Transfer existing to move all scope types that are used within the database to the Published list.

 

Translations tab

With the Translation filter you can select the translation languages for description items, descriptors and categorical states that shall be transferred. Use button the arrow buttons  << ,   <  ,   >   and  >>  for moving the entries between the Not published and Published list. Click button Transfer existing to move all translation languages that are present within the database to the Published list. Use the check boxes Descriptions, Descriptors and States to select the tables where translations shall be published. By default, i.e. without explicit adjustment no tranlations will be transferred to the cache database.

 

Descriptor trees tab

With the Descriptor tee filter you can select the descriptor trees that shall be transferred. Use button the arrow buttons  << ,   <  ,   >   and  >>  for moving the entries between the Not published and Published list. By default, i.e. without explicit adjustment no descriptor trees will be transferred to the cache database.

 

Resources tab

With the Resources filter you can select the resource links that shall be transferred. You have to select at least the Entity types and the Resource types that shall be published. By default, i.e. without explicit adjustment no resources will be transferred to the cache database.

If you select Publish all from section Resource types, all available resources that either are URLs (starting with “http://” or “https://”) or color codes (starting with “color://#”) are included in the transfer. This general restriction ignores resources that are located on your local machine and therefore not generally reachable. If you select the explicit types Images or Colors, the resource variant types must be set correctly, e.g. “image/jpeg”. This can be done for an individual resource in the corresponding edit panel by retrieving the media data from the source. A more comfortable way to get those data for a large amount of resources is to use the database maintenance tool.

With the check boxes Restrict role you may select role values that shall be transferred. With Restrict ranking you may select the minimum ranking value of published resources. If you select the value “0”, the ranking values will be ignored, i.e. even unranked resources will be published.   

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Sources

Sources from other modules

To provide details from other modules like DiversityTaxonNames, DiversityCollection, DiversityReferences etc. in the cached data, this information is transferred into the cache database together with the data from DiversityDescriptions database. Use the button to add a source for the data you need. You may include data from a local or a linked database. The data for the cache database are provided via views that will be created for you. With the button you can list the sources used in the projects to get a hint of what may be needed. The tables and view for the sources are placed in the schema dbo in the SQL-Server cache database and public in the Postgres cache databases. In case a new version for the source is available you get a notation like  Needs recreation to version 2 . In this case you must remove the source with a click on the button and use the button to recreate the source. For the inclusion of sources from services like Catalogue of Life see the chapter Sources from webservices.

 

Subsets

The sources of some module provide additional subsets to the main data. To select the subsets that should be transferred to the cache database, click on the button. In the upcoming dialog (see the example for DiversityTaxonNames below) select those subsets you want to transfer in addition to the basic name list.

 

Transfer

Single manual transfer

To transfer the data of a single source into the ** ** cache database use the button and the buttons to inspect the content.

To transfer the data into the Postgres database, you have to connect with a database first. Use the button to transfer the data from the ** ** cache database into the  Postgres database. The button will transfer the data of all sources in the list into the cache database (see below).

 

Scheduled transfer

To transfer the data of all sources into the ** ** cache database and all available Postgres databases, use the scheduled transfer as backgroundprocess. With this transfer all available Postgres databases will be included in the data transfer. These targets are indicated underneath the Postgres block (see image below).

If the target is placed on the current server, the text will appear in black as shown below.

 

Removal

With the button you can remove the sources together with the views (see above).

 

Orphaned data

In some cases, e.g. if a datasource is removed from the ** ** cache database and there is no active connection to the Postgres database, the corresponding data will stay in the postgres database. These orphaned data might disturb subsequent data transfers, if they overlap with the remaining data. Their source view and number of datasets are shown in section “Source views not present in the SQL-Server database” (see below). Click on button to delete the orphaned data. 

 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Transfer

Transfer of the data

To transfer the data you have 3 options:

  • Single transfer : Transfer data of a single project
  • Bulk transfer : Transfer data of all projects and sources selected for the schedule based transfer

With the resp. button you can decide if the data should be checked for updates. If this option is active ( ) the program will compare the contents and decide if a transfer is needed. If a transfer is needed, this will be indicated with a red border of the transfer button . If you transferred only a part of the data this will be indicated by a thin red border for the current session . The context menu of the button View differences will show the accession numbers of the datasets with changes after the last transfer (see below).

Competing transfer

If a competing transfer is active for the same step, this will be indicated as shown below. While this transfer is active, any further transfer for this step will be blocked.

If this competing transfer is due to e.g. a crash and is not active any more, you have to get rid of the block to preceed with the transfer of the date. To do so you have to reset the status of the transfer. Check the scheduler as shown below. This will activate the button.

Now click on the button to open the window for setting the scheduler options as shown below.

To finally remove the block by the Active transfer, click on the button. This will remove the block and you can preceed with the transfer of the data.

 

Single transfer

To transfer the data for a certain project, click on the button in the Cache- or Postgres data range (see below).

A window as shown below will open, where all data ranges for the transfer will be listed. With the  button you can set the timeout for the transfer of the data where 0 means infinite and is recommended for large amounts of data. With the button you can switch on resp. of the generation of a report. Click on the Start transfer button to start the transfer.

After the data are transferred, the number and data are visible as shown below.

After the data are transferred successful transfers as indicated by an error by . The reason for the failure is shown if you click on the button. For the transfer to the Postgres database the number in the source and the target will be listed as shown below indicating deviating numbers of the data. For the detection of certain errors it may help to activate the logging as described in the chapter TransferSettings. To inspect the first 100 lines of the transferred data click on the button.

 

Bulk transfer

To transfer the data for all projects selected for the schedule based transfer, click on the button in the cache- or Postgres data range (see below).  

 DiversityDescriptions_local  DiversityDescriptionsCache_local DiversityDescriptionsCache_2 on 127.0.0.1, 5555 as postgres

Together with the transfer of the data, reports will be generated and stored in the reports directory. Click on the button in the Timer area to open this directory. To inspect data in the default schemas (dbo for SQL-Server and public for Postgres ) outside the project schemata, use the buttons shown in the image above.

 

Transfer as background process

Transfer data from database to cache database and all Postgres databases

To transfer the data as a background process use the following arguments:

  • CacheTransfer
  • Server of the SQL-server database
  • Port of SQL-server
  • Database with the source data
  • Server for Postgres cache database
  • Port for Postgres server
  • Name of the Postgres cache database
  • Name of Postgres user
  • Password of Postgres user

For example:

C:\DiversityWorkbench\DiversityDescriptions> DiversityDescriptions.exe CacheTransfer snsb.diversityworkbench.de 5432 DiversityDescriptions 127.0.0.1 5555 DiversityDescriptionsCache PostgresUser myPostgresPassword

The application will transfer the data according to the settings, generate a protocol as described above and quit automatically after the transfer of the data. The user starting the process needs a Windows authentication with access to the SQL-Server database and proper rights to transfer the data. The sources and projects within DiversityCollection will be transferred according to the settings (inclusion, filter, days and time). The transfer will be documented in report files. Click on the button to access these files. For a simulation of this transfer click on the Transfer all data according to the settings  button at the top of the form. This will ignore the time restrictions as defined in the settings and will start an immediate transfer of all selected data.

To generate transfer reports and document every step performed by the software during the transfer of the data use a different first argument:

  • CacheTransferWithLogging

C:\DiversityWorkbench\DiversityDescriptions> DiversityDescriptions.exe CacheTransferWithLogging snsb.diversityworkbench.de 5432 DiversityDescriptions 127.0.0.1 5555 DiversityDescriptionsCache PostgresUser myPostgresPassword

To transfer only the data from the main database into the cache database use a different first argument:

  • CacheTransferCacheDB

To transfer only the data from the cache database into the postgres database use a different first argument:

  • CacheTransferPostgres

The remaining arguments correspond to the list above. The generated report files are located in the directory …/ReportsCacheDB and the single steps are witten into the file DiversityCollectionError.log.

History

For every transfer of the data along the pipeline, the settings (e.g. version of the databases) the number of transferred data and additional information are stored. Click on the  button in the respective part to get a list of all previous transfers together with these data (see below).

 

Jan 14, 2025

Cache Database Transfer Protocol

Protocol of the transfers in the cache database

The protocol of any transfer is written into the error log of the application. To examine the messages of the transfers within the cache database you may for every single step click on the button in the transfer window in case an error occurred. In the main window the protocol for all transfers is shown in the   Protocol  part. Choose Data -> Cache database … from the menu and select the tab Protocol. A window will appear like shown below.

A click on the button Requery protocol (error log) requeries resp. shows the protocol. The option Show lines will show the line numbers of the protocol and the option Restrict to Failure will restrict the output to failures and errors stored in the protocol. By default both options are seleted and the number of lines is restricted to 1000. In case of longer protocols change the number of lines for the output. The button Open as textfile will show the protocol in the default editor of your computer. The button Clear protocol (error log) will clear the protocol.

 

 

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Cache Database Transfer Settings

Settings for the transfer of the projects in the cache database

To edit the general settings for the transfer, click on the button in the main form. A window as shown below will open. Here you can set the timeout for the transfer in minutes. The value 0 means that no time limit is set and the program should try infinite to transfer the data. Furthermore you can set the parameters for the transfer of the data in chunks. If the amount of data is above a certain threshold, it is faster to divide the data into smaller chunks. The threshold for transfer into the cache database and into the Postgres database can be set as shown below, together with the maximal size of the chunks. To return to the default vales click the button Set default values.

Logging

For the detection of certain errors it may help to log the events of the transfer by activating the logging: . The logging is set per application, not per database. So to detect errors in a transfer started by a scheduler on a server, you have to activate the logging in the application started by the server.

Scheduled transfer

The scheduled transfer is meant to be launched on a server on a regular basis, e.g. once a week, once a day, every hour etc.. The transfer of the data via the scheduled transfer will take place according to the settings. This means the program will check if the next planned time for a data transfer is passed and only than start to transfer the data. To include a source in the schedule, check the selector for the scheduler. To set the time and days scheduled for a transfer, click on the button. A window as shown below will open where you can select the time and the day(s) of the week when the transfer should be executed.

The planned points in time are shown in the form as shown below.

The protocol of the last transfer can be seen as in the window above or if you click on the button. If an error occurred this can be inspected with a click no the button.

If another transfer on the same source has been started, no further transfer will be started. In the program this competing transfer is shown as below.

You can remove this block with a click on the < button. In opening window (see below) click on the button. This will as well remove error messages from previous transfers.

A further option for restriction of the transfers is the comparison of the date when the last transfer has been executed. Click on the button to change it to . In this state the program will compare the dates of the transfers and execute the transfer only if new data are available.

 

 

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Cache Database Webservices

Sources from webservices

To provide details for datasets linked to webservices like Catalogueof Life etc. in the cached data, this information can be transferred into the cache database together with the data from the DiversityCollection database. Use the button to add the webservice you need.

 

Transfer

To transfer the data of a webservice into the ** ** cache database use the button. A window a shown below will open where you must select all projects related to the webservice you selected. **You must transfer the projects into the  ** cache database before transferring the webservice data! Only entries found within these projects will be transferred.

Use the buttons to inspect the content. Names that are already present will not be transferred again. So if you need these values to be updated you have to remove it (see below) and add it again. Links that refer to lists of names instead of single names will not be inserted. These links will be stored in the Errorlog to enable their inspection.

To transfer the data into the Postgres database, you have to connect with a database first. Use the button to transfer the data from the ** ** cache database into the  Postgres database and the buttons to inspect the content.

 

Removal

With the button you can remove the sources together with the views (see above).

 

Jan 14, 2025

Export

Export

There are several export mechanisms:

Matrix wizard: Export descriptor and description data as tabulator separated text file generate an import schema for the matrix importwizard.

List export: Export data as tabulator-separated text file.

Structured export: Export data as structued data file, e.g. XML according to the SDD schema 1.1 rev 5 or DELTA text file.

Export questionaires: Export description data of a project or from a quey list as HTML forms.

CSV export: Export data in a tab separated format for external analysis.

 

Byte order mark BOM

Exported documents are in general generated with UTF-8 encoding. An option for UTF-8 encoded documents is to include a three-byte long Byte Order Mark (BOM) at the beginning of the document (“magic number”). An advantage of the BOM is that a program that evaluates it, automatically detects UTF-8 as the correct encoding. Especially the import tools of DiversityDescriptions recognize the BOM and are able to adjust the correct encoding.

Unfortunately some older tools and Java do not automatically recognize the BOM, which results in “strange” characters at the beginning of such documents. In DiversityDescriptions generally the export functions for structured documents (e.g. XML and HTML) do not generate a BOM, since those documents include an explicit encoding information field. For the tabulator-separated data document provided with EML, the encoding is specified in the XML-based metadata document, therefore no BOM is inserted here.

For all tabulator-separated text file exports you have the option to omit the BOM. In the upper right corner of the window, besides the button to set the output file, you can find the check button . Keep it checked to generate the output file with BOM (see image below left) or uncheck it to suppress the BOM (image at the right).  

        

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Export

Export CSV

Export CSV

Notes:

  • The Export CSV function provides a direct copy of selected database table as tabulator separated text file. If you want to generate flles that give a strutured overview of descriptors or description data, you should prefer the Export … Lists or the Export Wizard (coming soon).
  • The Export CSV function requires the “Bulk Copy” tool, which is part of a local Microsoft SQL Server installation. If it is not available on your computer, you will get an error message after opening the window. Search for the “bcp-utility” to get information about a free download and installation of the “Bulk Copy” tool.

To export the tables of the database in the a tabulator, comma or semicolon separated format, choose Data → Export → Export CSV … from the menu. A window as shown below will open where you can select the tables to be exported in sections Selection criteria and in the Tables for export.

To start the export click on the Start export button. By default the data will be exported into a directory <resources directory>\Export\<database_name>. Click on the button to select a different target directory before starting export.

After export the tables are marked with green backgound, if table schema and data were exported successfully. If only the data were exported, this is marked with yellow background, if nothing was exported, the background is red. A detailled export report can be viewd by a click on the export result file name.  

May 16, 2024

Export Questionnaires

Export questionnaires

With this form you can export description data from the database to HTML forms. You can open the generated HTML files, edit the data in the form and re-import the changes by using the import questionairedata function. Choose Data -> Export → Export questionnaires … from the menu to open the window for the export.

 

In the Export project section all projects of the database are shown as a tree. Select here the project that shall be exported. In case of hierarchically organized projects the subordinated projects will be included for export, if the Include child projects option is checked. You may pass a description list to the form by starting a query in mode “Edit descriptions”. If all descriptions in the list belong to the same project, you have the option to select single descriptions for export. In this case the Export project section shows the button  to switch to the list view (see below).

 

In the Expot descriptions section you find all description titles that have been passed to the export form (see below). You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. By clicking the button you will return to the Export project view.

The Withheld data section allows control over export of datasets that contain entries with data status “Data withheld”. Option Supress whole description (default) excludes all descriptions form export where at least on descriptor is marked with “Data withheld”. Option Hide withheld descriptor excludes only the corresponding descriptor data from the description. Option Export withheld data does not exclude any data from export.

 

Options 

The Options section allows the selection of a Descriptor tree to determine the sequence and selection of descriptors for output. If a structured descriptor tree is selected, the first level descriptor tree nodes will be inserted as headers to structure the document. If option Adapt descriptor names is checked, the descriptor names will be prefixed with the headers from the derscriptor tree. In this case you may specify a string to connect the names in the texrt box at the right of the option. If Generate index page is checked, an alphabetically sorted index with links to the individual description pages will be generated.

You may Hide descriptor status data in the generated forms. Furthermore output of the ordinal numbers for descriptors rsp. categorical states may be suppressed by using the options Hide descriptor numbers rsp. Hide state numbers.  With options Include notes and Include modifier/frequency you can control if notes and modifier or frequency values shall be included in the generated questionaires. With Include details a text field for editing the item details will be inserted.

By default a font type with serifes is used for the HTML output, select Sans serif font for an alternative. The colors of several HTML elements may be adapted to the personal preferences by clicking on button . With Text rows you can adjust the size of text boxex used for text and molecular sequence descriptors. Option Scrollable states generates an alternative layout for categorical descriptors, where the state values are arranged in scroll boxes. 

Check Include resources to include images for descriptions, descriptors, categorical states and descriptor tree nodes in the questionnaire. In the generated HTML questionnaire the images will be zoomed by a dedicated factor, when the mouse cursor is moved over it. The zoom factors may be adjusted by clicking on button . If you check the option Insert fields for new resources, the specified number of input fields for entering new description resources (name and URL) will be inserted in the forms (see image below on the left). 

Check Include scopes to include a section for scope data in the questionnare. The scope values of the types “Sex”, “Stage”, “Part” and “Other scopes”, which may be administered in the Edit project section, are included as check boxes. For the other (general) scope types input boxes will be generated, where new values may be entered or existing values can be edited. If a scope value is linked to a database entry, e.g. of a DiversityTaxonNames database, it cannot be modified. In this case only a fixed text with the reference to the target database will be inserted in the questionnaire.

By clicking on button you may open an option window where you can change this default behaviour. You may adjust for which scope types an input box for a new scope value shall be inserted or if scopes that cannot be modified shall be displayed (see image above on the right).

See below an example of a questionnaire where imput fields for a new description resource and all general scope types are present..

 

If for the selected projects translations are stored in the database, you may chose the Export language. If for any element no translation in the chosen export language is present, automatically the original text will be used. With field Language settings you can control the presentation of floating point values in the output, in field Send answer to you may enter the mail address to return the results. 

 

Test

To check the export, click on the Test export button. In the Output preview section an empty form for entering a new item will be displayed (see picture below). The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Questionnaires\<Database name>_<Project>.txt. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name. Button opens the form in an external web browser.

Since the generated form can be opened with any modern web broswer, you may distribute it to easily collect item data by people that do not have access to the Diversity Descriptions database. Even if the form is published as a web page, the collected data stay completele local in the user’s web browser and are not uploaded to any server. To get the  data into the database, they must be “downloaded” form the form and sent back to a database editor for import (see item Send reply below).

 

Export

Before starting the export, the export file name should be checked. The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Questionaires\<Database name>_<Project>.html. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name text box. During export a number of HTML files will be generated. The document for entering a new item has the specified file name. For entries present in the database the description id is appended. Furthermore an index file with postfix “_Index” will be generated, where you may navigated to each exported questionnaire.

To generate the HTML files press the Start export button. During export the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. Button opens the form visible in the Output preview section in an external web browser (see image above).

 

Send reply

When you opened a HTML form in the web browser and modified data, you may download them as a text file for databaseimport. At the bottom of the HTML form click the button Download revised description (see image below). Data collection is completely done in the user’s local web browser, nothing is uploaded to a server. Since data collection is done using javascript, please take care that the script is not blocked by the web browser.

 

Jan 14, 2025

List Export

List export

There are several exports for tabulator-separated text files:

Export descriptors list: Export descriptor data as tabulator separated text file.

Export descriptions list: Export description data as tabulator separated text file.

Export sample data list: Export sample data as tabulator separated text file.

Export resource data list: Export resource data as tabulator separated text file for data review and possible re-import of modified data.

Export translations list: Export translations as tabulator separated text file for data review and possible re-import of modified data.

 

May 3, 2024

Subsections of List Export

Export Descriptions List

Export Descriptions List

With this form you can export description data from the database to a tabulator separated text file. Choose Data → Export → Export lists -> Descriptions list … from the menu to open the window for the export.

 

In the Export project section all projects of the database are shown as a tree. Select here the project that shall be exported. In case of hierarchically organized projects the subordinated projects will be included for export, if the Include child projects option is checked. You may pass a description list to the form by starting a query in mode “Edit descriptions”. If all descriptions in the list belong to the same project, you have the option to select single descriptions for export. In this case the Export project section shows the button  to switch to the list view (see below).

 

In the Export descriptions section you find all description titles that have been passed to the export form (see below). You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. By clicking the button you will return to the Export project view.

The Withheld data section allows control over export of datasets that contain entries with data status “Data withheld”. Option Supress whole description (default) excludes all descriptions form export where at least on descriptor is marked with “Data withheld”. Option Hide withheld descriptor excludes only the corresponding descriptor data from the description. Option Export withheld data does not exclude any data from export.

The Export settings allows the inclusion of a header line in the output by checking the option Generate headers in output. Additionally the lines displayed in the Test output section may be selected by specifying the first and last line number in Test lines [start] to [end]. For the generated output you may adjust the lines that shall be exported in Exp. lines [start] to [end]. For the end line a maximum value of 99999 may be entered, which means export of the whole data beginning from the start line.

 

Columns

To generate a list output, you have to determine the data columns that shall be present in the descriptions list. To include a new column press the Add button in the tool strip of the Columns section. A control representing a single output column will be added at the end of the column list (see picture below). 

 

The Columns control shows the column number, a text box for the column header (title) and the source selector (see below).

As source you may select one of the following values:

**Line number ** Number of the data line in the output file
Description   Description data, e.g. name of the description entry
Description scope  Description scope data, e.g. taxon, specimen or sex 
Descriptor value  Value(s) of a certain descriptor
Descriptor status   Data status of a certain descriptor 

Depending on the selected data source one or more additional selection boxes will appear in the description column control. The target (see picture below left) selects the field from the database that shall be inserted. If you select “Description scope” as data source, a selection box for filtering will be inserted to determine the scope category (see picture below right).  

 

If you select “Descriptor value” or “Descriptor status” as data source, a selection box for the descriptor will be inserted (see picture below). The descriptor can be selected from an alphabetical list or from the descriptor tree by clicking . In case of “Descriptor value” the target selection box entries depend on the descriptor type. For categorical descriptors you may select “Name”, “Abbreviation”, “Detail”, “Wording”, “ID” or “Notes” of the categorical ssummary data. For quantitative descriptors you may select the “Value” or “Notes” of a specific statistical measure (separate selection box). For text and sequence descriptors you may select the “Text” or “Notes”. 

Categorical descriptors offer an additional special target type called “<Binary columns>”. If you select this value, an additional selection window will appear, where you can select either “<all>” or a specific categorical state. If a specific categorical state is selected, a column will be inserted in the outptu, that contains either “1” if the state is present or “0” otherwise. If you select “<all>”, a column for each categorical state will be inserted that contains the binary presence sign. An examble is shown in the picture below (column 6).  

As long as you did not enter a value for the column header, a reasonable suggestion depending on the selected values will be inserted. You may enter a different column header, then the background color changes to light yellow to indicate that it will not be updated automatically anymore (see picture below, column 3). Double-click on the header to open a separate edit window. 

Output formatting is controlled with check box “quotes” that includes the whole output text in quotes and text boxes Pre: and Post:, which allow inclusion of the values in prefix and postfix strings (default is “). By selecting the check box Skip empty a blank output will be inserted  instead of the specified prefix and postfix strings, if no value is present. If for a column multiple values may be present, e.g. in case of categorical descriptors several categorical states might be present, there is the choice of insterting additional lines for multiple values (Separate line), selecting a single value (Select) or merging the values to a single output string (Merge). For option Select you have specify if the first, second or other values shall be selected. For option Merge you may specify a separator string that shall be inserted between two values (default is ; ). To open a separate edit window for the Pre:, Post: or Merge strings, e.g. because a longer value shall be entered, double-click on the correspondent text box. 

Any selected column may be shifted to another position using the Up and Down buttons or deleted with the Remove button of the tool strip. With button you may delete all columns. The complete export schema may be saved into an XML file using the button , which opens a dialog window to enter the file name and location. By default the schema file name is generated as:

     <resources directory>\ExportSchema\DescriptionList_<Database name>_<Project>.xml 

The XML schema file includes information concerning the database, the project, handling of withheld data and the output columns. By pressing the button in the Columns section, a schema file can be opened. If the schema does not meet the active database, especially descriptor dependent columns might be erroneous because of unknown values. This is indicated by a red background color (see picture below).   

 

Export

Before starting the export, the export file name should be checked. The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Export\DescriptionList_<Database name>_<Project>.txt. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name. If you uncheck the option Generate preview, no output preview will be generated for the export. To generate an output without BOM, release the button. 

To check the export, click on the Test export button. By changing the selected Language settings: you may adapt the output of floating point numbers or date and time fields to your needs. In the Output preview grid view the lines specified in the Export settings (Test lines [start] to [end]) will be displayed (see picture above). To generate the table file press the Start export button. During test and export the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

May 16, 2024

Export Descriptors List

Export Descriptors List

With this form you can export descriptor data from the database to an tabulator separated text file. Choose Data → Export → Export lists -> Descriptors list … from the menu to open the window for the export.

 

In the Export project section all projects of the database are shown as a tree. Select here the project that shall be exported. In case of hierarchically organized projects the subordinated projects will be included for export, if the Include child projects option is checked.

The Export settings allows the inclusion of a header line in the output by checking the option Generate headers in output. Additionally the lines displayed in the Test output section may be selected by specifying the first and last line number in Test lines [start] to [end]. For the generated output you may adjust the lines that shall be exported in Exp. lines [start] to [end]. For the end line a maximum value of 99999 may be entered, which means export of the whole data beginning from the start line.

 

Columns

To generate a list output, you have to determine the data columns that shall be present in the descriptors list. To include a new column press the Add button in the tool strip of the Columns section. A control representing a single output column will be added at the end of the column list (see picture below). 

 

The Columns control shows the column number, a text box for the column header (title) and the source selector (see below).

As source you may select one of the following values:

**Line number ** Number of the data line in the output file
Descriptor   Descriptor data, e.g. name of the descriptor
Descriptor tree  Assigned descriptor tree(s)
Categorical state   Categorical state(s) of a certain descriptor 

Depending on the selected data source one or more additional selection boxes will appear in the descriptor column control. The target (see picture below) selects the filed from the database that shall be inserted.  

   

As long as you did not enter a value for the column header, a reasonable suggestion depending on the selected values will be inserted. You may enter a different column header, then the background color changes to light yellow to indicate that it will not be updated automatically anymore (see picture below, column 4). Double-click on the header to open a separate edit window. 

Output formatting is controlled with check box “quotes” that includes the whole output text in quotes and text boxes Pre: and Post:, which allow inclusion of the values in prefix and postfix strings. By selecting the check box Skip empty a blank output will be inserted  instead of the specified prefix and postfix strings or quotes, if no value is present. If for a column multiple values may be present, e.g. in case of categorical descriptors where several categorical states might be present, there is the choice of inserting additional lines for multiple values (Separate line), selecting a single value (Select) or merging the values to a single output string (Merge). For option Select you have specify if the first, second or other values shall be selected. For option Merge you may specify a separator string that shall be inserted between two values (default is ; ). To open a separate edit window for the Pre, Post or Merge values strings, e.g. because a longer value shall be entered, double-click on the correspondent text box. 

Any selected column may be shifted to another position using the Up and Down buttons or deleted with the Remove button of the tool strip. With button you may delete all columns. The complete export schema may be saved into an XML file using the button , which opens a dialog window to enter the file name and location. By default the schema file name is generated as:

     <resources directory>\ExportSchema\DescriptiorList_<Database name>_<Project>.xml 

The XML schema file includes information concerning the database, the project and the output columns. By pressing the button in the Columns section, a schema file can be opened. 

 

Export

Before starting the export, the export file name should be checked. The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Export\DescriptorList_<Database name>_<Project>.txt. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name. If you uncheck the option Generate preview, no output preview will be generated for the export. To generate an output without BOM, release the button. 

To check the export, click on the Test export button. By changing the selected Language settings: you may adapt the output of floating point numbers or date and time fields to your needs. In the Output preview grid view the lines specified in the Export settings (Test lines [start] to [end]) will be displayed (see picture above). To generate the table file press the Start export button. During test and export the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

May 16, 2024

Export Resource List

Export resource data list

With this form you can export the resource data (see tables Resource and ResourceVariant) from the database to a tabulator separated text file. Since the output includes the database keys, you may correct the data, e.g. by using a spreadsheet program and re-import the changes by using the importwizard. Choose Data → Export → Export lists -> Resource data list … from the menu to open the window for the export.

 

In the Export project section all projects of the database are shown as a tree. Select here the project that shall be exported. In case of hierarchically organized projects the subordinated projects will be included for export, if the Include child projects option is checked.

The Withheld data section allows control over export of datasets that contain entries with data status “Data withheld”. Option Supress whole description (default) excludes all descriptions form export where at least on descriptor is marked with “Data withheld”. Option Hide withheld descriptor excludes only the corresponding descriptor data from the description. Option Export withheld data does not exclude any data from export.

The Options section allows the selection of the Entity types for output (“Description”, “Descriptor”, “Categorical state” and “Descriptor tree node”). To include all export data in quotes, check option “quotes”. If option Fill all columns is checked, resource variant data that are inherited from the row above will be explicitely repeated in the actual row. To include all data rows that do not have resources select option Show empty entities. If you select Show descriptors, the descriptor titles will be inserted for categorical states. By checking option Show duplicates only you may list resource links that are referenced by more than one entity of the same type.

You may restrict the resource data list to resource links that include a specified substring by selecting the URL filter option and entering the required string in the text field below. 

 

Export

Before starting the export, the export file name should be checked. The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Export\ResourceDataList_<Database name>_<Project>.txt. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name. To generate an output without BOM, release the button. 

To check the export, click on the Test export button. In the Output preview data grid the first few lines will be displayed (see picture above). To generate the table file press the Start export button. During test and export the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

 

Re-import

The review output includes all database keys that can be sufficiently used to identify the affected data row. When the modified data shall be re-imported, the internal keys must be available to the import wizard. This can easily be done by creating a new import session and using the option  Generate mapping … in form Import sessions.

Jan 14, 2025

Export Samples List

Export Sample Data List

With this form you can export sample data from the database to a tabulator separated text file. Choose Data → Export → Export lists -> Sample data list … from the menu to open the window for the export.

 

In the Export project section all projects of the database are shown as a tree. Select here the project that shall be exported. In case of hierarchically organized projects the subordinated projects will be included for export, if the Include child projects option is checked.

The Export settings allows the inclusion of a header line in the output by checking the option Generate headers in output. Additionally the lines displayed in the Test output section may be selected by specifying the first and last line number in Test lines [start] to [end]. For the generated output you may adjust the lines that shall be exported in Exp. lines [start] to [end]. For the end line a maximum value of 99999 may be entered, which means export of the whole data beginning from the start line.

 

Columns

To generate a list output, you have to determine the data columns that shall be present in the descriptions list. To include a new column press the Add button in the tool strip of the Columns section. A control representing a single output column will be added at the end of the column list (see picture below). 

 

The Columns control shows the column number, a text box for the column header (title) and the source selector (see below).

As source you may select one of the following values:

**Line number ** Number of the data line in the output file
Description   Description data, e.g. name of the description entry
Sampling event  Sampling event data, e.g. name, detail or start date 
Sampling unit  Sampling unit data, e.g. ID, specimen or specimen URI 
Descriptor value  Sample value(s) of a certain descriptor

Depending on the selected data source one or more additional selection boxes will appear in the description column control. The target (see pictures below) selects the field from the database that shall be inserted..  

 

If you select “Descriptor value” as data source, a selection box for the descriptor will be inserted (see picture below). The descriptor can be selected from an alphabetical list or from the descriptor tree by clicking . The target selection box entries depend on the descriptor type. For categroical descriptors you may select “Name”, “Abbreviation”, “Detail” or “ID” of the categorical sampling data, for quantitative descriptors you may select the “Value” or “Notes”, for text and sequence descriptors you may select the “Text” or “Notes”.   

As long as you did not enter a value for the column header, a reasonable suggestion depending on the selected values will be inserted. You may enter a different column header, then the background color changes to light yellow to indicate that it will not be updated automatically anymore (see picture below, column 3). Double-click on the header to open a separate edit window. 

Output formatting is controlled with check box “quotes” that includes the whole output text in quotes and text boxes Pre: and Post:, which allow inclusion of the values in prefix and postfix strings (default is “). By selecting the check box Skip empty a blank output will be inserted  instead of the specified prefix and postfix strings, if no value is present. If for a column multiple values may be present, e.g. in case of categorical descriptors several categorical states might be present, there is the choice of inserting additional lines for multiple values (Separate line), selecting a single value (Select) or merging the values to a single output string (Merge). For option Select you have specify if the first, second or other values shall be selected. For option Merge you may specify a separator string that shall be inserted between two values (default is ; ). To open a separate edit window for the Pre:, Post: or Merge strings, e.g. because a longer value shall be entered, double-click on the correspondent text box. 

Any selected column may be shifted to another position using the Up and Down buttons or deleted with the Remove button of the tool strip. With button you may delete all columns. The complete export schema may be saved into an XML file using the button and a dialog window will be opened. By default the schema file name is generated as:

     <resources directory>\ExportSchema\SampleDataList_<Database name>_<Project>.xml 

The XML schema file includes information concerning the database, the project, handling of withheld data and the output columns. By pressing the button in the Columns section, a schema file can be opened. If the schema does not meet the active database, especially descriptor dependent columns might be erroneous because of unknown values. This is indicated by a red background color (see picture below).   

 

Export

Before starting the export, the export file name should be checked. The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Export\SampleDataList_<Database name>_<Project>.txt. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name. If you uncheck the option Generate preview, no output preview will be generated for the export. To generate an output without BOM, release the button. 

To check the export, click on the Test export button. By changing the selected Language settings: you may adapt the output of floating point numbers or date and time fields to your needs. In the Output preview grid view the lines specified in the Export settings (Test lines [start] to [end]) will be displayed (see picture above). To generate the table file press the Start export button. During test and export the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

May 16, 2024

Export Translation List

Export translations list

With this form you can export the translations (see table Translation) from the database to a tabulator separated text file. Since the output includes the database keys, you may correct the data, e.g. by using a spreadsheet program and re-import the changes by using the importwizard. Choose Data → Export → Export lists -> Translations list … from the menu to open the window for the export.

 

In the Export project section all projects of the database are shown as a tree. Select here the project that shall be exported. In case of hierarchically organized projects the subordinated projects will be included for export, if the Include child projects option is checked.

The Withheld data section allows control over export of datasets that contain entries with data status “Data withheld”. Option Supress whole description (default) excludes all descriptions form export where at least on descriptor is marked with “Data withheld”. Option Hide withheld descriptor excludes only the corresponding descriptor data from the description. Option Export withheld data does not exclude any data from export.

The Options section allows the selection of the Entity types for output (“Description”, “Descriptor” and “Categorical state”). To include all export data in quotes, check option “quotes”. To include all data rows that do not have translations select option Show empty entities. If you select Show descriptors, the descriptor titles will be inserted for categorical states. 

You may restrict the translations list to a certain Language or to a certain data Column by selecting a value in the mentioned combo boxes. The column value “wording” will output the translations of the wording columns for descriptions, descriptors and categorical states. Additionally translations of the columns “wording_before” and “wording_after” for descriptors will be exported. 

 

Export

Before starting the export, the export file name should be checked. The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Export\TranslationsList_<Database name>_<Project>.txt. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name. To generate an output without BOM, release the button. 

To check the export, click on the Test export button. In the Output preview data grid the first few lines will be displayed (see picture above). To generate the table file press the Start export button. During test and export the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

 

Re-import

The review output includes all database keys that can be sufficiently used to identify the affected data row. When the modified data shall be re-imported, the internal keys must be available to the import wizard. This can easily be done by creating a new import session and using the option  Generate mapping … in form Import sessions.

Please be aware that table Translation has a numeric key that is not directly accessible for the import wizard. If you want to update an exsisting translation, the correct entry must be identified by the alternate key consisting of “object_id”, “language_code” and “column_id”, which correspond to the generated output table columns “Entity ID”, “Language” and “Column” (see image above). In the import wizard these three columns must therefore be marked as “key columns” (see image below).

If you generate an output for several entity types, e.g. “Descriptor” and “Categorical states” as shown in the example above, you will have to insert a filter condition in the import wizard. E.g. if you want to re-import descriptor translations, select the outptut column “Contents” for the “contents” table column and mark it as decisive column. Insert a filter to output column “State name” for equal “empty” (see image below) to ignore lines with a categorical state.

Jan 14, 2025

Matrix Export Wizard

Matrix export wizard for tab separated lists

With this form you can export the descriptor and description data from the database to a tabulator separated text file. The output includes the database keys. Furthermore you have the option to create rsp. update import mapping data and generate an matrix import schema. Therefore you may correct the data, e.g. by using a spreadsheet program and re-import the changes by using the matrix import wizard. Choose Data → Export -> Matrix wizard … from the menu to open the window for the export.

 

In the Export project section all projects of the database are shown as a tree. Select here the project that shall be exported. In case of hierarchically organized projects the subordinated projects will be included for export, if the Include child projects option is checked. You may pass a description list to the form by starting a query in mode “Edit descriptions”. Now you have the option to select single descriptions for export. In this case the Export project section shows the button  to switch to the list view (see below).

 

In the Export descriptions section you find all description titles that have been passed to the export form (see below). You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. By clicking the button you will return to the Export project view.

The Withheld data section allows control over export of datasets that contain entries with data status “Data withheld”. Option Supress whole description (default) excludes all descriptions form export where at least on descriptor is marked with “Data withheld”. Option Hide withheld descriptor excludes only the corresponding descriptor data from the description. Option Export withheld data does not exclude any data from export.

The Options section allows the selection of the Descriptor tree: and descriptor sequence number bounds (From descriptor: and to descriptor:) for restriction of output table columns.

If you select option Use sequence, the descriptor state sequence numbers will be inserted into the output table instead of the state names. These sequence numbers will be inserted into the selected import session (see below) for a later re-import of the data. If you export the descriptive data to edit them with a spreadsheet tool, e.g. Microsoft Excel, you have to identify the active categorical states by their sequence number. 

To include all exported data in quotes, check option “quotes”. Select Trim end to remove white characters (e.g. blank or word wrap) at the end of texts. By specifying the State separator: (default , ) you determine how multiple categorical state values will be concatenated in the table cells. By changing the selected Lang. settings: you may adapt the output of floating point numbers or date and time fields to your needs.

 

Import session

The section Import session: is relevant if you want to edit the description data in a separate spreadsheet programme and re-import the edited data using the Matrix Import Wizard. To select an import session cick on button Select and a window as shown below will be opened. You may either select an existing import session, which will be updated with the exported data, or create a new one.  

 

During generation of the matrix data file the relevant data for re-import will be stored in the selected import session. Additionally an xml import schema file will be generated as  <resources directory>\Export\Matrix_<Database name>_<Project>_Schema.xml. If you do not require the data for re-import, simply do not select an import session or click on button to cancel an existing selection. 

 

Export

Before starting the export, the export file name should be checked. The file name is generated as <resources directory>\Export\Matrix_<Database name>_<Project>.txt. This default setting may be changed by editing the File name or by navigating at the target location by pressing the button besides the file name. To generate an output without BOM, release the button.  

To check the export, click on the Test export button. In the Output preview data grid the first few lines will be displayed (see picture above). To generate the table file press the Start export button. During test and export the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button.

 

Jan 14, 2025

File Operations

File operations

Without any database access data files may be converted in the following directions:

Convert SDD file: Read an XML file according to the SDD schema 1.1 rev 5 and generate DELTA or EML files.

Convert DELTA file: Read DELTA text file(s) and generate SDD or EML files.

Additionally XML file check tools are available:

Check SDD file: Check if a text file is an XML file according to the SDD schema 1.1 rev 5.

Check EML file: Check if a text file is an XML file according to the EML schema 2.1.1.

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of File Operations

Check EML

Check EML file

With this form you can check if an XML file is compliant to the EML2.1.1 or EML 2.2.0 schema. Choose Data -> File operations -> Check EML file … from the menu. After opening the window shown below the schema files will be automatically loaded. You may select the schema that shall be used with combo box Schema version (see image below). Starting with DiversityDescriptions v. 4.3.5 the EML export will be done using EML 2.2.0.

 

In the window click on the button to select the file you want to check. The check results will be diplayed in the center part of the window. By clicking the reload button  you can start a new check (see image below).  

 

May 3, 2024

Check SDD

Check SDD file

With this form you can check if an XML file is compliant to the SDD 1.1rev 5 schema. Choose Data -> File operations -> Check SDD file … from the menu. After opening the window shown below the schema files will be automatically loaded.

 

In the window click on the button to select the file you want to check. The check results will be diplayed in the center part of the window. If you generated a SDD file using Diversity Descriptions with deactivated Comptible option, the check result may show warnings for elements with missing schema information. You may check the option Include specific schema extensions, then the Diversity Descriptions specific schema definitions will be included. By clicking the reload button  or selecting another file you can start a new check (see image below).  

 

May 3, 2024

Convert DELTA

Convert DELTA file to SDD or EML

With this form you can directly convert data from a file in DELTA format into an XML file according schema SDD 1.1 rev5. No connection to a database is needed for the conversion. Choose Data -> File operations -> Convert data file → DELTA to SDD … from the menu to open the window. In the window click on the button to select the file with the data you want to convert. If the Multi-file option is selected before pressing the button, a folder selection window opens to select the folder where the DELTA files are located. For muti-file processing currently the files “chars”, “items”, “specs” and “extra” are evaluated. If during analysis any problem occurs, you may click on the button to reload the file and re-initialize the window.

 

The contents of the file will be shown in the upper part of the File tree tab page. If special characters are not displayed corretly, try a different Encoding setting, e.g. “ANSI”, and reload the document using the button.

The Insert “variable” state controls the handling of the DELTA state “V” for categorical summary data. If possible, a categorical state “variable” is inserted to the descriptor data and set in the summary data, when the state “V” is present in the description data.

If the Check strings for illegal characters  option is checked, all string literals that shall be exported from database are scanned for illegal non-printable characters and matches are replaced by a double exclamation mark ("‼"). Activating this option may increase the analysis processing time.

In the file tree you may deselect entries that shall not be converted. Use that option very carefully, because if you deselect entries that are being referenced by other parts of the input tree, e.g. descriptors referenced by descriptions, the analysis step might become erronous!

If during reading of the files expressions cannot be interpreted, suspicious entries are maked with yellow background (warning) in the file tree. When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as tool tip or the tree node text itself tells the problem (see example below).  

 

 

Analysis

To analyse the data in the file click on the Analyse data button. During the analysis the program checks the dependencies between the different parts of the data and builds up an analysis tree in the lower part of the window. The analysis tree contains all data in a suitable format for the final step. During data analysis the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

In the Analysis settings section (see image below) you set the document’s Language. You man change the display and sorting of the entries in the Language combo box from “<code> - <description>” to “<description> - <code>” (and back) by clicking the button . If you need language codes that are not included in the list, click the button. For more details see Edit language codes.

The Insert “variable” state controls the handling of the DELTA state “V” for categorical summary data. If possible, a categorical state “variable” is inserted to the descriptor data and set in the summary data, when the state “V” is present in the description data.

If the Check strings for illegal characters  option is checked, all string literals that shall be exported from database are scanned for illegal non-printable characters and matches are replaced by a double exclamation mark ("‼"). Activating this option may increase the analysis processing time.

In DELTA text in angle bracket (<text>) usually denotes comments, which are by default imported into the “Details” fields of the database. In the lower parts of the Analysis settings you may adjust a different handling for description, descriptor and categorical state items. 

  • For DELTA comments in descriptions you may Move comments to details (default) or Keep comments in description titles.
  • For DELTA comments in descriptors you may Move comments to details (default), Move comments to notes or Keep comments in descriptor titles
  • For DELTA comments in categorical states you may Move comments to details (default) or Keep comments in categorical state titles.

After changing one of these settings click on the Analyse data button to make the changes effective.

After analysis a message window informs you if any warnings or errors occured. You can find detailled error and warning information at the file and/or analysis trees by entries with red text (error) or yellow background (warning). When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as bubble help or the tree node text itself tells the problem (see example below). By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an analysis protocol (see below, right). 

 

If an analysis error occured, you are not able to proceed. You will first have to correct the problem, e.g. by excluding the erronous descriptor in the example above (after reloading the file). If a warning occured, it might not cause further problems, but you should take a closer look if the converted data will be correct.

 

Write data

Pressing the Generate file button in the Write SDD group box opens a window to select the target XML file. By default the target file has the same name as the DELTA file, followed by the extension “.xml”. The Comptible option controls generation of files with most possible compatibility to the SDD standard. On the other hand some data might not be present in the generated file, if this option is activated.

As an additional option you may generate file according the EMLschema, which consists of a data table (tabulator separated text file) and an XML file that contains the metadata including column descriptions. Click on the Generate file button in the Write EML group box. The generated file names will have the endings "_EML_DataTable.txt" and "_EML_Metadata.xml".

Pressing the drop down button EML settings in the Write EML group box opens the EML writer options. You can chose to include a special sign for empty column values or set the columns values in quotes (see left image below). Furthermore you may shose the column separator (tab stop rsp. comma) an decide if multiple categorical states shall be inserted as separate data columns. If you already generated EML files, the used settings will be automatically saved and you may restore them using the option Load last write settings. Finally click button EML settings to close the option panel. 

 

 

Handling of special DELTA states

In the DELTA format the special states “-” (not applicable), “U” (unknown) and “V” (variable) are available for categorical and quantitative characters. These states are treated in the folloging manner during import:

  • -” (not applicable)
    The data status “Not applicable” is set.
  • U” (unknown)
    The data status “Data unavailable” is set.
  • V” (variable)
    The data status “Not interpreterable” is set.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Convert SDD

Convert SDD file to DELTA or EML

With this form you can directly convert data from a file in XML file according schema SDD 1.1 rev5 into a DELTA file. No connection to a database is needed for the conversion. Choose Data → File operations -> Convert data file → SDD to DELTA … from the menu to open the window. In the window click on the button to select the file with the data you want to convert. If during analysis any problem occurs, you may click on the button to reload the file and re-initialize the window.

 

The contents of the file will be shown in the upper part of the File tree tab page. In the Analysis settings part you find the documents’ default language. If additional laguages are contained in the document, you may select one of them as the new language of the DELTA file. By checking Import translations you select all additional document languages for the analysis step. This option is automatically pre-selected if more than one language has been found in the file. In the bottom part of the window you find the actual processing state.

In the file tree you may deselect entries that shall not be imported into the database. Use that option very carefully, because if you deselect entries that are being referenced by other parts of the input tree, e.g. descriptors referenced by descriptions, the analysis step might become erronous!

 

Analysis

To analyse the data in the file click on the Analyse data button. During the analysis the program checks the dependencies between the different parts of the data and builds up an analysis tree in the lower part of the window. The analysis tree contains all data in a suitable format for the final step. During data analysis the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

 

After analysis a message window informs you if any warnings or errors occured. You can find detailled error and warning information at the file and/or analysis trees by entries with red text (error) or yellow background (warning). When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as tool tip or the tree node text itself tells the problem (see examples below). By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an analysis protocol (see below, right). 

  

If an analysis error occured, you are not able to proceed. You will first have to correct the problem, e.g. by excluding the erronous descriptor in the example above (after reloading the file). If a warning occured, it might not cause further problems, but you should take a closer look if the converted data will be correct.

 

Write data

Pressing the Generate file button in the Write Delta group box opens a window to select the target delta file. By default the target file has the same name as the SDD file, followed by the extension “.dat”. The Comptible option controls generation of files with most possible compatibility to the DELTA standard. On the other hand some data might not be present in the generated file, if this option is activated.

As an additional option you may generate file according the EMLschema, which consists of a data table (tabulator separated text file) and an XML file that contains the metadata including column descriptions. Click on the Generate file button in the Write EML group box. The generated file names will have the endings "_EML_DataTable.txt" and "_EML_Metadata.xml".

Pressing the drop down button DELTA settings in the Write DELTA group box opens the DELTA writer options. You can chose to include some detail text and notes in the DELTA output (see left image below). For descriptions, descriptors or categorical states the details will be appended as DELTA comments (included in angle brackets “< … >”) to the respective titles. The notes will be appended as DELTA comments of the corresponding summary data. If you already generated DELTA files, the used settings will be automatically saved and you may restore them using the option Load last write settings. Finally click button DELTA settings to close the option panel. 

Pressing the drop down button EML settings in the Write EML group box opens the EML writer options. You can chose to include a special sign for empty column values or set the columns values in quotes (see right image above). Furthermore you may shose the column separator (tab stop rsp. comma) an decide if multiple categorical states shall be inserted as separate data columns. If you already generated EML files, the used settings will be automatically saved and you may restore them using the option Load last write settings. Finally click button EML settings to close the option panel. 

 

Handling of special sequence data

While SDD can handle molecular sequence data, for DELTA export these data will be exported as text data. To preserve the sequence specific descriptor data, they will be inserted into the text character as a special comment with the format, e.g. “#6. Sequence descriptor <[SequenceCharacter][ST:N][SL:1][GS:-][/SequenceCharacter]>/”.

If the analysis tree includes sample data, they will be included as items at the end of the DELTA file. The naming of those spetial items will be <description name> - <event name> - Unit <number>. Sampling event data will not be included in the DELTA file.

May 16, 2024

Import

Import

There are several import mechanisms:

Matrix wizard: Import descriptors, descriptions and sample data from tabulator separated text file(s) organized as a matrix.

Import wizard: Import descriptive data from tabulator separated text file(s).

SDD import: Import descriptive data from an XML file according to the SDD schema 1.1 rev 5.

DELTA import: Import descriptive data from DELTA text file(s).

Import questionaires: Import revised data received from HTML forms.

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Import

Matrix Wizard

Matrix import wizard for tab separated lists

The table oriented import wizard works fine if you have separate lists for descriptor and description data. Usually this type of tables is generated by an export of data from a database. A typical example for that cases is described in the import wizardtutorial. If no dedicated application for collecting description data is available, most commonly a spreadsheet program like MS Excel or Open Office Calc is used to collect the description data. Typically the table columns represent a single character (=descriptor) and the table rows represent the items (=description or sample data). Importing data from such a “matrix” into Diversity Descriptions with the table oriented import wizard usually requires a lot of manual adaptions. Therefore the specialized “Matrix Wizard” was designed to import the most important descriptor and description data in a single import step. 

As usual you should create a new project and install a descriptor tree to collect the dedicated descriptors. Then choose Data → Import → Import wizard → Matrix wizard … from the menu. As know from the import wizard, a window to create or select a import session will be shown.

 

After selecting or creating an import session a window as shown below will open that will lead you through the import of the data. 

With the selection box Target: you may select which data shall be imported: 

Remark: Example files and XML schemas to import summary or sample data using the matrix wizard are provided in the tutorialfiles or may be downloaded from the Diversity Descriptions example file repository. Find the example data in folders “Biomass as description” and “Biomass as sample” 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Matrix Wizard

Matrix Wizard Description

Matrix import wizard for description data

After selecting Target: Description a window as shown below will be displayed. The window is separated in three areas. On the left side you see the descriptor settings for the actual file column (presently not visible). On the right side you see the list of available import steps. In the middle part the details of the selected import steps are shown.

 

Choosing the File

As a first step, choose the File from where the data should be imported. The currently supported format is tab-separated text. Then choose the Encoding of the file, e.g. Unicode.  The Header lines specifies the number of header lines, usually at least the first line which typically contains the descriptor names (see image below). The Start line and End line will automatically be set according to your data. You may change these to restrict the data lines, i.e. the descriptions/items that shall be imported. The not imported parts in the file are indicated with a gray background. If your data contains e.g. date information or floating point values where notations differ between countries (e.g. 3.14 - 3,13), choose the Language / Country to ensure a correct interpretation of your data. Finally you can select a prepared Schema (see sections Testing and Import below) for the import.

 

Choosing the descriptor types

In the first line of the file section the descriptor type of the file columns are displayed. The value Ignore indicates that the column shall not be imported. To adjust the descriptor type, select a cell in the file column and chose a Descriptor type in the left section of the panel (see image below). Available descriptor types are Categorical, Quantitative, Text and Sequence.

For categorical descriptors you may specify State splitters, if one item has more than one categorical state. To add a splitter click on the button, to remove it use the button. By clicking the Test states button you get a list of categorical states found in the file between start line and end line and the number of occurrences (field Count, see image above). With this function you may test the effect of the state splitters.

For quantitative descriptors you have to specify the Statistical measure that shall be used for the imported values. By clicking the Test values button you get a list of values in the file between start line and the line number in the file (see image above).

If a value cannot be interpreted as a number, it is marked with a light red background colour. You may edit the erroneous values in the test result panel (see below).

For text and sequence descriptors no additional adjustments are possible. As long as no descriptor columns have been defined, a reminder is visible on top of the left section:

  • Please select a descriptor type   = At least for one file column a descriptor type is needed.

In our example column 1 (date) will be adjusted as text descriptor and columns 2 (functional group) and 3 (sublocation) as categorical descriptors.

 

Table data

To set the source for the data columns, select the step of a table listed underneath the File step. Be aware that for the Descriptor table not the file columns will be selected but the file rows in the header lines. In the image below you see an example of the descriptor data columns, where the values for id and label are taken from the first line in the file. Additionally the descriptors will be assigned to the descriptor tree “Descriptor tree for matrix”.  

Remark: Although descriptortree_id is a numeric value in the database, the externally visible descriptor tree name is expected here. Since this name is unambigious, the corresponding id will be determined during import.

The option Address index allows the selection of the column number (for descriptor) rsp. the line number (for description) as value. See below an example for the Description table data columns. For id the line number has been selected to get an unambigious address value. The label has been composed of the line number, three data columns and some fixed text parts. Finally all description data are assigned to the project “Matrix text”.

Remark: Although project_id is a numeric value in the database, the externally visible project name is expected here. Since this name is unambigious, the corresponding id will be determined during import.

A reminder in the header line will show you what actions are still needed to import the data into the table:

  • Please select at least one decisive column   = If data will be imported depends on the content of decisive colums, so at least one must be selected.
  • Please select the position in the file   = The position in the file must be given if the data for a column should be taken from the file.
  • From file or For all   = For every you have to decide whether the data are taken from the file or a value is entered for all
  • Please select a value from the list   = You have to select a value from the provided list

The handling of the columns is almost the same as described in the chapter columns of the table oriented import wizard.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can navigate to a certain data cell by using the Column: and Line: controls. As an alternative select the data cell ent click on button . Finally click on the Test data button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window as shown below. In the window below you can see the following test actions:

  1. Insert of a quantitative descriptor “biomass”
  2. Insert of a descriptor tree node (assignemnt to tree “Matrix test tree”)
  3. Insert of a recommended statistical measure (measure “Mean”) for the descriptor tree node
  4. Insert of description “Biomass 3 [CSP01 woody NW_c]” for project “Matrix test”
  5. Insert of a statistical measure for “Mean” with value 28.2020000…

You may save the schema file by a click on button Save schema. If you click on button Generate flat files according to your adjustments data and matching schema files for the table oriented import wizards will be generated. This option may be used, if you want to import additional data, e.g. a descriptor’s measurement unit, that are not supported by the matrix wizard. Since all mapping relevant data are stored in the selected import session, you may import the basic descriptor and description data using the matrix wizard and append additional data with the table oriented import wizards. In this case the generated flat data and schema files might be useful to have a defined starting point.    

 

Import

With the last step you can finally start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings (see below).

Schedule for matrix import of tab-separated text files into DiversityDescriptions
Target within DiversityDescriptions: Description
Schedule version: 1 Database version: 03.00.17
Lines: 2 - 757 Header lines: 1
Encoding: ANSI Language: US

Tables

Descriptor (Descriptor)
Merge handling: Merge

Column in table ? Copy Pre Post File pos. Value Source
id ? 1 File
label 1 File
descriptortree_id Descriptor tree for matrix Interface

Description (Description)
Merge handling: Merge

Column in table ? Copy Pre Post File pos. Value Source
id ? Index
label Biomass Index
+ [ 0 File
+ 2 File
+ ] 3 File
project_id Matrix test Interface

Descriptor columns

File pos.

Descriptor type

Additional data

0

Categorical

Splitters

1

Text

2

Categorical

Splitters

3

Categorical

Splitters

4

Quantitative

Statistical measure
Mean (= average)

File cells that could not be imported will be marked with a red background while imported lines are marked green. If you want to save lines that produce errors during the import in a separate file, use the Save failed lines option. The protocol of the import will contain all settings acording to the used schema and an overview containing the number of inserted, updated, unchanged and failed lines (see below).

Protocol

Responsible: Link (DB-User: Workshop)
Date: Donnerstag, 20. April 2017, 15:53:24
Server: training.diversityworkbench.de
Database: DiversityDescriptions_Workshop
Descriptor columns total: 5
Descriptors imported: 5
Import lines total: 756
Descriptions imported: 756
Cells imported: 3780
Jan 14, 2025

Matrix Wizard Sample

Matrix import wizard for sample data

After selecting Target: Sampling event a window as shown below will be displayed. The window is separated in 3 areas. On the left side you see the descriptor settings for the actual file column (presently not visible). On the right side you see the list of available import steps. In the middle part the details of the selected import steps are shown.

 

Choosing the File

As a first step, choose the File from where the data should be imported. The currently supported format is tab-separated text. Then choose the Encoding of the file, e.g. Unicode.  The Header lines specifies the number of header lines, usually at least the first line which typically contains the descriptor names (see image below). The Start line and End line will automatically be set according to your data. You may change these to restrict the data lines, i.e. the descriptions/items that shall be imported. The not imported parts in the file are indicated with a gray background. If your data contains e.g. date information or floating point values where notations differ between countries (e.g. 3.14 - 3,13), choose the Language / Country to ensure a correct interpretation of your data. Finally you can select a prepared Schema (see sections Testing and Import below) for the import.

 

Choosing the descriptor types

Choosing of the descriptor types is done in exactly the same way as described in section Matrix wizard for descriptiondata.

 

Table data

To set the source for the data columns, select the step of a table listed underneath the File step. Be aware that for the Descriptor table not the file columns will be selected but the file rows in the header lines. In the image below you see an example of the descriptor data columns, where the values for id and label are taken from the first line in the file. Additionally the descriptors will be assigned to the descriptor tree “Descriptor tree for matrix”.  

Remark: Although descriptortree_id is a numeric value in the database, the externally visible descriptor tree name is expected here. Since this name is unambigious, the corresponding id will be determined during import.

The option Address index allows the selection of the column number (for descriptor) rsp. the line number (for description or sampling event) as value. See below an example for the Description table data columns. For id and label the For all:  alue “++ New description ++” was selected to create a single description entry where all sample data are attached. Finally the description is assigned to the project “Matrix text sample”.

Remark: Although project_id is a numeric value in the database, the externally visible project name is expected here. Since this name is unambigious, the corresponding id will be determined during import.

Finally the source for the Sampling event table data columns must be selected. For id and label the file column 0 has been selected (see image below).

A reminder in the header line will show you what actions are still needed to import the data into the table:

  • Please select at least one decisive column   = If data will be imported depends on the content of decisive colums, so at least one must be selected.
  • Please select the position in the file   = The position in the file must be given if the data for a column should be taken from the file.
  • From file or For all   = For every you have to decide whether the data are taken from the file or a value is entered for all
  • Please select a value from the list   = You have to select a value from the provided list

The handling of the columns is almost the same as described in the chapter columns of the table oriented import wizard.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can navigate to a certain data cell by using the Column: and Line: controls. As an alternative select the data cell ent click on button . Finally click on the Test data button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window as shown below. In the window below you can see the following test actions:

  1. Insert of a quantitative descriptor “Channel 2 VLT Us1G”
  2. Insert of a descriptor tree node (assignemnt to tree “Tree for matrix test sample”)
  3. Insert of a recommended statistical measure (measure “Mean”) for the descriptor tree node
  4. Insert of description “++ New description ++” for project “Matrix test sample”
  5. Insert of a sampling event “30.01.2014 22:00” for description “++ New description ++”
  6. Insert of a sampling unit with id 199 for sampling event “30.01.2014 22:00”
  7. Insert of a quantitative value -22.72 to sampling unit 199

You may save the schema file by a click on button Save schema. If you click on button Generate flat files according to your adjustments data and matching schema files for the table oriented import wizards will be generated. This option may be used, if you want to import additional data, e.g. a descriptor’s measurement unit, that are not supported by the matrix wizard. Since all mapping relevant data are stored in the selected import session, you may import the basic descriptor and description data using the matrix wizard and append additional data with the table oriented import wizards. In this case the generated flat data and schema files might be useful to have a defined starting point.    

 

Import

With the last step you can finally start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings (see below).

Schedule for matrix import of tab-separated text files into DiversityDescriptions
Target within DiversityDescriptions: SamplingEvent
Schedule version: 1 Database version: 03.00.17
Lines: 5 - 151 Header lines: 4
Encoding: ANSI Language: US

Tables

Descriptor (Descriptor)
Merge handling: Merge

Column in table ? Copy Pre Post File pos. Value Source
id ? 1 File
label Channel 1 File
+ 2 File
+ 3 File
descriptortree_id Tree for matrix test sample Interface

Description (Description)
Merge handling: Merge

Column in table ? Copy Pre Post File pos. Value Source
id ? ++ New description ++ Interface
label ++ New description ++ Interface
project_id Matrix test sample Interface

SamplingEvent (SamplingEvent)
Merge handling: Merge

Column in table ? Copy Pre Post File pos. Value Source
id ? 0 File
label 0 File

Descriptor columns

File pos. Descriptor type Additional data
2 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
3 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
4 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
5 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
6 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
7 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
8 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
9 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
10 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
11 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
12 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
13 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
14 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
15 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
16 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
17 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
18 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
19 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
20 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
21 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
22 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
23 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
24 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
25 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
26 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
27 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
28 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
29 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
30 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
31 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
32 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
33 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
34 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
35 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
36 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
37 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
38 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
39 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
40 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
41 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
42 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
43 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
44 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)
45 Quantitative
Statistical measure
Mean (= average)

File cells that could not be imported will be marked with a red background while imported lines are marked green. If you want to save lines that produce errors during the import in a separate file, use the Save failed lines option. The protocol of the import will contain all settings acording to the used schema and an overview containing the number of inserted, updated, unchanged and failed lines (see below).

Protocol

Responsible: Link (DB-User: Workshop)
Date: Donnerstag, 20. April 2017, 16:17:42
Server: training.diversityworkbench.de
Database: DiversityDescriptions_Workshop
Descriptor columns total: 44
Descriptors imported: 44
Import lines total: 147
Descriptions imported: 1
Samples imported: 147
Cells imported: 6348
Cells failed: 120
Jan 14, 2025

Wizard

Import wizard for tab separated lists

With this import routines, you can import data from text files (as tab-separated lists) into the database. For a comprehensive real-life example that shows many features of the import wizard take a look at the import wizard tutorial

Choose Data → Import -> Import wizard and then the type of data that should be imported, e.g. Import descriptors … from the menu. If you did not use the import wizard before, the following window is shown to create a new import session.

 

In section Session project the projects with write access are listed for selection. In section Session description you should enter a detailled text description. If already an import session is present in the database, the window below will be shown where you may select the session. You may select one of the offered sessions or create a new one by selecting Create new import session

After selecting or creating an import session a window as shown below will open that will lead you through the import of the data. The window is separated in 3 areas. On the left side you see a list of possible data related import steps according to the type of data you choosed for the import. On the right side you see the list of currently selected import steps. In the middle part the details of the selected import steps are shown.

 

Choosing the File

As a first step, choose the File from where the data should be imported. The currently supported format is tab-separated text. Then choose the Encoding of the file, e.g. Unicode. The Start line and End line will automatically be set according to your data. You may change these to restrict the data lines that should be imported. The not imported parts in the file are indicated as shown below with a gray background. If the First line contains the column definition this line will not be imported as well. If your data contains e.g. date information or floating point values, where notations differ between countries (e.g. 3.14 - 3,14), choose the Language / Country to ensure a correct interpretation of your data. Finally you can select a prepared Schema (see chapter Schema below) for the import.

 

Choosing the data ranges

In the selection list on the left side of the window (see below) all possible import steps for the data are listed according to the type of data you want to import.

Certain tables can be imported in parallel. To add parallels click on the button (see below). To remove parallels, use the button. Only selected ranges will appear in the list of the steps on the right (see below).

To import information of logging columns like who created and changed the data, click on button in the header line. This will include an additional substeps for every step containing the logging columns (see below). If you do not import these data, they will be automatically filled by default values like the current time and user.

 

Attaching data

You can either import your data as new data or Attach them to data in the database. Select the import step Attachment from the list. All tables that are selected and contain columns at which you can attach data are listed (see below). Either choose the first option Import as new data or one of the columns the attachment columns offered like “id” in the table “Descriptor” in the example below.

If you select a column for attachment, this column will be marked with a blue backgroud (see below and chapter Table data).

 

Merging data

You can either import your data as new data or Merge them wih data in the database. Select the import step Merge from the list. For every table you can choose between Insert, Merge, Update and Attach (see below).

The Insert option will import the data from the file independent of existing data in the database.

The Merge option will compare the data from the file with those in the database according to the Key columns (see below). If no matching data are found in the database, the data from the file will be imported, otherwise the data will be updated..

The Update option will compare the data from the file with those in the database according to the Key columns. Only matching data found in the database will be updated.

The Attach option will compare the data from the file with those in the database according to the Key columns. The found data will not be changed, but used as a reference data in depending tables. 

 

Table data

To set the source for the columns in the file, select the step of a table listed underneath the Merge step. Some columns may be grouped below the table name as shown for the Descriptor table. 

Click on one of the subordinated column groups and in the central part of the window the data columns avaialble for importing will be listed in the central part of the window. In the example shown below the column is used to attach the new data to data in the database.

All columns that have not been grouped beneath the table may be accessed by selecting the table ste itself. In the example shown below table Descriptor was selected to supply the “data_entry_note” column for import.

A reminder in the header line will show you what actions are still needed to import the data into the table:

  • Please select at least one column   = No column has been selected so far.
  • Please select at least one decisive column   = If data will be imported depends on the content of decisive colums, so at least one must be selected.
  • Please select the position in the file   = The position in the file must be given if the data for a column should be taken from the file.
  • Please select at least one column for comparision   = For all merge types other than insert columns for comparision with data in the database are needed.
  • From file or For all   = For every you have to decide whether the data are taken from the file or a value is entered for all
  • Please select a value from the list   = You have to select a value from the provided list
  • Please enter a value   = You have to enter a value used for all datasets

The handling of the columns in described in the chapter columns.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can use a certain line in the file for you test and than click on the Test data in line: button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window as shown below.

If finally all requirements are met, the testing function will try to write the data into the database and display you any errors that occurred as shown below. All datasets marked with a red backgroud, produced some error.  

To see the list of all errors, double click in the error list window in the header line (see below).

If finally no errors are left, your data are ready for import. The colors in the table nodes in the tree indicate the handling of the datasets: INSERT, MERGE, UPDATE, No difference. Attach, No data. The colors of the table colums indicate whether a colums is decisive , a key column or an attachment column.  

If you suspect, that the import file contains data allready present in the database, you may test this an extract only the missing lines in a new file. Choose the attachment column (see chapter Attaching data) and click on the button Check for allready present data. The data allready present in the database will be marked red (see below). Click on the button Save missing data a text file to store the data not present in the database in a new file for the import. 

If you happen to get a file with a content as shown below, you may have seleted the wrong encoding or the encoding is incompatible. Please try to save the original file as UTF8 and select this encoding for the import. 

 

Import

With the last step you can finally start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings (see below).

Schedule for import of tab-separated text files into DiversityCollection
Target within DiversityCollection: Specimen
Schedule version: 1 Database version: 02.05.41
Lines: 2 - 3215 First line contains column definition: ?
Encoding: Unicode Language: de

Tables

CollectionSpecimen (CollectionSpecimen)
Parent: CollectionEvent
Merge handling: Insert

Column in table ? Key Copy Pre Post File pos. Transformations Value Source Table
CollectionSpecimenID Database
AccessionNumber ? ? 0 File

IdentificationUnit_1 (IdentificationUnit)
Parent: CollectionSpecimen
Merge handling: Merge

Column in table ? Key Copy Pre Post File pos. Transformations Value Source Table
CollectionSpecimenID Database
IdentificationUnitID Database
LastIdentificationCache ? 2 File
+ 3 File
+ 4 File
+ 5 File
TaxonomicGroup ? fish Interface

IdentificationUnitAnalysis_1_1 (IdentificationUnitAnalysis)
Parent: IdentificationUnit_1
Merge handling: Update

Column in table ? Key Copy Pre Post File pos. Transformations Value Source Table
CollectionSpecimenID Database
IdentificationUnitID Database
AnalysisID 94 Interface
AnalysisNumber 1 Interface
AnalysisResult ? ? 39 File

 Lines that could not be imported will be marked with a red background while imported lines are marked green (see below).

If you want to save lines that produce errors during the import in a separate file, use the Save failed lines option. The protocol of the import will contain all settings acording to the used schema and an overview containing the number of inserted, updated, unchanged and failed lines (see below).

 

Description

A description of the schema may be included in the schema itself or with a click on the button generated as a separate file. This file will be located in a separate directory Description to avoid confusion with import schemas. An example for a description file is shown below, containing common settings, the treatment of the file columns and interface settings as defined in the schema.

Schedule for import of tab-separated text files into DiversityCollection
Target within DiversityCollection: Specimen
Schedule version: 1 Database version: 02.05.52
Lines: 2 - 5 First line contains column definition: ?
Encoding: Unicode Language: de
Description: Import Schema fuer Literaturdaten (Bayernflora) aus Dörr & Lippert mit MTB Daten und max. 4 Sammlern

File columns

Merge handling of table Column usage
Insert Merge Update Attach Decisive Key
Pos. Name Table Column Example Transformed
0 ID
CollectionSpecimen. ExternalIdentifier 1
1 originalname
Identification_1_2. TaxonomicName Ophioglossum vulgatum
2 nameautor
Identification_1_1. TaxonomicName Ophioglossum vulgatum L.
3 taxnr
Identification_1_1. NameURI 3949
Prefix: http://tnt.diversityworkbench.de/TaxonNames_Plants/
4 mtb
CollectionEventLocalisation_6. Location1 8423
5 qu
CollectionEventLocalisation_6. Location2 2
6 unschärfe
CollectionEventLocalisation_6. LocationAccuracy
7 jahr_von
CollectionEvent. CollectionYear 1902
8 jahr_bis
CollectionEvent. CollectionDateSupplement
Prefix: bis?
9 status
IdentificationUnitAnalysis_1_1. AnalysisResult
10 verwaltungseinheit not imported
11 fundort not imported
12 finder not imported
13 ID_collector1
CollectionAgent_1. CollectorsAgentURI 43708
Prefix: http://snsb.diversityworkbench.de/Agents_BayernFlora/
14 ID_collector2
CollectionAgent_2. CollectorsAgentURI
Prefix: http://snsb.diversityworkbench.de/Agents_BayernFlora/
15 ID_collector3
CollectionAgent_3. CollectorsAgentURI
Prefix: http://snsb.diversityworkbench.de/Agents_BayernFlora/
16 ID_collector4
CollectionAgent_4. CollectorsAgentURI
Prefix: http://snsb.diversityworkbench.de/Agents_BayernFlora/
17 primärquelle not imported
18 ID_primärquelle
Annotation_1. ReferenceURI
Prefix: http://id.snsb.info/references/
19 primärquelle_seiten not imported
20 bestand
IdentificationUnitAnalysis_1_2. AnalysisResult
21 sonstiges
CollectionSpecimen. OriginalNotes
22 höhe
CollectionEventLocalisation_7. Location1
23 herbar1 not imported
24 herbar2 not imported
25 herbar3 not imported
26 ID_herbar1
CollectionSpecimenRelation_1. RelatedSpecimenCollectionID
27 ID_herbar2 not imported
28 ID_herbar3 not imported
29 det not imported
30 ID_det not imported
31 rev not imported
32 ID_rev not imported
33 datenquelle not imported
34 ID_datenquelle
CollectionSpecimen. ReferenceURI 135
Prefix: http://id.snsb.info/references/
35 project1 not imported
36 project2
CollectionSpecimen. AdditionalNotes O Beobachtung
Transformations:
Reglar express.:
O ? Beobachtung
Reglar express.:
H ? Herbarauswertung
Reglar express.:
L ? Literaturauswertung

Interface settings

Table Table alias Column Value
Annotation Annotation_1 AnnotationType Reference
Annotation_1 Annotation Literaturauswertung: nach Dörr & Lippert (2004)
Annotation_1 ReferenceDisplayText Annotation
CollectionAgent CollectionAgent_1 CollectorsName Collector1
CollectionAgent_2 CollectorsName Collector2
CollectionAgent_3 CollectorsName Collector3
CollectionAgent_4 CollectorsName Collector4
CollectionEvent CountryCache Germany
CollectionProject CollectionProject_1 ProjectID 37
CollectionProject_2 ProjectID 149
CollectionSpecimen ReferenceTitle Reference
CollectionSpecimenRelation CollectionSpecimenRelation_1 RelatedSpecimenURI
CollectionSpecimenRelation_1 RelatedSpecimenDisplayText
CollectionSpecimenRelation_1 Notes Herbarauswertung: nach Dörr & Lippert (2004)
Identification Identification_1_1 IdentificationSequence 2
Identification_1_2 IdentificationSequence 1
Identification_1_2 Notes Originalname aus Dörr & Lippert (2004)
IdentificationUnit IdentificationUnit_1 LastIdentificationCache plant
IdentificationUnit_1 TaxonomicGroup plant
IdentificationUnitAnalysis IdentificationUnitAnalysis_1_1 AnalysisID 2
IdentificationUnitAnalysis_1_1 AnalysisNumber 1
IdentificationUnitAnalysis_1_2 AnalysisID 4
IdentificationUnitAnalysis_1_2 AnalysisNumber 2

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Wizard

Import DELTA

Import DELTA file

Remark:

  • To import data from a DELTA file at least TerminologyEditor rights are neccessary.

With this form you can import data from a file in DELTA format into the database. Choose Data → Import -> Import DELTA … from the menu to open the window for the import. In the window click on the button to select the file with the data you want to import. If the Multi-file option is selected before pressing the button, a folder selection window opens to select the folder where the DELTA files are located. For muti-file processing currently the files “chars”, “items”, “specs” and “extra” are evaluated. If during analysis or import any problems occur, you may click on the button to reload the file and re-initialize the window.

 

The contents of the file will be shown in the upper part of the File tree section. If special characters are not displayed corretly, try a different Encoding setting, e.g. “ANSI”, and reload the document using the button. In the bottom part of the window you find the import database and the actual processing state.

In the file tree you may deselect entries that shall not be imported into the database. Use that option very carefully, because if you deselect entries that are being referenced by other parts of the input tree, e.g. descriptors referenced by descriptions, the analysis or import step might become erronous!

If during reading of the files expressions cannot be interpreted, suspicious entries are maked with yellow background (warning) in the file tree. When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as tool tip or the tree node text itself tells the problem (see example below).  

 

 

Analysis

To analyse the data in the file click on the Analyse data button. During the analysis the program checks the dependencies between the different parts of the data and builds up an analysis tree in the lower part of the window. The analysis tree contains all data in a suitable format for the final import step. During data analysis the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

In the Analysis settings section (see image below) you set the document’s Language. You man change the display and sorting of the entries in the Language combo box from “<code> - <description>” to “<description> - <code>” (and back) by clicking the button . If you need language codes that are not included in the list, click the button. For more details see Edit language codes.

The Insert “variable” state controls the handling of the DELTA state “V” for categorical summary data. If possible, a categorical state “variable” is inserted to the descriptor data and set in the summary data, when the state “V” is present in the description data.

If the Check strings for illegal characters  option is checked, all string literals that shall be exported from database are scanned for illegal non-printable characters and matches are replaced by a double exclamation mark ("‼"). Activating this option may increase the analysis processing time.

In DELTA text in angle bracket (<text>) usually denotes comments, which are by default imported into the “Details” fields of the database. In the lower parts of the Analysis settings you may adjust a different handling for description, descriptor and categorical state items. 

  • For DELTA comments in descriptions you may Move comments to details (default) or Keep comments in description titles.
  • For DELTA comments in descriptors you may Move comments to details (default), Move comments to notes or Keep comments in descriptor titles
  • For DELTA comments in categorical states you may Move comments to details (default) or Keep comments in categorical state titles.

After changing one of these settings click on the Analyse data button to make the changes effective.

 

After analysis a message window informs you if any warnings or errors occured. You can find detailled error and warning information at the file and/or analysis trees by entries with red text (error) or yellow background (warning). When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as bubble help or the tree node text itself tells the problem (see example below). By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an analysis protocol (see below, right). 

 

If an analysis error occured, you are not able to proceed. You will first have to correct the problem, e.g. by excluding the erronous descriptor in the example above (after reloading the file). If a warning occured, it might not cause problems during import, but you should take a closer look if the imported data will be correct.

 

Import

If you want to import new data to a project you have two import options:

  • New import - import new data and save mapping information to an import session.
    For descriptors, categorical states and descriptions the mapping information from the DELTA import will be storen in an import session. Therefore by a subsequent import run updated information, e.g. a modified label or detail information can be done (see section “Update” below).
  • No update - import new data without saving of mapping information.
    This option might be faster, but you will not be able to update the titles or to import additional translations from a DELTA file.

Before starting the import, you should take a look at the import settings:

  • New project - import data to a new project.
    The project name is specified in the text box right from this radio button.
    This option is only available if at least ProjectManager rights are available.
  • To project - import data to an existing project.
    The combo box at the right shows all projects where write access is possible.
    If only TerminologyEditor rights are availabe, no changes in the existing project (e.g. detail or copyright) will be done.
  • Accept comma as decimal separator shall help to overcome problems with localization of some programs that create DELTA files.
    If this option is checked, a floating point value like “1,0” (e.g. used in german localizations) instead of “1.0” will be accepted as “1”.
  • Create default descriptor tree creates a default descriptor tree and assigns all imported descriptors to that tree.
    Additionally the statistical measures “Minimum”, “Lower limit”, “Mean”, “Upper limit” and “Maximum” are set as recommended for all quantitative descriptors.
    This option is useful to avoid unassigned descriptors if the import file does not specify any descriptor tree assignments.

To start the import click on the Start import button. Now the data from the analysis tree are written into a local database cache and finally stored into the database.

 

After import a message window inform you if any warnings or errors occured. You can find detailled error and warning information at the file and/or analysis trees by entries with red text (error) or yellow background (warning). When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as bubble help or the tree node text itself tells the problem. By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an import protocol (see below). 

 

 

Handling of special DELTA states

In the DELTA format the special states “-” (not applicable), “U” (unknown) and “V” (variable) are available for categorical and quantitative characters. These states are treated in the folloging manner during import:

  • -” (not applicable)
    The data status “Not applicable” is set.
  • U” (unknown)
    The data status “Data unavailable” is set.
  • V” (variable)
    The data status “Not interpreterable” is set.

 

Update

If you imported new data using option New import, a new import session with the following data will be created:

  • Descriptor keys - the “character number” that is used in DELTA to identify a dedicated character.
  • Categorical state keys - the “state number” that is used in DELTA, together with the “character number”, to identify a dedicated chategorical state.
  • Description keys - the item position in the item list. Since in DELTA there are no explicit item numbers, the position within the item list is taken for this key. If you want to update the items using the DELTA import, you must be sure that the item list has exactly the same sequence as for the first import!

For those entities you may update the columns “label”, “detail” and “data_entry_notes” (only for descriptors). To achive this, you must specify the same Language in the Analysis settings as adjusted as project language. If you specify a different Default language, the data will be imported as translations for the columns “label” rsp. “detail” (see image below). For descriptor column “data_entry_notes” translations are not supported.

 

Preparation

By changing the Analysis settings and a clicking the Analyse data button you may modify the handling of DELTA comments. E.g. if you used the default settings during a past import, a DELTA character “data record <type>” was imported as descriptor “data record” and “type” was written into the columns “detail”. In the Analysis settings you may now select option Keep comments in descriptor titles to update the descriptor title to “data record <type>". 

 

Import settings

Before starting the import, you should take a look at the import options:

  • Update - perform an update import.
  • Import session - click on button  Select to select the correct import session.
    In the text box below that option the automatically generated descriptive text of the import session is displayed.
  • Remove optional columns - clear optional columns if no contents is present.
    If during update import for an optional column (“detail” rsp. “data_entry_note”) no data are present, by default an existing entry in the database will not be removed. Check this option to clear the data.

Start the import click on the Start import button. Now the data from the analysis tree are written into a local database cache and finally stored into the database.

 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Import Questionnaires

Import questionnaire data

With this form you can import response data generated by an HTML questionnaire (see Export questionnaires). Choose Data → Import -> Import questionnaire data … from the menu to open the window for the import. In the window click on the button to select the text file with the data you want to import. If during analysis or import any problem occurs, you may click on the button to reload the file and re-initialize the window.

 

The contents of the file will be shown in the upper part of the Import contents section. You may edit the contents or even enter the whole data by copy - paste. In the Import data part you find the basic dataset parameters Export server, Export database, Import project and Import description (see image below). If there is a mismatch, e.g. because the questionnaire was generated from a different database than your import database, an appropriate error will be reported.

 

Analysis

To analyse the data in the file click on the Analyse data button. During the analysis the program compares the reported data to the entries in the database and presents the planned database operations in the lower part of the window (see image below). By checking Accept comma as decimal separator in the Import options section you can overcome problems with localization of the computer where the questionnaire was filled in. If this option is checked, a floating point value like “1,0” (e.g. used in german localizations) instead of “1.0” will be accepted as “1”.

 

After analysis a message window informs you about errors or ignored input lines. By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an analysis protocol (see below). 

  

If an analysis error occured, you are not able to proceed. If ignored lines are reported, this fact is usually uncritical. Most of them concern “modifier” or “frequency” values (prefix CM, CF or QM) where the questionnaire reports the actual values, not only the differences.

 

Import

Before starting the import, you should take a look at the remaining Import options:

  • Update description after backup
    Create a backup of the original description data and then update the original description in the database. If this option is chosen, you may enter a Postfix that will be appended at the backup description name. Additionally you may select the option Include data and time to append these data at the backup name, too (see image below).
  • Create a new description (only option for new descriptions)
    Make a copy of the original description data and then updatde the copy in the database.
  • Update description in database
    The original description in the database will be updated.

If the description entries in your database are referenced by other applications, you should update the original database entry, i.e. use the first or third option. The reason is that references from other databases usually use the description id, which will be different for the copied description. To ensure that the questionnaire data are correct, you can import them useing the option Create a new description, verify the imported data and finally import them to the original description using option Update description in database.

Before performing the import you may include or exclude single database operations by setting or removing the check mark in column “OK”. You may select or deselect all operations by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. Please be aware that deselecting single operation might lead to unexpected results.

To start the import click on the Start import button (see image below). 

 

After import a message window inform you if any occured. Sucessful database operations are shown with green background, unsuccessful operations with red background. When you move the mouse curser over the red entries, you get additional information as bubble help. By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an import protocol (see below).  

  

 

Batch import

If you want to import several questionaire result files, there is the comfortable option to do a batch import. When you select the option Multi-file, the window changes as shown below. For batch import you only have the option to create a new description that will be updated with the questionnaire data.

Click on the button and select all text files you want to import. In the lower part of the window the selected files will belisted (see image below). 

After checking the remaining Import options click on the Start import button to start the import. In the lower part of the window you find the processing result for each selected file (see image below). 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Import SDD

Import SDD file

Remarks:

  • To import data from an SDD file at least TerminologyEditor rights are neccessary.
  • Currently SDD statements concerning natural laguage descriptions and identification keys are not evaluated.

With this form you can import data from an XML file according schema SDD 1.1 rev 5 into the database. You may download an example SDD file with from the Diversity Descriptions example file repository. Choose Data → Import → Import SDD … from the menu to open the window for the import. In the window click on the button to select the file with the data you want to import. If during analysis or import any problems occur, you may click on the button to reload the file and re-initialize the window.

 

The contents of the file will be shown in the upper part of the File tree tab page. In the Analysis settings part you find the document’s Default language. If additional laguages are contained in the document, you may select one of them as the new default language of the database. By checking Import translations you select all additional document languages for the import. This option is automatically pre-selected if more than one language has been found in the file. In the bottom part of the window you find the import database and the actual processing state.

If the Check strings for illegal characters  option is checked, all string literals that shall be exported from database are scanned for illegal non-printable characters and matches are replaced by a double exclamation mark ("‼"). Activating this option may increase the analysis processing time.

In the file tree you may deselect entries that shall not be imported into the database. Use that option very carefully, because if you deselect entries that are being referenced by other parts of the input tree, e.g. descriptors referenced by descriptions, the analysis or import step might become erronous!

 

Analysis

To analyse the data in the file click on the Analyse data button. During the analysis the program checks the dependencies between the different parts of the data and builds up an analysis tree in the lower part of the window. The analysis tree contains all data in a suitable format for the final import step. During data analysis the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort processing by clicking the button. 

 

After analysis a message window informs you if any warnings or errors occured. You can find detailled error and warning information at the file and/or analysis trees by entries with red text (error) or yellow background (warning). When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as tool tip or the tree node text itself tells the problem (see examples below). By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an analysis protocol (see below, right). 

  

If an analysis error occured, you are not able to proceed. You will first have to correct the problem, e.g. by excluding the erronous descriptor in the example above (after reloading the file). If a warning occured, it might not cause problems during import, but you should take a closer look if the imported data will be correct.

 

Import

Before starting the import, you should take a look at the import options:

  • New project - import data to a new project.
    The project name is specified in the text box right from this radio button.
    This option is only available if at least ProjectManager rights are available.
  • To project - import data to an existing project.
    The combo box at the right shows all projects where write access is possible.
    If only TerminologyEditor rights are availabe, no changes in the existing project (e.g. detail or copyright) will be done.
  • Accept comma as decimal separator shall help to overcome problems with localization of some programs that create SDD files.
    If this option is checked, a floating point value like “1,0” (e.g. used in german localizations) instead of “1.0” will be accepted as “1”.
  • Create default descriptor tree creates a default descriptor tree and assigns all imported descriptors to that tree.
    Additionally the statistical measures “Minimum”, “Lower limit”, “Mean”, “Upper limit” and “Maximum” are set as recommended for all quantitative descriptors.
    This option is useful to avoid unassigned descriptors if the import file does not specify any descriptor tree assignments.
  • Import trees for natural language descriptions - currently natural language descriptions are ignored.
  • Import trees without “role” - usually those trees only contain descriptor dependency information.

To start the import click on the Start import button. Now the data from the analysis tree are written into a local database cache and finally stored into the database.

 

After import a message window inform you if any warnings or errors occured. You can find detailled error and warning information at the file and/or analysis trees by entries with red text (error) or yellow background (warning). When you move the mouse curser over the marked entries, you get additional information as bubble help or the tree node text itself tells the problem. By clicking on the status text besides the progress bar, you can open an import protocol (see below).  

 

May 16, 2024

Import Sessions

Import sessions

Usually the information required for an import into DiversityDescriptions is spread over at least two files, e.g. “terminology” (descriptors/categorical states) and “items” (descriptions data), where the elements of the terminology are referenced to build the item descriptions. Between these files references are usually built using e.g. a descriptor number and/or the categorical state name. Within the DiversityDescriptions database relations are built using automatically generated numbers (“id”). To allow a mapping between the internally generated keys and the external keys, the “Import sessions” are used.

When you start the import wizard you are asked to select rsp. create a new import session. To ge an overview of the present import session or to create, edit and delete import sessiong select Data -> Import -> Wizard -> Organize sessions … and a window as shown below will be shown.

Click buttoem New and a window as shown below will be shown. Select the project of the import session and enter a description text. So save the new import session click Save ,to ignore the changes click button Don’t save. A similar window can be opened by selecting an existing import session and clicking Edit

To delete an import session, select it and click the Delete button. If import mapping data are present for the import session, an additional window will be shown that informs you about the number of mappings that will be implicitelx deleted and you have the chance to cancel the delete process (see below).

 

 

Import mapping

To view the mapping information that has been stored for an import session, select it and click the Mapping button. If import mapping data are present for the import session, a table with the database “Table name”, an optional “Parent key”, e.g. the descriptor id in case of categorical states, the “External key” used for import and the database interal key, the “Object ID”, is displayed (see below). To go back to the session overview, click the Session button. 

You may search for specific strings in the mapping table by entering the search string in the upper right text box and clicking the  button. Menu item Clear mapping allows clearing of mapping information for selected tables or all tables. With menu item Import mapping an import wizard can be opened to read the mapping information from tab-separated files. A detailled example for using the mapping import is shown in Import wizard - tutorial for advanced functions.  

If you want to import list data that include the internal database keys, you can generate mapping data that make these internal keys available for import by klicking menu item Generate mapping …. All mappings of the selected import session will be deleted and the internal keys (“Object ID”) of descriptors, categorical states, descriptions and their resources will be inserted as external keys. By using this function you can re-import rsp. update data that have been generated with the form Export resource data list and modified with an external program. 

May 3, 2024

Wizard Advanced Tutorial

Import wizard - tutorial for advanced functions

The second part of the import wizard tutorial is dedicated to some advanced functions of the import wizard. When data are imported from the file formats DELTA or SDD, no import mapping information is stored, because all logical references are completely satisfied within the data files. The starting point of this tutorial, which was taken from a real life example, is a database imported from a DELTA file. For the datasets a lot of pictures are available on a web server. A web application reads the data from the original database (where the DELTA file was generated) and gets the information about available pictures from a second database to display both in a browser. From the original databases several tables were extracted and now the pictures shall be appended to the imported data.

 

Overview of the data tables and necessary import steps  

Step 1 - Preparations: Data import from DELTA file and new import session  

Step 2 - Import of categorical state mapping 

Step 3 - Import of descriptor mapping 

Step 4 - Import of description mapping 

Step 5 - Import of resouces for descriptors 

Step 6 - Import of resouces for categorical states 

Step 7 - Import of resouces for descriptions 

Step 8 - Import of resouce variant 

 

May 3, 2024

Subsections of Wizard Advanced Tutorial

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 1

Step 1 - Preparations: Data import from DELTA file and new import session

Choose Data → Import -> Import DELTA … (see Import DELTA file) from the menu and import the DELTA file to project “Deemy” (see below). If the original database contains special characters, e.g. the German letters “ä”, “ö” or “ü”, it is recommended to specify the export character set “Unicode” or “UTF” if the application allows that. If the character set “ANSI” or “ASCII” was used, you may try the corresponding encoding setting to get a satifactory import result. The option “Accept comma as decimal separator” was checked, because the export has been done on a German computer system, where a value like “3.14” is exported as “3,14”.

Close the window above and choose Data → Import -> Wizard → Organize session … from the menu. A window as shown below will open, click the New button to create a new import session. Select project “Deemy” and enter a session description. Finally click button Save to store the data (see below).

 

When you now click on button Mapping you can see that no mapping data are available (see below).

 

 

Next: Step 2 - Import of categorical state mapping 

Jan 14, 2025

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 2

Step 2 - Import categorical state mapping

In the Import session form choose Import mapping → Descriptor … from the menu. A window as shown below opens that will lead you through the import of the descriptor mapping data. 

The only available import step Descriptor Mapping is already selected at the left side of the window. Now choose the File from where the data should be imported. Open file “Deemy_CHAR.txt”. The chosen encoding ANSI of the file is sufficient. The file column “CharName” contains the descriptor names and file column “CID” the external ID needed for the import of the categorical state mapping import (see below).

In the step table at the right side you find the import step Descriptor Mapping. Click on it and in the center window the assignemt data for the internal “object_id” and the “external_key” are displayed. In column “object_id” click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “CharName” as data source. Now click on the  In column “external_key” click on From file to select the column “CID” as data source. After that the columns should look as shown below.  

Remark: In the import wizards for the import mapping “object_id” allways represents the internal ID of the database. The matching database entry is searched by comparing the label of the database entry to the selected file column. If there are several descriptors (or descriptions) with identical names, the import will generate errors. For categorical states a special handling is available if the state names are not unique.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can use a certain line in the file for your test and than click on the Test data in line: button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window. In our example no error occured and the test for the first data line is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings (see below).

 

 

Append categorical state mapping

Close the import form for descriptors. In the Import session form choose Import mapping -> Categorical state … from the menu and open file “Deemy_CS.txt” (see below). 

The only available import step CategoricalState Mapping is already selected at the left side of the window. In the step table at the right side you find the import step CategoricalState Mapping, too. Click on it and in the center window the assignemt data for the internal “object_id”, the “parent_key” and the “external_key” are displayed. In column “object_id” click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “CharStateName” as data source. In column “parent_key” you have to specify the parent of the categorical state, i.e. the external descriptor ID. Therefore click on From file to select the column “CID” as data source. In column “external_key” click on From file to select the column “StateID” as data source. After that the columns should look as shown below.  

In the source database of this example not only the categorical states as known in DiversityDescriptions are present, but also some “pseudo states” that represent statistical measures of quantitative descriptors or the data status value “not applicable”. The real categorical states can be recognized by a numeric value in file column “CS”. In any case the import wizard check if a categorical state with the label specified in file column “CharStateName” exists in the database. Therefore let’s do a first test for some selected file lines.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can use a certain line in the file for your test and than click on the Test data in line: button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window. Perform the import test for file lines 2, 13 and 12 (see below).

 

The file line 2 refers to parent “CID=1”, which belongs to a text descriptor. The pseudo state “(internal)” was not found as a categorical state in the database, therefore not import is performend for the file line.

 

The file line 13 refers to parent “CID=3”, which belongs to a categorical descriptor. The categorical state “monopodial-pinnate” was found exactly once in the database, therefore the import test was successful.

 

The file line 12 refers to parent “CID=3”, which belongs to a categorical descriptor. But the categorical state “absent” was found 152 time in the database. Therefore it was not possible to find the correct categorical state. But the error message already gives a hint how to solve the problem: To get an unambigious match, additionally the (external) descriptor ID must be specified.

Select the import step CategoricalState Mapping and click on the button at the end of line “object_id”. Select file column “CID”, which contains the reference to the descriptor and enter the separator character | (pipe symbol) in field Pre.: of the new line. Additionally click on button in the first line of “object_id”. In the transformation window insert one replacement (button ): Replace <br> by <br /> . This transformation is neccessary, because the formatting tag “<br>” will be converted to the standardized format “<br /> during export from the original database and import from DELTA. You can check that transformation by the test functions for lines 1860 and 3555. After that the column should look as shown below.

The import test with file line 12 now gives a positive result as shown below..

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. The imported data lines are marked green (see below).

 

Next: Step 3 - Import of descriptor mapping 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 3

Step 3 - Import of descriptor mapping

Close the import form for the categorical state mapping. In the Import session form choose Clear mapping -> Descriptor from the menu (see below) and answer the followind question with “Yes”. This mapping is based on data column “CID” and was needed in the previous step to append the categorical state mapping data. For the picture import the descriptor mapping based on data column “CharID” is required.

In the Import session form choose Import mapping → Descriptor … from the menu and open file “Deemy_CHAR.txt”. The file column “CharName” contains the descriptor names and file column “CharID” the foreign ID (see below).

In the step table at the right side you find the import step Descriptor Mapping. Click on it and in the center window the assignemt data for the internal “object_id” and the “external_key” are displayed. In column “object_id” click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “CharName” as data source. Now click on the  In column “external_key” click on From file to select the column “CharID” as data source. After that the columns should look as shown below.  

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can use a certain line in the file for your test and than click on the Test data in line: button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window. In our example no error occured and the test for the first data line is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings (see below).

 

Next: Step 4 - Import of description mapping 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 4

Step 4 - Import description mapping

Close the import form for descriptors. In the Import session form choose Import mapping → Description … from the menu and open file “Deemy_ITEM.txt” (see below). 

The only available import step Description Mapping is already selected at the left side of the window. In the step table at the right side you find the import step Description Mapping, too. Click on it and in the center window the assignemt data for the internal “object_id” and the “external_key” are displayed. In column “object_id” click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “ItemName” as data source. In column “external_key” click on From file to select the column “ItemID” as data source. After that the columns should look as shown below.  

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can use a certain line in the file for your test and then click on the Test data in line: button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window. In our example no error occured and the test for the first data line is shown below.

 

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. The imported data lines are marked green (see below).

The failed lines are in this example caused by duplicate item names twice in the database. This problem can be fixed by renaming the ambigious entries in the database and the import file, e.g. to “Alnirhiza cystidiobrunnea + Alnus 1” and “Alnirhiza cystidiobrunnea + Alnus 2” rsp. “Lactarius omphaliformis Romagn. + Alnus 1” and “Lactarius omphaliformis Romagn. + Alnus 2”. 

 

Next: Step 5 - Import of resources for descriptors 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 5

Step 5 - Import of resources for descriptors

Close the import wizard for the mapping data and the import session window. Now choose Data → Import -> Wizard -> Import resources → Descriptor resources … from the menu. A window as shown below will open to select an import session. Select the session for project “Deemy”.

After clicking [OK] the following window opens that will lead you through the import of the descriptor resource data. Open file “Deemy_RSC.txt” (see below).

 

Selecting the data ranges

In the selection list on the left side of the window all possible import steps for the data are listed according to the type of data you want to import. The step Descriptor is already selected, additionally check the step Descriptor resource (see below).

We attach the descriptor resource values to the descriptors, therefore we will not change anything in the descriptor but will attach data. In import step Attachment at the right side select Descriptor id (see below). 

Select the import step Merge from the list. For Descriptor we select the Attach option because this tables shall not be changed, for the other step Insert should already be selected, because a new entry has to be inserted (see below).

In the step table at the right side you find the import steps Descriptor and Descriptor resource and below them the data groups of the import steps. Deselect every column from import step Descriptor except “id”. Mark the “id” column as Key column for comparison during attachment and click on From file to select the column “CharID” as data source. The “id” column of import step Descriptor now looks as shown below.

In the import step Descriptor resource click on Resource ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the resource id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “Resource” as data source. After that the column should look as shown below.  

Click on Resource name. The center window shows the data column “label”. Click on From file in the “label” line to select file column “Resource”. After the resource number the value in data column “Caption” shall be inserted, included in brackets, if it is present. Click on the button at the end of line “label” and select column “Caption”. Enter  ( (blank and opening bracket) in field Pre.: and ) in field Post.: of the new line. After that the column should look as shown below.

Finally click on Sequence number. In the center window select the data column “display_order”, click on From file and select file column “DisplayOrder” (see below).

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for the first data line is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. There are 86 lines that were not imported due to duplicate entries (see below).

The failed lines are caused by duplicate entries, i.e. the resource was already imported for the descriptor.

 

Next: Step 6 - Import of resources for categorical states 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 6

Step 6 - Import of resources for categorical states

Close the import wizard for the descriptor resources. Now choose Data -> Import -> Wizard → Import resources → State resources … from the menu, select the session for project “Deemy”. The following window opens that will lead you through the import of the categorical state resource data. Open file “Deemy_RSC.txt” (see below).

 

Selecting the data ranges

In the selection list on the left side of the window all possible import steps for the data are listed according to the type of data you want to import. Deselect the step Descriptor, it is not needed since the categorical states have been assigned unambiguous external IDs in step 3. Check the steps Categorical state and State resource (see below).

We attach the state resource values to the categorical states, therefore we will not change anything in the categorical state but will attach data. In import step Attachment at the right side select Categorial state id (see below). 

Select the import step Merge from the list. For Categorical state we select the Attach option because this tables shall not be changed, for the other step Insert should already be selected, because a new entry has to be inserted (see below).

In the step table at the right side you find the import steps Categorical state and State resource and below them the data groups of the import steps. Deselect every column from import step Categorical state except “id”. Mark the “id” column as Key column for comparison during attachment and click on From file to select the column “StateID” as data source. The “id” column of import step Categorical state now looks as shown below.

In the import step State resource click on Resource ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the resource id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “Resource” as data source. After that the column should look as shown below.  

Click on Resource name. The center window shows the data column “label”. Click on From file in the “label” line to select file column “Resource”. After the resource number the value in data column “Caption” shall be inserted, included in brackets, if it is present. Click on the button at the end of line “label” and select column “Caption”. Enter  ( (blank and opening bracket) in field Pre.: and ) in field Post.: of the new line. After that the column should look as shown below.

Finally click on Sequence number. In the center window select the data column “display_order”, click on From file and select file column “DisplayOrder” (see below).

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for the second data line is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. There are 561 lines that were not imported due to duplicate entries (see below).

The failed lines are caused by duplicate entries, i.e. the resource was already imported for the categorical state.

 

Next: Step 7 - Import of resources for descriptions 

Jan 14, 2025

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 7

Step 7 - Import of resources for descriptions

Close the import wizard for the state resources. Now choose Data -> Import -> Wizard → Import resources → Description resources … from the menu, select the session for project “Deemy”. The following window opens that will lead you through the import of the categorical state resource data. Open file “Deemy_RSC.txt” (see below).

 

Selecting the data ranges

In the selection list on the left side of the window all possible import steps for the data are listed according to the type of data you want to import. Step Description is already selected. Aditionally check step  Description resource (see below).

We attach the description resource values to the descriptions, therefore we will not change anything in the description but will attach data. In import step Attachment at the right side select Description id (see below). 

Select the import step Merge from the list. For Description we select the Attach option because this tables shall not be changed, for the other step Insert should already be selected, because a new entry has to be inserted (see below).

In the step table at the right side you find the import steps Description and Description resource and below them the data groups of the import steps. Deselect every column from import step Description except “id”. Mark the “id” column as Key column for comparison during attachment and click on From file to select the column “ItemID” as data source. The “id” column of import step Description now looks as shown below.

In the import step Description resource clickon Resource ID and in the center window the assignment data for the resource id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “Resource” as data source. After that the column should look as shown below.  

Click on Resource name. The center window shows the data column “label”. Click on From file in the “label” line to select file column “Resource”. After the resource number the value in data column “Caption” shall be inserted, included in brackets, if it is present. Click on the button at the end of line “label” and select column “Caption”. Enter  ( (blank and opening bracket) in field Pre.: and ) in field Post.: of the new line. After that the column should look as shown below.

Finally click on Sequence number. In the center window select the data column “display_order”, click on From file and select file column “DisplayOrder” (see below).

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for the data line 717 is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. There are 177 lines that were not imported due to duplicate entries (see below).

The failed lines are caused by duplicate entries, i.e. the resource was already imported for the description.

 

Next: Step 8 - Import of resource variants 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step 8

Step 8 - Import of resource variants

The import wizards used in step 5 up to step 7 allow appending a resource variant to one resource. Those wizards can be used most efficiently if the data that are needed for the resource table and the resource variant are located at the same file. In our example there is the complication that the direction of the resource reference is in the opposite direction than in the original database. In DiversityDescription a resource references e.g. a descriptor and one or more resource variants reference the resource. In the original database several entities, e.g. descriptors or states, may reference the same picture.

During the import of the resources we used the picture number as the external key of the resources. Together with their parent key, e.g. a descriptor ID, this gives unambiguous entries although the external resource ID alone is ambiguous. Now we want to create a resource variant, containing the URL of the picture, for each resource entry with the same external resource ID.

Since this “multiple” import is no standard feature of the import wizard, the following description shows a work-around: During the import the first resource entry with a matching “Resource ID” that is not referenced by any Resource variant will be available for data update and appending of a new resource variant. A repeated import with the same setting will find the next resource entry and so on until all ambigious resource entries are processed. 

Close the import wizard for the description resources. Now choose Data -> Import -> Wizard → Import resources → Resource variants … from the menu, select the session for project “Deemy”. The following window opens that will lead you through the import of the categorical state resource data. Open file “Deemy_IMG.txt” (see below).

 

Selecting the data ranges

In the selection list on the left side of the window all possible import steps for the data are listed according to the type of data you want to import. The available steps Update resource and Resource variant are already selected.

We want to update some fields of the resource table with values form the data file attach the resource variant to the resource. In import step Attachment at the right side select Update resource id (see below). Note: With this import wizard only update of resources is supported. 

Select the import step Merge from the list. For Update resource we keep the Merge option because this table shall be updated, for the other step Insert should already be selected, because a new entry has to be inserted (see below).

In the import step Update resource click on Resource ID and in the center window the assignment data for the resource id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column. Mark the “id” column as Key column for comparison during attachment and click on From file to select the column “PID” as data source. After that the column should look as shown below.

Click on Resource name. The center window shows the data column “label” and “detail”. Deselect the “label” entry and select “detail”. Click on From file to select the column “SourceTitle” as data source and enter Source:  in field Pre.: (double-click in the field to open a separate edit window). Now click on the button at the end of line “detail”, select file column “Volume” and enter , vol.  in field Pre.:. Repeat the last step for file columns “Pages” (, p. ) and “ReferenceNotes” (, notes: ). After that the column should look as shown below. 

Click on Resource rights and in the center window the assignment data for the resource rights are displayed. Select “rights_text”. Click on From file to select the column “Author” as data source and enter ©  (Alt+0169 and a blank) in field Pre.:. Now click on the button at the end of line “rights_text”, select file column “DateYear” and enter ,  in field Pre.:. After that the column should look as shown below. 

In the import step Resource variant click on Resource link. The center window shows the data column “url”. Click on to make this the decisive column and on From file in the “url” line to select file column “FileName”. Double-click on the text box after Pre.: to open a separate edit window. Here enter the web address of the picture server where the files are located and confirm with “OK”. After that the column should look as shown below.

Click on Variant type. In the center window select the data column “variant_id”, click on For all: and select the value “good quality” (see below).

Click on the import step Resource variant to find some ungrouped fields. In the center window select the data column “pixel_width”, click on From file and select the value “WidthD”. Now select the data column “pixel_height”, click on From file and select the value “HeightD”. Finally select the data column “mime_type”, click on From file and select the value “FileName”. Click on button to define a transformation. In the transformation window click on the cut transformation, enter Position: 2, click on to enter splitter character . (period) to extract the file extension. Now click on to insert a translation table and to insert the values contained in the file column. “gif” shall be converted to image/gif, “jpg”  will become image/jpeg (see below).

After that the columns should look as shown below.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for the first data line is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. As mentioned in the introduction, the import step has to be repeated until no more resource variant is imported. At the first run 789 lines were imported (see below).

At the second run, started by another click on Start import, 152 lines were imported (see below).

Finally, at the seventh run no further line is imported (see below).

 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Advanced Tutorial Step Overview

Overview of the data tables and necessary import steps

From the original database several tables have been extracted that contain the descriptor names, categorical state names and description names, together with their internal IDs in the foreign database. Additionally there is a table that assigns picture IDs to the IDs of descriptors, categorical states and descriptions. The last table connects the picture IDs to file names. In DiversityDescriptions resources are represented by the tablese “Resource”, which holds some general information and is linked to descriptors, categorical states or descriptions. Table “Resource variant” holds the URL of the resources and each table row is assigned to one entry in table “Resource”.

Find below a part of the table “Deemy_RSC.txt”, which corresponds quite well to the table “Resource” in DiversityDescriptions. It references either to a description (“ItemID”), a descriptor (“CharID”) or a categorical state (“StateID”). 

The value in column “Resource” corresponds to column “PID” of the table “Deemy_IMG.txt” (see below), where the picture file name is specified. Since all pictures are accessible over a URL containing that file name, this table can be used for import to data table “Resource variant” in DiversityDescriptions. 

To import the picture data, first the data in table “Deemy_RSC.txt” must be appended to the existing descriptors, categorical states and descriptions. Then the data from table “Deemy_IMG.txt” must be appended to the resource entries. Since the basic data are imported from a DELTA file, no mapping information have been stored, which are needed to append the resource data. Therefore at first the mapping information must be imported from three additional tables. 

 

Mapping data

To allow appending of resource data to the existing database objects, we first must create the mapping information of the external IDs of the foreign database to the actual IDs in DiversityDescriptions. Find below the table “Deemy_Char.txt”, which contains the descriptor name (“CharName”), the internal “CharID” and an external “CID”. 

For the picture import each descriptor must be mapped to its “CharID”, which can be done by a special mapping import available in the Import session form. When we now take a look at the “Deemy_CS.txt” (see below), which contains the categorical state data, we discover a problem: The categorical states contain the required “StateID”, but they are connected to their descriptors by the value “CID”, not “CharID”.

This problem can be solved by importing the descriptor mapping twice: First the descriptor mapping is imported by using the “CID” and the categorical states are appended to the descriptors. Then the descriptor mapping is cleared and imported again, this time using the final value from column “CharID”.

The last table is “Deemy_Item.txt”, which contains the mapping information for the descriptions. Here the data column “ItemID” must be mapped to the descriptions (see below).

 

Next: Step 1 - Preparations: Data import from DELTA file and new import session 

May 3, 2024

Wizard Columns

Import wizard - Columns

If the content of a file should be imported into a certain column of a table, mark it with the checkbox.

 

Decisive columns

The import depends upon the data found in the file where certain columns can be choosed as decisive, that means only those lines will be imported where data are found in any of these columns. To mark a column as decisive, click on the icon at the beginning of the line (see below).

In the example shown below, the file column Organims 2 was marked as decisive. Therefore only the two lines containing content in this column will be imported.

 

Key columns

For the options Merge, Update and Attach the import compares the data from the file with those already present in the database. This comparision is done via key columns. To make a column a key column, click on the icon at the beginning of the line. You can define as many key columns as you need to ensure a valid comparision of the data.

 

Source

The data imported into the database can either be taken From file or the same value that you enter into the window or select from a list can be used For all datasets. If you choose the From file option, a window as shown below will pop up. Just click in the column where the data for the column should be taken from and click OK (see below).

If you choose the For all option, you can either enter text, select a value from a list or use a checkbox for YES or NO.

 

Transformation

The data imported may be transformed e.g. to adapt them to a format demanded by the database. For further details please see the chapter Transformation.

 

Copy

If data in the source file are missing in subsequent lines as shown below,

you can use the Copy line option to fill in missing data as shown below where the blue values are copied into empty fields during the import. Click on the button to ensure that missing values are filled in from previous lines.

 

 

Prefix and Postfix

In addition to the transformation of the values from the file, you may add a pre- and a postfix. These will be added after the transfromation of the text. Double-click in the field to see or edit the content. The pre- and a postfix values will only be used, if the file contains data for the current position.

For the datatype geography the pre- and postfixes will be automatically set to enable the import. The preset values by default are set for points as geographical units. You may change this to predefined types like lines or areas. Click on the button at the end of the line to open the information window. Here you can choose among the types mentioned above (see below).  

 

Column selection

If for any reason, a column that should take its content from the imported file misses the position of the file or you want to change the position click on the button. In case a position ist present, this button will show the number of the column. A window as shown below will pop up where you can select resp. change the position in the file.

 

Multi column

The content of a column can be composed from the content of several columns in the file. To add additional file columns, click on the button. A window as shown below will pop up, showing you the column selected so far, where the sequence is indicated in the header line. The first colum is marked with a blue background while the added columns are marked with a green background (see below).

To remove a added column, use the button (see below).

 

Information

The button opens a window displaying the informations about the column. For certain datatypes additional options are included (see Pre- and Postfix).

Jan 14, 2025

Wizard Transformation

Import wizard - transformation

The data imported may be transformed e.g. to adapt them to a format demanded by the database. Click on the button to open a window as shown below.

Here you can enter 4 types of transformation that should be applied to your data. Cut out parts,  Translate contents from the file, RegEx apply regular expressions or Replace text in the data from the file. All transformations will be applied in the sequence they had been entered. Finally, if a prefix and/or a postfix are defined, these will be added after the transformation. To remove a transformation, select it and click on the button.

 

Cut

With the cut transformation you can restrict the data taken from the file to a part of the text in the file. This is done by splitters and the position after splitting. In the example below, the month of a date should be extracted from the information. To achieve this, the splitter ‘.’ is added and than the position set to 2. You can change the direction of the sequence with the button Seq starting at the first position and starting at the last position. Click on the button Test the transformation to see the result of your transformation.

 

Translate

The translate transformation translates values from the file into values entered by the user. In the example above, the values of the month cut out from the date string should be translated from roman into numeric notation. To do this click on the button to add a translation transformation (see below). To list all different values present in the data, click on the button. A list as shown below will be created. You may as well use the and buttons to add or remove values from the list or the button to clear the list. Than enter the translations as shown below. Use the save button to save entries and the Test the transformation button to see the result. 

To load a predefined list for the transformation use the button. A window as shown below will open. Choose the encoding of the data in you translation source, if the first line contains the column definition and click on the  button to open a file. Click OK to use the values from the file for the translation.

To load a database table for the transformation use the button (see main translation window above). A window as shown below will open, where you may select a database table for the translation. Choose the table and the columns for the translation. Click OK to use the values from the table for the translation. Only unique values from the table will be used to ensure an unequivocal translation.

The values of the database table will be listed underneath as shown below. For the translation will only be regarded if the manual list does not contain the corresponding table. That means that content in the manual table will overwrite corresponding content in the database table. To remove the database table use the button.

 

Regular expression

The transformation using regular expressions will transform the values according to the entered Regular expression and Replace by vales. For more details please see documentations about regular expressions.

 

Replacement

The replacement transformation replaces any text in the data by a text specified by the user. In the example shown below, the text “.” is replaced by “-". 

 

Calculation 

The calculation transformation performs a calculation on numeric value, dependent on an optional condition. In the example below, 2 calculations were applied to convert 2-digit values into 4 digit years.

 

Filter 

The filter transformation compares the values from the file with a value entered by the user. As a result you can either Import content of column in file or Import a fixed value. To select another column that should be compared, click on the button and choose a column from the file in the window that will open. If the column that should be compared is not the column of the transformation, the number of the column will be shown instead of the symbol. To add further filter conditions use the button. For the combination of the conditions you can choose among AND and OR. 

 

Color 

The color transformation offers the transformation of color values between the three formats HEX values (#rrggbb), decimal value triples (rrr, ggg, bbb) and (negative) integer numbers. 

 

May 3, 2024

Wizard Tutorial

Import wizard - tutorial

This tutorial demostrates the import of descriptors and descriptions from two tabulator separated files into the database. The original data were stored in an MS-Excel sheet with data from an agricultural survey. The first table contains a list of questions and data like expected type of the answer, possible values and the measurement unit in case of numeric values (see image below).

The second table contains the answers of three individuals that are identified by a numeric value (see image below).

By using the option “Save as unicode text” the tables can easily be exported as tabulator separated text files (“Survey_Questions.txt” and “Survey_Answers.txt”). The import is done in seven steps and demonstrates various features of the import wizard. The tabulator separated text files and import schemas are available in the tutorialfiles in folder “Agricultural survey” or may be downloaded from the Diversity Descriptions example filerepository

 

Step 1 - Preparations: New project and descriptor tree 

Step 2 - Import of descriptors 

Step 3 - Insert recommended values of descriptors 

Step 4 - Import of categorical states for boolean data 

Step 5 - Import of categorical states and update of descriptor 

Step 6 - Import of descriptions 

Step 7 - Import of description data 

Epilogue 

 

See the second part of the import wizard tutorial to learn more about some advanced functions of the import wizard. 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Wizard Tutorial

Wizard Tutorial Step 1

Step 1 - Preparations: New project and descriptor tree

Choose Edit → Projects from the menu and create a new project by clicking the button. Now click on button to enter the project name “Agricultural survey”. After entering the name the project will automatically be saved and the display will be updated (see below).

Change to tab “Descriptor tree”, mark project “Agricultural survey” in section “Descriptor tree” and press button to insert a new tree. Change the tree name to “Main tree for Agricultural survey” and click button to save all changes (see below).

 

 

Next: Step 2 - Import of descriptors 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Tutorial Step 2

Step 2 - Import of descriptors

Choose Data → Import -> Import wizard -> Import descriptors … from the menu. A window as shown below will open to create a new import session. Select project “MycoPhylogenyNet” and enter a session description.

After clicking [OK] the following window opens that will lead you through the import of the descriptor data. The window is separated in three areas. On the left side, you see a list of possible data related import steps according to the type of data you choosed for the import. On the right side you see the list of currently selected import steps. In the center part the details of the selected import step are shown.

 

Choosing the File

As a first step, choose the File from where the data should be imported. Open file “Survey_Questions.txt”. The preselected encoding ANSI should be sufficient for our test file. The file column “QuestionText” contains the descriptor names that shall be imported. In file column “QuestionNumber” there is a unique number assigned to each descriptor that will be used by other data tables to reference a certain descriptor. “Type” might give a hint for the descriptor type (categorical, quantitative or text) and “DisplayOrder” may be used to determine the sequence number of the descriptor.

 

Selecting the data ranges

In the selection list on the left side of the window all possible import steps for the data are listed according to the type of data you want to import.

The step Descriptor is already selected and cannot be de-selected, additionally we select Descriptor node, because we want to assign each imported descriptor to a descriptor tree (see above). In the step table at the right side you find the import step Descriptor and below the most important data groups of the import step. Click on Descriptor ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the descriptor id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “QuestionNumber” as data source. After that the column should look as shown below.  

Remark: The Descriptor ID is a number that is generated automatically from the database when a new descriptor is created. Anyway in the data file there is a field “QuestionNumber” that is linked to a certein descriptor and used in other tables to reference a certain descriptor. The mapping from the “QuestionNumber” values to the internally generated Descriptor ID values will be stored in a separate import mapping table for the actual import session. In the later import steps this mapping table will allow to find the correct descriptor assigned to a certain “QuestionNumber”.

Now the descriptor name must be selected, therefore click on Descriptor name. The center window shows three data columns: “label”, “abbreviation” and “detail”. Click on From file in the “label” line to select file column “QuestionText” (see below).

Next click on Sequence number. In the center window select the data column “display_order”, click on From file and select file column “QuestionNumber”. (see below).

As already mentioned before the file column “Type” contains information that can be used to determine the descriptor type. Therefore click on Subclass, select the “subclass” line, click on From file and select the file column “Type”. Now click on button to open the transformation window. As only transformation step select to insert a translation table and to list the values contained in the file column. “Bool” shall be converted to “Categorical descriptor”, “Integer” and “Real” will become “Quantitative descriptor” and the rest “Text descriptor” (see below).

The file rows that contain entries in column “Values” seem to specify categorical descriptors but are simply inserted as text characters. We will correct those values when we import the categorical states in a later step. The “subclass” data column now looks as shown below.

The descriptor step at the right displays the most important data columns grouped in separate steps. Anyway, there are several additional data columns available that can be accessed by clicking on the Descriptor step itself. Here we select data column “measurement_unit”, choose file column “Unit” (see below).

To do the assignment of the imported descriptors to the descriptor tree that was created in the preparation step, select Descriptor node ID from step Descriptor node and supply it exactly the samy way as the Descriptor ID. (Don’t forget to click on to make it the decision column.) Furthermore supply the Sequence number in the same way as described above.

Finally select import step Descriptor tree, select data column “descriptortree_id”, choose For all:  and select entry “Main tree for Agricultural survey” from the drop down (see below). With this adjustment every imported descriptor will automatically be assigned to that descriptor tree.

Remark: Although descriptortree_id is a numeric value in the database, the externally visible descriptor tree name is expected here. Since this name is unambigious, the corresponding id will be determined during import.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can use a certain line in the file for your test and than click on the Test data in line: button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window. In our example no error occured and the test for the first data line is shown below.

You can see that in table “Descriptor” for data column “id” a new value 325050 is generated - remember that from file column “ParamID” the value 1 was selected. The mapping of the external value (1) to the internal value (325050) in table “Descriptor” will be stored in the “ImportMapping” table of the actual import session. I.e. if in a subsequent import step for the same session a “Descriptor.id=1” is specified in the import schema, it will automatically be translated to the internal “Descriptor.id=325050”. Anyway, usually you do not have to take care about this automatic translation. This example shall only demonstrate the meaning of the import sessions.

Remark: Since testing works with transaction rollback, the “id” values shown in the test window are different from the values resulting from a real import.

As a second example data line 4 with “DataType=Integer” was selected to demonstrate that the descriptor subtype is correctly set to “quantitative” (see below).    

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings (see below).

Schedule for import of tab-separated text files into DiversityDescriptions
Target within DiversityDescriptions: Descriptor
Schedule version: 1 Database version: 03.00.17
Lines: 2 - 10 First line contains column definition:
Encoding: ANSI Language: US

Tables

Descriptor (Descriptor)
Merge handling: Insert

Column in table ? Key Copy Pre Post File pos. Transformations Value Source Table
id ? 0 File
label 1 File
display_order 0 File
subclass 2
Translate Into
Bool categorical
Integer quantitative
Real quantitative
Text text
File
measurement_unit 4 File

DescriptorTreeNode (DescriptorTreeNode)
Parent: Descriptor
Merge handling: Insert

Column in table ? Key Copy Pre Post File pos. Transformations Value Source Table
id ? 0 File
display_order 0 File
descriptortree_id Main tree for Agricultural survey Interface
descriptor_id ParentTable

Lines that could not be imported will be marked with a red background while imported lines are marked green.

If you want to save lines that produce errors during the import in a separate file, use the “Save failed lines” option. The protocol of the import will contain all settings acording to the used schema and an overview containing the number of inserted, updated, unchanged and failed lines (see below).

 

Next: Step 3 - Insert recommended values of descriptors 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Tutorial Step 3

Now we have imported the descriptors and assigned them to a descriptor tree. Since we have several quantitative descriptors, we should at least assign one recommended statistical measure to these descriptors. In this step we will additionally insert recommended modifier and frequency vales. If your database does not yet include modifier and frequency values, you might like to interrupt here and insert them according chapter  Edit projects - Modifier/Frequencytab of this manual. 

Finally we want to set the “values_are_integer” flag for the descriptor, that is specified as “Integer” in the file column “Type”. We could have done this during the previous import step, but here we can demonstrate the update existing data sets with the import wizard. 

In the selection list on the left side of the window select Rec. stat. measure 1 Rec. modifier 1 and Rec. frequency 1 (see below).

In this step we attach the recommended values to all descriptor nodes, therefore we will not change anything in the descriptor or descriptor node but will attach data. In import step Attachment at the right side select id (see below). 

Select the import step Merge from the list. For Descriptor we select the Update option because the “values_are_integer” column shall be updated. For Descriptor node we select the Attach option because this tables shall not be changed. For all other steps Insert should already be selected, because new entries have to be inserted (see below).

Deselect every column from import steps Descriptor and Descriptor node except “id”. Mark the “id” columns as Key column for comparison during attachment. The “id” column of import step Descriptor now looks as shown below.

The “id” column of import step Descriptor node now looks as shown below.

 

Selecting the values

In the step table at the right side click on the import step Rec. stat. measure 1 and in the center window the assignemt data for the statistical measure (“measure_id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on For all: and select entry “Central or typical value (human estimate)” from the drop down (see below).  

Select values for Rec. modifier 1 and Rec. frequency 1 in the same way, the actually selected modifier and frequency values do not matter for this tutorial (see below). 

Remark: Although measure_id, modifier_id and frequency_id are numeric values in the database, the externally visible names are expected here. Since this names are unambigious, the corresponding ids will be determined during import.

If you want to insert more than one recommended value of a type, click on button of the import step at the left side of the window. Select the new inserted step and supply the “measure_id”, “modifier_id” or “frequency_id” as described above.

Now we will enter the update of the “values_are_integer” data column. Select the import step Descriptor and select the “values_are_integer” line. Click on From file and select the file column “Type”. Now click on button to open the transformation window. As only transformation step select to insert a translation table and to insert the values contained in the file column. For “Integer” the data column value shall be set to “yes” as shown below.

The “values_are_integer” column of import step Descriptor now looks as show below.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. You can use a certain line in the file for your test and than click on the Test data in line: button. If there are still unmet requirements, these will be listed in a window. In our example no error occured and the test for the fifth data line is shown below. 

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. The imported data lines are marked green (see below).

 

Next: Step 4 - Import of categorical states for boolean data 

Jan 14, 2025

Wizard Tutorial Step 4

Step 4 - Import of categorical states for boolean data

Now we want to import categorical states for the descriptors specified as “Bool” in the table. In the selection list on the left side of the window deselect Descriptor node, Rec. stat. measure 1 Rec. modifier 1 and Rec. frequency 1. Select Categorical state 1, click on the button to insert a second categorical state and select it, too (see below).

In this step we attach two categorical states named “Yes” and “No” at those descriptors that are marked as “Bool” in file column “Type”. The state values are not present in the “Survey_Questions.txt” file, but in the “Survey_answers.txt” files we can see the values. In import step Attach at the right side we select id (see below). It indicates that we do not want to insert new descriptors but attach data to an existing descriptor.

Select the import step Merge from the list. For Descriptor we select the Attach option because this table shall not be changed, for Categorical state 1 we select Insert, because a new entry shall be inserted (see below).

Deselect every column from import step Descriptor except “id”. Mark the “id” column as Key column for comparison during attachment (see below).

 

Inserting the categorical states

In the import step Categorical state 1 click on Categorical state ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the categorical state id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “Type” as data source. Now click on button to define a transformation. In the tranformation window click on to select a filter, then select Import fixed value and enter the value Yes. Now click on the button choose column “Type” from the file and enter compare value Bool (see below).

This filter has the following effect: If file column “Type” contains value “Bool”, the value Yes is provided for import, otherwise the file row will be ignored. The column now looks as shown below.  

Remark: The Categorical state ID is a number that is generated automatically from the database when a new categorical state is created. At first sight it seems confusing that we select a string for this numeric key. The point is that in the file with the description data the corresponding catogorical state is idenified by exactly this categorical state name. Since we select this categorical state name for the Categorical state ID, the mapping between these two values will be stored in a separate import mapping table for the actual import session. In the later import steps this mapping table will allow to find the correct categorical state.

In the import step Categorical state 1 click on Categorical state name and in the center window the assignemt data for the categorical state name (“label”), its abbreviation and detailled description (“abbreviation” and “details”) are displayed. Select “label” and click on For all: and enter the value Yes. The column now looks as shown below.

Finally we supply the Sequence number. Select For all: with 1 (see below).

 

In the import step Categorical state 2 click on Categorical state ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the categorical state id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “Type” as data source. Now click on button to define a transformation. In the tranformation window click on to select a filter, then select Import fixed value and enter the value No. Now click on the button choose column “Type” from the file and enter compare value Bool (see below).

This filter has the following effect: If file column “DataType” contains value “Bool”, the value No is provided for import, otherwise the file row will be ignored. The column now looks as shown below.  

In the import step Categorical state 1 click on Categorical state name and in the center window the assignemt data for the categorical state name (“label”), its abbreviation and detailled description (“abbreviation” and “details”) are displayed. Select “label” and click on For all: and enter the value Yes. The column now looks as shown below.

Finally we supply the Sequence number. Select For all: with “2” (see below).

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. First the test for data line 2 is shown below, which is an example for a non “Bool” descriptor.

No data shall be inserted. Below the test result for data line 8, a “Bool” descriptor, is shown.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. The imported data lines are marked green, the ignored data lines grey (see below).

 

Next: Step 5 - Import of categorical states and update of descriptor 

May 3, 2024

Wizard Tutorial Step 5

Step 5 - Import of categorical states and update of descriptor data

Now we want to import the categorical states that are specified in file column “Values” and set the subclass for those descriptors from “text” to “categorical”. In the selection list on the left side of the window Descriptor, Categorical state 1 and Categorical state 2 are still selected and Descriptor node 1 is deselected (see below). Furthermore the descriptor id is selected for attachment.

Since we want to change the descriptor data, we have to change the import step Merge from the list. For Descriptor we select the Update option (see below).

In the import step Descriptor click on Subclass, select file column “Values” and click on button to open the transformations. By clicking the button the transformations of previous steps are removed. In the tranformation window click on to select a filter, then select Import a fixed value and enter the value categorical. Now click on the button choose column “Values” from the file and select <not equal> blank (see below).

This filter will provide the value “categorical” for database column “subclass” if file column “Values” is not empty. If “Value” is empty, no value is provided and the “subclass” stays unchanged. The column now looks as shown below.

 

Inserting the categorical states

A closer look on the “Values” file column shows that the states are provided as a list of values separated by the pipe symbol and blanks (" | “). To get the single state values, we have to split off a value at the string " | “. This value will then be used for the Categorical state ID and the Categorical state name.

In the import step Categorical state 1 click on Categorical state ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the categorical state id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column, further click on From file to select the column “Values” as data source. Now click on button to define a transformation.

In the tranformation window click on the cut transformation, enter Position: 1, click on to enter splitter character  |  (blank, pipe, blank). By clicking on button [Test the tranformation] you can check the transformation results (see below).

The column now looks as shown below.  

Remark: The Categorical state ID is a number that is generated automatically from the database when a new categorical state is created. At first sight it seems confusing that we select a string - the catigorical state name - for this numeric key. The point is that in the file with the description data the corresponding catogorical state is idenified by exactly this categorical state name. Since we select this categorical state name for the Categorical state ID, the mapping between these two values will be stored in a separate import mapping table for the actual import session. In the later import steps this mapping table will allow to find the correct categorical state.

Now supply exactly the same filter settings for Categorical state name but do not mark it as decisive column (see below).

Finally we supply the Sequence number. Select For all: with 1 (see below).

And now there is some “fun”:

The longest entry in column “Values” contains four entries separated by pipes and blanks. Therefore click two more times on the button of step Categorical state 1 on the left side and select the new steps Categorical state 3 and Categorical state 4. For each of the remaining steps supply the columns in the same way as for Categorical state 1, but increase the Position: value in the cut transformations and the For all: value in  Sequence number.  

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for data line 9, where all eleven descriptor states are present, is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. There were 4 lines that contained descriptors (see below).

 

Next: Step 6 - Import of descriptions 

May 3, 2024

Wizard Tutorial Step 6

Step 6 - Import of descriptions

Choose Data → Import -> Wizard -> Import descriptions … from the menu. A window as shown below will open to select an import session. Select session for project “MycoPhylogenyNet”.

After clicking [OK] the following window opens that will lead you through the import of the description data.

 

Choosing the File

Choose step File an open file “Survey_Answers.txt”. The chosen encoding ANSI of the file should be sufficiend. The file column “ClientNumber” contains the description names that shall be imported. Since there are no other description specific data, the same column will be used for the as unique ID to identify each description. 

 

Selecting the data ranges

In the selection list on the left side of the window all possible import steps for the data are listed according to the type of data you want to import.

Since each description name rsp. ID occurs in several lines of the file, subsequent tries to import the same description would cause errors, if the standard merge handling Insert was used.  We have to change the import step Merge from the list. For Description we select the Merge option (see below).

The step Description is already selected and cannot be de-selected (see above). In the step table at the right side you find the import step Descriptor and below the data groups of the import step. Click on Description ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the description id (“id”) are displayed. Click on to make this the decisive column and on to allow the merge comparison, further click on From file to select the column “ClientNumber” as data source. After that the column should look as shown below.  

Now the description name must be selected, therefore click on Description name. The center window shows two data columns: “label” and “detail”. Click on From file in the “label” line to select file column “ClientNumber”. After that the columns should look as shown below.

Finally select import step Project, select data column “project_id”, choose For all:  and select entry “Agricultural survey” from the drop down (see below). With this adjustment every imported description will automatically be assigned to that project.

Remark: Although project_id is a numeric value in the database, the externally visible project name is expected here. Since this name is unambigious, the corresponding id will be determined during import.

 

Testing

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for the first data line is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. There were three different descriptions (see below).

 

Next: Step 7 - Import of description data 

May 16, 2024

Wizard Tutorial Step 7

Step 7 - Import of description data

In this step we attach categorical, quantitative and text data to the descriptions. In import step Attach at the right side we select id (see below). It indicates that we do not want to attach data to an existing description.

Select the import step Merging from the list. For Description we select the Attach option because this table shall not be changed (see below).

Deselect every column from import step Description except “id”. The “id” column was already marked as Key column for comparison in the previous step. Now the column looks as shown below.

 

Inserting text descriptor data

We will now include the text, quantitative, categorical and status data step by step. First we will attach the text descriptor data. Select the Text descriptor 1 step at the left (see below).

At the right side you find the import step Text descriptor 1 and below the data groups of the import step. Click on Descriptor ID and in the center window the assignemt data for the referenced descriptor’s id (“descriptor_id”) are displayed. Click on From file to select the file column “QuestionNumber” as data source. After that the column should look as shown below.  

Now the description text must be selected, therefore click on Text. The center window shows two data columns: “content” and “notes”. In line “content” click on to make it the decisive column, further on From file to select file column “Answer”. In line “notes” click on From file to select file column “Notes”. After that the columns should look as shown below.

 

Testing the text descriptor data import

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for the first data line is shown below.

An additional test is done for the next data line. This line contains no text data but a categorical state. You can see below that this line will not be imported as text descriptor data, because the descriptor (given by Descriptor ID) is automatically checked for the correct type.

 

Inserting quantitative summary data

We will now include the quantitative summary data. Select the Quantitative data 1 step (see below).

At the right side you find the import step Quantitative data 1 and below the data groups of the import step. Click on Descriptor ID and select the file column “QuestionNumber” as data source.

Now the value must be selected, therefore click on Value. The center window shows two data columns: “value” and “notes”. In line “value” click on to make it the decisive column, further on From file to select file column “Answer”. In line “notes” click on From file to select file column “Notes”. After that the columns should look as shown below.

For quantitavie measures you must specify which statistical measure is given by the value. We assume all imported values are mean values, therefore click on the import step Statistical measure and in the center window the assignemt data for the statistical measure (“measure_id”) are displayed. Click on For all: and select entry “Central or typical value (human estimate)” from the drop down (see below).  

 

Testing the quantitative summary data import

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for data line 25 with integer data is shown below.

The test for data line 25, which contains real number fails (see below).

A closer look on the data in column “Answer” shows that the decimal separator is a comma, because the table has been generated by a progam using the German localization. The database expects a decimal point as separator. To interpret the localized file values correctly, select the step File and choose Language / Country: de (see below).

With this settings the test now works fine (see below).

 

Inserting categorical summary data

Now we will include the categorical summary data. Select the Categorical data 1 step at the left (see below).

At the right side you find the import step Categorical data 1 and below the data groups of the import step. Click on Categorical state ID. The center window shows the data column “state_id”. Click on to make it the decisive column, further on From file to select file column “Answer”. If you perform a quick import test you will see that this setting works perfectly for data file lines 3, 4 and 6, but fails for line 8 (see below).

The reason is that we used the state name as external key for the categorical state. For the descriptors 6 and 8, which both represent boolean values, the states names are ambigious (“Yes” and “No” for both descriptors), therefore the import wizard does not know which descriptor shall be used. To overcome this ambiguity the Categorical state ID step allows the additional specification of the descriptor id. Select import step Categorical state ID. In the center click on the button at the end of line “state_id”. Select file column “QuestionNumber”, which contains the reference to the descriptor and enter the separator character | (pipe symbol) in field Pre.: of the new line. After that the column should look as shown below.

If you repeat the quick import test for line 8, it will now work.

Now click on Notes. The center window shows the data column “notes”. Click on From file to select file column “Notes”. After that the columns should look as shown below.

 

Testing the categorical summary data import

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for data line 15 with categorical data and notes is shown below.

 

Inserting the descriptor status data

There is an empty lines in the file. For this line we want to set the descriptor status “Data unavailable” to indicate that the descriptor should be present in the description. Select the Descriptor status 1 step at the left (see below).

At the right side you find the import step Descriptor status 1 and below the data groups of the import step. Click on Descriptor ID and select the file column “QuestionNumber” as data source. Furthermore click on Notes and select the file column “Notes”. 

Now click on Data status. The center window shows the data column “statusdata_id”. Click on to make it the decisive column, further on From file to select file column “Answer”. Now click on button to define a transformation. In the tranformation window click on to select translation. In the translation window click the button to list the values contained in the file column. For the empty entry in the first line select the translation value “Data unavailable” (see below). All data entries will therefore be mapped to “empty”, i.e. no data status will be set. Only if the data file line ist empty, the selected data status will be inserted.

 

Testing the descriptor status data import

To test if all requirements for the import are met use the Testing step. The test for data line 16 is shown below.

 

Import

With the last step you can start to import the data into the database. If you want to repeat the import with the same settings and data of the same structure, you can save a schema of the current settings. There were 26 lines imported and one failed line (see below).

The erroneous lines are stored into separate text file (e.g. “Survey_AnswersError.txt”) for a detailled analysis and a separate import after error corrections. In our example the error is caused by the undefined value “Cereals” in the “Answer” column of file line 24.  

 

Next: Epilogue 

Jan 14, 2025

Wizard Tutorial Step Epilogue

Epilogue

When you close the import wizard and start a query for descriptions of project “Agricultural survey” you will find the three datasets and the imported descriptor data (see image below). 

Finnally two more aspects of the imports wizard shall be discussed from a retrospective view. The first one concerns the mapping of external and internal keys and the role of the import session. The second one takes a closer look on the role of the “ID” columns during import. 

 

Mapping of external and internal keys

When opening the import wizard you have to select rsp. create an import session. Imports into Diversity Descriptions usually require at least two import operations, e.g. for descriptors and descriptions. The description data reference descriptors or categorical states. Within the database those relations are built based on numeric values that are provided by the database during creation of the corresponding objects. In the external data files the relations are usually built by numbers coordinated by the user (“QuestionNumber”) or by the entity names.

The import session stores the external and internal key values in separate database tables and therefore builds a bracket around the different import operations. Each import session is assigned to one project, but for each project several import sessions may be created. The mapping data may be viewed by opening the menu item Data -> Import -> Wizard -> Organize sessions …, selecting the session and clicking the button Mapping (see image below).

 

 

Selecting import columns for the “ID” fields

As an addition to the tutorial steps a closer look on the role of the “ID” fields shall be taken. In principle the most important IDs during import concern the Descriptor ID and the Categorical state ID during descriptor import. To decide which file column shall be used for that values during import, it is important to know how these elements are referenced in the other files.    

For the descriptor import, you should take a look at the description data table (see above), which is part of the tutorial example. The descriptor is referenced by column “QestionNumber”, which matches homonymous column of the descriptor data table (see below). Therefore the natural approach is to use this column as input for the Descriptor ID during the descriptor import. Since in most practical cases the descriptors will have a numbering column, which is used in the referencing table. Surely more variety exists in the way the categorical states are listed in the descriptor data file and the way they are referenced by the description data file.  

In the tutorial the first complication is that the possible states are all concatenated, separated by a semicolon, into a single column of the descriptor data file. This causes some effort in the transformation, because the states have to be splitted into the single values. The question is, what is the Categorical state ID? The answer can be found in the upper table, because the state name is explicitely mentioned in the description data file as reference. I.e. for the descriptor import the state name must be used for the Categorical state ID, too.

In Diversity Descriptions the categorical state names must be unique in relation to their descriptor. But different descriptors may have states with the same names. In our example this situation occures with the two boolean descriptors (states “Yes” and “No”) and the state value “Others”, wich is used by two descriptors. Therefore it is generally recommended to specify the descriptor for the import of categorical summary data as demonstrated in the tutorial. 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Translations

Translations

For each project a default language is selected in the Edit project panel. In Diversity Descriptions for most database entries additionally translated expressions can be stored in the Translation table. Even for the default language adjusted for the project alternate expressions may be entered. In several export and document generation forms it is possible to select an alternate output language, if translations are available. Translatable entities are listed in the following table.

Database table Database columns
CategoricalState label, detail, abbreviation, wording
DataStatus_Enum label, detail, abbreviation
Description label, detail, wording
Descriptor label, detail, abbreviation, wording_before, wording_after, wording
DescriptorTree label
DescriptorTreeNode label, detail, abbreviation
Frequency label
Modifier label
OtherScope label, detail
Project label, detail
Resource label, detail
ResourceVariant_Enum label, detail
SamplingEvent label, detail
SexStatus_Enum label, detail, abbreviation
StatisticalMeasure_Enum label, abbreviation

All mentioned entities may be edited using the translationseditor. If for an output a translation language is specified, a situation may occur that for a certain entity not translation is stored in the database. In those cases automatically the original database values will be used. 

As you can see in the table above, no translations are supported for the descriptive data, i.e. summary or sampling data. Concerning categorical data, there is a tranlsation support, because the terminology parts (Descriptor and CategoricalState) my be translated. Quatitative data mainly include numeric values and their statistical measure, where the measure texts themselves can be translated. The same is valid for descriptor status data. Molecular sequence data naturally do not contain any translatable texts. Finally only the contents of text descriptor data and notes, that can be included in any summary or sampling data, are not supported for translation.

 

Data export

The export format SDD is XML based and offers multilingual support. By default the document language ist set to the project default language and the original database entries (labels, detail texts and so on) are included without explicit language tag. If translations are stored in the database, they are included in the SDD output with their specific language tag. As an option translations may be completely excluded from export or the SDD document language may even be switched to one of the available translation languages. Please be aware, that the enumerated values (DataStatus_Enum, StatisticalMeasures_Enum and SexStatus_Enum) are identified by specific tags within SDD. Therefore the translations for these are not included in the SDD file! 

The export format DELTA is text based and does not support multilinguality. By default the original database entries are used in the DELTA output. If translations are stored in the database, you may select one of the available languages for the DELTA output.

In both cases the general rule applies that if for a certain term no translated value is present, the original value will be used. For details concerning the data export see here.

 

Data import

In the SDD import form the available languages are displayed. You have the options to omit translations during import or select a different language as the project’s default language. 

The DELTA import form offers the option to import translations for descriptors, categorical states and description items from separate DELTA files with identical structure. In a first step the complete data are imported form a main DELTA file. In subsequent steps the identifier for additional languages may be imported from additional language specific DELTA files. 

 

Document generators

The is a number of document generators to generate HTML or Media Wiki output. In this form an “Export language” field is shown if any translations are available in the database. In those cases you have the choice to adjust the default language or one of the offered tranlsations languages. Anyway, there may be some fixed expressions in the generated documents, where currently no mutilingual support is available.  

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Translations

Edit Language Codes

Edit language codes

In the Diversity Descriptions database language codes are used for two purposes: The first one is to indicate the project’s default language. Furthermore for the most important parts of the data translations may be entered, which carry a laguage code, too.

By all means the language codes consists of an at most three-letter string. In the application you may select the language code from a drop-down box, which shows the language code - in most cases a two-letter ISO 639-1 code - and the corresponding long name. By clicking the button you may change the display sequence (see images below).      

Most of the values are provided by the operating system. Anyway there might be the need to include additional values, e.g. “eo” for Esperanto. For those cases as a second source additional language codes may be stored in the application’s settings. Finally, language codes that are present in the database but neither included in the operating system’s list nor the application settings will be included at the end of the selection list with red background, if neccessary. 

To edit the language codes, click the button and a new window will open (see image below). The operating system’s entries are shown with a light blue background and cannot be modified. The language codes that are stored in the application settings are shown with white background and may be edited. To enter a new value, use the empty line at the end of the table. To delete an entry, mark the whole line by clicking on the row header and press the delete key on the keyboard. 

   

By clicking OK the changes will be stored in the settings.

Jan 14, 2025

Edit Translations

Editing translations

After connecting a database select Edit -> Translations … from the menu (see image below). You have to select the mandatory parameter Project and the Table. If you want to enter a new translation text, the Column and the target Language must be selected. If you omit one of those parameters, only existing tranlation texts from the database will be shown. Anyway the number of translations that match the currently selected criteria will be shown in field Translations in the upper right area of the form.

You man change the display and sorting of the entries in the Language combo box from “<code> - <description>” to “<description> - <code>” (and back) by clicking the button . If you need language codes that are not included in the list, click the button. For more details see Edit language codes.

With the numeric control Items you may adjust how many database items shall be selected for display. After clicking the button the query results are displayed. By clicking the buttons and you can load the next rsp. previous matches. 

When you select a Column, an additional text box Filter is activated, where you may restrict the displayed datasets to matching entries in the Original text (see image below). In field Start ID the first ID of the current output is shown. You may enter a dedicated value to be used for the next output. 

The table lists the internal ID of the data entry (“ID”), the table column (“Column”), the project language (“PL”), the “Original text”, the translation language (“TL”) and the “Translated text” (see image below). In table column “x” lines without write access will be marked as  x . If you have write access, you may enter the tranlated text directly in the table. 

   

You may copy the original text of selected lines to the translated text by clicking the button or delete the translated text with button . To select all translated texts click on button . In modified lines the background color of the first two columns will be change to yellow (see image below). With button you can save the modified data, with button you can reload the table, i.e. discard the changes. 

If you selected any Translated text entries, it is possible to modify several values simultaneously. Therefore select the table entries that shall be edited - by clicking the button you may select the whole table column. Then select the required operation in the Edit section: “Insert”, “Append” or “Replace” and enter the new rsp. new and old value. After clicking the action button - depending on the selected operation this is (Insert), (Append) or (Replace).

By double-clicking the table line or clicking the button you can open a separate edit window (see image below). This form works almost in the same way as the Extended text editor.

  

 

Jan 14, 2025

Summarize Data

Summarize data

Currently the following functions for summarizing data are available:

Summarize descriptions : Summarize the data of selected descriptions and create a new one or update an existing description.

Summarize sample data : Summarize the sample data of selected descriptions and update their summary data.

 

Summarizing methods

Depending on the selected summarizing function either the descriptor data of selected descriptions or the sampling data of the selected descriptions build the data source. Summarization of the data is done according their data type.

 

Categorical summary data

For building of categorical summary data the single categorical states of the data sources are accumulated. In general for each states test notes can be entered. To summarize the text notes, the different notes are accumulated (append in a new line), if they are not yet included in the summary note.

If modifier have to be processed, each combination of a categerical state and a modifier will be treated as separate values. Summarization of notes text will be done separately for each of these tuples. Only modifiers that are assigned to a descriptor as recommended modifier (see Editing the descriptor - Descriptor tree tab ) are evaluated, otherwise the modifier values are ignored.

Categorical descriptors may be marked as “exclusive”, which means that only on state may be selected. If the approptiate option is set for the summarization, the categorical states that is most often selected in the source data will be used in the target. 

 

Quantitative summary data

For building of quantitative summary data from the numeric values of the data sources all recommended statistical measures (see Editing thedescriptor - Descriptor tree tab ) for the processed descriptor are calculated. Text notes are accumulated for each statistical measure the same way as described for categorical summary data.

If modifier have to be processed, all the modifier are accumulated for eache statistical measure. Since in the resulting quantitative summary data only one modifier value is allowed for each statistical measure, the most often used modfier is inserted.

 

Text descriptor data

To summarize the text descriptor data, the different texts are accumulated (append in a new line), if they are note yet included in the summary text. Text notes are accumulated in the same way.

 

Molecular sequence data

To summarize the molecular sequence data, the different sequences are accumulated (append in a new line), if they are note yet included in the target sequence. Text notes are accumulated in the same way.

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Summarize Data

Statistical Measures

Statistical measures

The following table gives an overview of the available statistical measures. In column Calculation a hint is given, how the measuere is calculated from the basic data rows.

Name Abbr. Calculation
Lower range limit (human estimate) - x1..xn sorted list: x1
Upper range limit (human estimate) + x1..xn sorted list: xn
Central or typical value (human estimate) centr. x1..xn sorted list: xn/2
Lower range limit (legacy data stat. meth. unknown) -(?) x1..xn sorted list: x1
Upper range limit (legacy data stat. meth. unknown) +(?) x1..xn sorted list: xn
Central or typical value (legacy data stat. meth. unknown) centr.(?) x1..xn sorted list: xn/2
Minimum value Min Absolute smallest value
Maximum value Max Absolute largest value
Mean (= average) μ μ=(1/n)∑(n)xi
Harmonic mean hμ=n/(∑(n)(1/xi))
hμ=0 if any xi=0
Geometric mean gμ=n√∏(n)xi
Mode mode Value that appears most often (ambigious!)
Median med. x1..xn sorted list
n odd: med=x(n+1)/2
n even: med=(xn/2+x(n/2+1))/2
Interquartile mean (= average) IQM x1..xn sorted list
IQM=μ(x0.25n+1..x0.75n+1)
Variance (sample df = n-1) Var. Sn-1=(1/n-1)∑(n)(xi-μ)2
Variance (population; df = n; rarely applicable!) Var. (pop.) Sn=(1/n)∑(n)(xi-μ)2
Standard deviation (sample) s.d. σn-1=√Sn-1
Standard deviation (population; df = n; rarely applicable!) s.d. (pop.) σn=√Sn
Mean deviation m.d. md=(1/n)∑(n)|xi-μ|
Mean deviation from median m.d.m. mdm=(1/n)∑(n)|xi-med|
Coefficient of variation (sample) CV CV=σn
Corrected coefficient of variation (sample) CVC CVC=σn-1
Total range TR x1..xn sorted list
TR=xn-x1
Interquartile range IQR x1..xn sorted list
IQR=x0.75n+1-x0.25n+1
Standard error of mean s.e. σxn-1/√n
Standard error of variance (of multiple samples) s.e.(var.) Sx=Sn-1/n
Skewness Skw. ϒ1=(1/n)∑(n)((xi-μ)/σ)3
Kurtosis Kurt. Kurt=(1/n)∑(n)((xi-μ)/σ)4
Sample size n Number of values

 

Adjust display sequence

You may adjust the display sequence of the statistical measures for the whole database. Choose Administation -> Database -> Statistical measures … from the menu. A window will open as shown below.

  

The sequence number column (“No.”) determines the display sequence in various forms. You may order the entries by clicking on a column header. With the arrow buttons ( ) you can move the selected entries up or down within the table, clicking button or shifts the selected entries to the top respective bottom of the table. After ordering the entries click button to renumber the table entries (starting with “1” for the first table entry) and make the changes effective. To save the changes in the database, leave the form with the OK button, to discard all changes click the Abort button. 

 

May 3, 2024

Summarize Descriptions

Summarize description data

With this form you can summarize the information of selected descriptions and store the summarized data in a new description or update an existing one. After connecting a database select Edit -> Summarize descriptions … from the menu.

 

Description selection

 In the first tab Description selection you search for the source descriptions that shall be summarized into a new or an existing target description (see image below).

You have to select at least the mandatory parameter Project and start a query with button . From the result list superfluous entries may be removed with the button. For a detailled description of the query control please refer to section Query.

 

Descriptor selection

In tab Descriptor selection select the descriptors that shall be summarized in table column OK (see image below). You can select rsp. deselect all descriptors with buttons and . Button inverts all selections. To select all categorical, quantitative, text or sequence descriptors the buttons , , and are avaiable. With button you may select a descriptor tree rsp. descriptor tree node to select all descriptors assigned to the selected element.

   

For quantitative descriptors a statistical measure must be specified where the values for summarization are available. When the descriptor table is filled, for each quantitative descriptor the available recommended measures are checked if one of the measures “Mean (= average)”, “Central or typical value (human estimate)”, “Central or typical value (legacy data stat. meth. unknown)”, “Mode” or “Sample size” is available (priority in this sequence), it is pre-selected in colum Measure. You may modify this adjustment for each single descriptor or use button to change the setting for all selected descriptors. 

 

Generator options

In section Summarize options you may specify to Ignore notes and to Ignore modfier values of the source descriptions. If you select Restrict exclusive descriptors, the most often selected categorical state of a “exclusive” descriptor will be set instead of accumulating all source values. Accumulate scopes will collect all scope values, Accumulate resources all resources of the source descriptions to the target. Write item count will enter notes containing information about the number of collected items in the summary data. If you additionally select Write detailled notes, the source description IDs will be listed in the notes. Finally, Write summary infomation inserts a summary about summarized descriptions into the target description details (see image below).

In section Target description you may select the Target project (usually the same as the source description’s). You may either create a New description and enter the description name or Update a description selected form a drop-down list.  

In section Status data you may control the summarization behaviour for every descriptor data status value:

  • Ignore    
    If in a summarized description the corresponding data status is present for a descriptor value, it will be summarized but the descriptor data status will not be set in the target description.
  • Summarize
    As for Ignore the descriptor values will be summarized. Additionally the descriptor data status will be set in the target description.
  • Omit data
    If in a summarized description the corresponding data status is present for a descriptor value, it will not be summarized and the descriptor data status will not be set in the target description.

After checking the settings click in button Start generator . During processing the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort by clicking the button. In the Preview area a table with the generated rsp. updated target description (coloured background, may be change with button ) and the summarized source descriptions (grey background) is shown. If the target description has been modified, this is indicated ba a yellow background of the description title (see image above). Updated values are shown as blue text. By double-clicking on a field in the preview table you may view the contents in a separate browser window. To save the updated values and close the window click the OK button. To exit without saving click Abort. In this case you will be asked if you want to save modified data.

Since building the preview table may take some time, especially if a lot of descriptors have been selected, you may use the button Recalculate for restarting the summary process. In this case the descriptor columns will not be re-built, only the summary data will be calculated and actualized. This feature may be useful, if you change some settings an want to update the data. If you use the Recalculate button with an empty preview table, only the description titles will be displayed. Anyway you can view the summarized data using the button (see below).

You may store all changed entries by clicking the button or omit all changes and reload the data by clicking the button. To view the description details of the currently selected entry click the button and a separate browser window opens (see image below). 

  

 

Jan 14, 2025

Summarize Sampling Data

Summarize sample data

With this form you can summarize the information of selected descriptions and store the summarized data in a new description or update an existing one. After connecting a database select Edit -> Summarize sample data … from the menu.

 

Description selection

 In the first tab Description selection you search for the desriptions that shall be updated by their summarized sample data (see image below).

You have to select at least the mandatory parameter Project and start a query with button . From the result list superfluous entries may be removed with the button. For a detailled description of the query control please refer to section Query.

 

Descriptor selection

In tab Descriptor selection select the descriptors that shall be summarized in table column OK (see image below). You can select rsp. deselect all descriptors with buttons and . Button inverts all selections. To select all categorical, quantitative, text or sequence descriptors the buttons , , and are avaiable. With button you may select a descriptor tree rsp. descriptor tree node to select all descriptors assigned to the selected element.

   

 

Generator options

In section Summarize options you may specify to Ignore notes and to Ignore modfier values of the description’s sample data. If you select Restrict exclusive descriptors, the most often selected categorical state of a “exclusive” descriptor will be set instead of accumulating all source values. Accumulate scopes will collect all scope values of the sampling events (geographic areas) and sampling units (specimen) in the description summary. Write item count will enter notes containing information about the number of collected items in the summary data. If you additionally select Write detailled notes, the source description IDs will be listed in the notes. Finally, Write summary infomation inserts a summary about summarized sampling events into the target description details (see image below).

In section Descriptions and sampling events you find the descriptions from the query result list in tab Description selection and their sampling events. You may exclude single sampling events or even the whole description form the summarization. In the latter case the description data will not be changed.  

After checking the settings click in button Start generator . During processing the icon of the button changes to  and you may abort by clicking the button. In the Preview area a table with the updated target descriptions (coloured background, may be change with button ) and the summarized sampling units (grey background) is shown. If the target description has been modified, this is indicated ba a yellow background of the description title (see image above). Updated values are shown as blue text. By double-clicking on a field in the preview table you may view the contents in a separate browser window. To save the updated values and close the window click the OK button. To exit without saving click Abort. In this case you will be asked if you want to save modified data.

Since building the preview table may take some time, especially if a lot of descriptors have been selected, you may use the button Recalculate for restarting the summary process. In this case the descriptor columns will not be re-built, only the summary data will be calculated and actualized. This feature may be useful, if you change some settings an want to update the data. If you use the Recalculate button with an empty preview table, only the description titles will be displayed. Anyway you can view the summarized data using the button (see below).

You may store all changed entries by clicking the button or omit all changes and reload the data by clicking the button. To view the description details of the currently selected entry click the button and a separate browser window opens (see image below). 

  

 

Jan 14, 2025

Generate Document

Generate document

This tool is used to generate a structured documentation of database contents. To use this tool, start a query and choose Data →  Generate Document … from the menu. The entries of the query result will be passed to the form and depending on the query type (description, descriptor or project) different output options will be provided.

For details check the following pages:

    Generate a description data document

    Generate a descriptor data document

    Generate a project data document

 

Translations and wording

In most of the forms for document generation a control for adjusting the Export language as shown below is included. The drop down box always offers an item “(default)” and language codes for all translation languages available in the database. If you select the default value, the original labels, details a.s.o. is used in the generated document. If you select a specific language code, the corresponding tranlated values are exported. If no tranlation is stored in the database for a specific value, the original value is used instead. 

  

If you select the option Use wording, for descriptions, descriptors and categorical states the values of the fields “wording” are exported instead of the names. For summary data additionally the values “wording before” and “wording after”, which may be specified for each descriptor, are inserted before and after the values. If no wording is specified, the original name is used.    

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Generate Document

Generate Descriptions

Generate a description data document

This tool is used to generate a structured documentation of description data stored in the database. To use this tool, start a query for descriptions and choose Data ->  Generate document … from the menu. A window with will open as shown below.

You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. Choose among the provided options and click on the button Create … documentation to create a document in one of the available formats.

By default no descriptions will be exported that include any descriptor with data status “Data withheld”. This is indicated by the button in the upper right corner of the window. You may click on this button to include those descriptions. The button will change to and only the marked descriptor summary data will be excluded from the document. 

 

HTML

If you create a HTML documentation, a local file named <Database name>_Description.htm is generated in the application directory, that might be copied and edited for own purposes. If you select option Include descriptors, the used descriptors are included at the end of the documents and links to that empedded descriptors are set in the description section. Otherwise the links are set to the entries specified in the Descriptor file: text box. By clicking button Select colors you may open a dialog window where you can select the colors of different elements (see window below).

If all descriptions in the selection box belong to the same project and a descriptor tree is defined, the Descriptor tree: drop-down list is shown in the options (see image below left). If a descriptor tree is selected and the Structured output keeps activated, the description data are arranged according the selected descriptor trees. Additionally leading descriptor name parts are omitted, if they are contained in the descriptor tree hierachy. Therefore “literature references” becomes to “references” contained in node “Literature” as shown below. If the selected descriptor tree contains only a subset of descriptors, only this subset will be displayed in the output. 

If the Structured output option is deactivated, all descriptors will be included in the output in the standard sequence order. Leading name parts will be reduced if they are already contained in the tree hierarchy as described in the Editing the description - Continuous viewtab section. With check box Include data titles the output of the titles “State”, “Text” and “Sequence” in the descriptor data can be controlled. If you select Resolve scopes, for each scope that is linked to a database entry a table with the foreighn database values will be inserted. To check and adjust the module connections click on button

If in the datasets RTF-like formatting tags like \i or \sub{} are included, use option Accept RTF mark-ups as shown in the picture below. 

 

MediaWiki

If you create a MediaWiki documentation, you may copy the generated text from the output window and insert it in the MediaWiki page. With the Layout option you may determine if all data shall be included in a large table or if several tables with additional header lines shall be generated (see image below). 

If all descriptions in the selection box belong to the same project and a descriptor tree is defined, the Descriptor tree: drop-down list is shown in the options (see image below left). If a descriptor tree is selected and the Restricted option is activated, the description data are restricted to the descriptors contained in the selected descriptor tree. 

If the Restriced option is deactivated, all descriptor data will be included in the output in the standard sequence order. Only name parts of the descriptor tree hierarchy will be included in the descriptor names as described in the Editing the description - Descriptor viewtab section. 

 

Pensoft content

If you like to publish description data in some online media, e.g. the Pensoft “Biodiversity Data Journal”, the description data are expected in a dedicated Microsoft Excel format. A template fille as shown below, that includes several tables, is available. DiversityDescriptions allows generating tabulator separated files for tables “Taxa” and “SpeciesDescriptionMatrix” of that template. 

If all descriptions in the selection box belong to the same project and a descriptor tree is defined, the Descriptor tree: drop-down list is shown in the options (see image below). If a descriptor tree is selected, the description data are arranged with heading according the selected descriptor trees. Additionally leading descriptor name parts are omitted, if they are contained in the descriptor tree hierachy.

When Ignore data status ist selected, it will not be included in the “CharacterValue” column. Option Ignore RTF mark-ups will remove RTF-like formatting tags like \i or \sub{}. If option Ignore notes is de-selected, notes will be inserted in the “Remarks” column of the “SpeciesDescriptionMatrix”.

If you select Resolve scopes and a scope entry for a taxon name is linked to an entry in DiversityTaxonNames, the corresponding fields of the “Taxa” table will be filled with that data. To check and adjust the module connections click on button . If scope data for a geographic area is available, it will be inserted in the “Distribution” column of the “Taxa” table.  

The results are stored in local files named <Database name>_Taxa.txt and <Database name>_SpeciesDescriptionMatrix.txt

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Generate Descriptors

Generate a descriptor data document

This tool is used to generate a structured documentation of descriptors stored in the database. To use this tool, start a query for descriptors and choose Data ->  Generate Document … from the menu. A window will open as shown below.

You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. Choose among the provided options and click on the button Create … documentation to create a document in one of the available formats.

 

HTML

If you create a HTML documentation, a local file named <Database name>_Descriptor.htm is generated in the application directory, that might be copied and edited for own purposes. By clicking button Select colors you may open a dialog window where you can select the colors of different elements (see window below).

If in the datasets RTF-like formatting tags like \i or \sub{} are included, use option Accept RTF mark-ups as shown in the picture below. 

 

MediaWiki

If you create a MediaWiki documentation, you may copy the generated text from the output window and insert it in the MediaWiki page. With the Layout option you may determine if all data shall be included in a large table or if several tables with additional header lines shall be generated (see image below). 

 

May 3, 2024

Generate Projects

Generate a project data document

This tool is used to generate a structured documentation of project related data stored in the database. To use this tool, start a query for projects and choose Data ->  Generate Document … from the menu. A window will open as shown below.

You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. Choose among the provided options and click on the button Create … documentation to create a document in one of the available formats.

 

HTML

If you create a HTML documentation, a local file named <Database name>_Project.htm is generated in the application directory, that might be copied and edited for own purposes. By clicking button Select colors you may open a dialog window where you can select the colors of different elements (see window below).

You have the choice to output additional information besides the basic project data by selection the options Include descriptor trees, Include descriptor data or Include applicabilities (see window below).

 

MediaWiki

If you create a MediaWiki documentation, you may copy the generated text from the output window and insert it in the MediaWiki page. With the Layout option you may determine if all data shall be included in a large table or if several tables with additional header lines shall be generated (see image below). 

If you specify values in text fields Replace: and by: you can perform text replacements for Descriptor or Categorical state names in the generated output. By specifying a Prefix: for a Semantic MediaWiki (see next section) you can generate lokal links to this kind of Wiki pages. Additionally, you may insert the absolute link adresses by entering the base Wiki address in the URI: filed.  

 

Semantic MediaWiki

If you create a Semantic MediaWiki documentation, the descriptors, categorical states, descriptor trees and descriptor applicability information are generated in a format that fits to terminology platforms as used e.g by TDWG. In this scheme the most important entities are “Concept” and “Collection”. Each “Concept” represents a single descriptor or categorical state value, which is shown on an own page. Each “Collection” represents a single descriptor tree or descriptor tree node, which is shown on an own page. The pages are named according the schema <prefix>:<entity label> [(<number>)], where the <number> parts may be optional, depending on the Naming: setting (see image below):

  • If Opt. order (Optional order) is selected the <number> part is omitted if the name is unambigious. Otherwise it starts with 1 for the first duplicate and is increased for each subsequent one to avoid duplicate page names. 
  • If Order is selected the <number> starts with 1 and is increased for each subsequent duplicate to guarantee unambigious page names.
  • If Entity ID is selected the <number> contains the database internal ID of each entry to guarantee unambigious page names.

The Cardinality option includes information about multiple occurance and the mandatory property in the descriptor concepts. By selecting the Include trees option the descriptor trees and the tree structure will be included as collections where subordinated tree nodes are represented by concatenated node names, e.g. <prefix>:<Tree name>.<Node 1 name>.<Node 2 name>. If you specify values in text fields Replace: and by: you can perform text replacements for Descriptor or Categorical state names in the generated output.

If Generate: XML for Wiki import is selected, the output is generated in an XML format that may be imported to a semantic media wiki. To show all generated data, the two templates “dwb_Descriptor” and “dwb_CategoricalState” must be inserted in the wiki.

If Generate: XSD/XML document is selected, an XML schema (XSD) is generated in the main window. If schema generation was ended without problems, a selection list will be shown where description items for the XML document may be selected. For the selected descriptions an XML document structured according the XSD will be shown in a separate window. By default no descriptions will be exported that include any descriptor with data status “Data withheld”. This is indicated by the button in the upper right corner of the window. You may click on this button to include those descriptions. The button will change to and only the marked descriptor summary data will be excluded from the document.

 

Descriptor applicability

The descriptor applicability tree shows the selected projects and as subordinated nodes the categorical descriptors that control the applicability of dependent descriptors. Contained in the controlling descriptor are their categorical states and the dependent descriptors with the applicability rule “applicable-if” or “inapplicable-if” . The descriptor names are prefixed with their sequence number in square brackets, the states with the descriptor’s sequence number and their own.

If you create a applicability tree documentation, two local tabulator-separated text files are generated. The first file named <Database name>_ApplicabilityNodes.txt contains the node list with columns “Id”, “Label” and “Modularity class” (“Project”, “Descriptor” or “State”). The second file named <Database name>_ApplicabilityEdges.txt contains the edges list with columns “Source”, “Target” and “Label” (“Includes” for project-descriptor relations, “Contains” for descriptor-state relations or “Applicable” rsp. “Inapplicable” for state-descriptor relations). You may import those files to a graphic program like “Gephi”  to visualize the descriptor applicabilities. 

By selecting the option Convert to applicable rule or Convert to inapplicable rule the applicability settings stored in the database can be converted to the required complatible format (see image below).

 

May 3, 2024

Generate Diagram

Generate diagram

This tool allows you to generate charts that show the categorical state or descriptor usage for one or more sets of descriptions. To use this tool, choose Data →  Generate diagram … from the menu. A window with will open as shown below.

There are the following diagram Types available:

 

Selecting diagram sources 

By default at least one control Diagram source is present in the area Data sources at the left of the window. Here you select the descriptions that shall be used as data source for a diagram series. In text box Series name you can enter a label for the data source that will appear in the diagram legend. After selecting the Project in the main window (see image above) click on the button Edit item list to open a description query form (see window below). 

Start a query and select the entries you want to take over into the result list. By clicking the button Add you insert the selected entries. With button Delete all you can clear the result list. You may select all entries by clicking the all button, deselect all entries by clicking the none button or toggle your selection by clicking the swap button. Finally, click OK to close the query window (see image below). 

 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Generate Diagram

Generate Diagram Cross Match

Generate diagram - categorical state cross-match

This tool allows you to generate a chart that shows the used categorical states of two specific descriptors for one set of descriptions as a cross-match. Select the Project and the two descriptors that shall be compared in Descriptor and Descriptor 2. By selecting the option Use names you will insert the categorical state names into the diagram. By checking the option Use wording, the wording values will be used if available. With the numeric control letters you can control the length of the state labels. If you select option Numbers, the sequence numbers of descriptors and categorical states will be inserted. Furthermore after the Series name the item count will be shown in the diagram.

After selecting entries for the Diagram source and entering a Series name click on button to draw the diagram (see image below). 

With button  you may switch between a 2D and 3D view. In the Diagram area there is a drop down box, where you may select a different color palette, buttons to rotate the 3D diagram in different directions, change the perspective and the scaling. With button you may save the diagram as an image file, with button you may store the data rows as tabulator separated text file. 

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Generate Diagram Multi Source

Generate diagram - categorical state usage

This tool allows you to generate a chart that shows the used categorical states of a specific descriptor for one or more sets of descriptions. Select the Project and the Descriptor. You may restrict the categorical states that shall be included into the diagram by clicking the Select states button. By selecting the option Use names you will insert the categorical state names and the descriptor name into the diagram. By checking the option Use wording, the wording values will be used if available. With the numeric control letters you can control the length of the state labels. If you select option Numbers, the sequence numbers of descriptors and categorical states will be inserted. Furthermore after the Series name the item count will be shown in the diagram.  

After selecting entries for the Diagram source and entering a Series name click on button to draw the diagram (see image below). 

With button  you may switch between a 2D and 3D view. In the Diagram area there is a drop down box, where you may select a different color palette, buttons to rotate the 3D diagram in different directions, change the perspective and the scaling. With button you may save the diagram as an image file, with button you may store the data rows as tabulator separated text file. 

In the Data sources area the button  Add source may be used to add additional data sources (see image below). Use buttons and to move the Diagram source to the top or bottom of the list and button to delete the data source. By selecting Hide you may temporarily ignore the data source for the diagram. With drop down button you may select the display of Relative values, i.e. values scaled to the number of items in the Diagram source or Absolute values in the diagram.

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Generate Diagram Usage

Generate diagram - descriptor usage

This tool allows you to generate a chart that shows the used desriptors for one or more sets of descriptions. After selecting the Project chose the first and the last descriptor in Descriptor and Descriptor 2. By selecting the option Use names you will insert the descriptor names into the diagram. By checking the option Use wording, the wording values will be used if available. With the numeric control letters you can control the length of the descriptor labels in the chart. If you select option Numbers, the sequence numbers of descriptors and categorical states will be inserted. Furthermore after the Series name the item count will be shown in the diagram.

After selecting entries for the Diagram source and entering a Series name click on button to draw the diagram (see image below). 

With button  you may switch between a 2D and 3D view. In the Diagram area there is a drop down box, where you may select a different color palette, buttons to rotate the 3D diagram in different directions, change the perspective and the scaling. With button you may save the diagram as an image file, with button you may store the data rows as tabulator separated text file. 

In the Data sources area the button  Add source may be used to add additional data sources (see image below). Use buttons and to move the Diagram source to the top or bottom of the list and button to delete the data source. By selecting Hide you may temporarily ignore the data source for the diagram. With drop down button you may select the display of Relative values, i.e. values scaled to the number of items in the Diagram source or Absolute values in the diagram.

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Generate State Statisctics

Generate state statistics

This tool allows you to generate a table that shows the used categorical state of two or three descriptors for a sets of descriptions. To use this tool, choose Data →  Generate state statistics … from the menu. A window with will open as shown below.

First select the Project. With the option Include and Exclude you may select descriptions that shall be included rsp. excluded from the evaluation. To use the option, select the check box. With buttons you can now open an query window to select the description items. If none of these options is selected, all descriptions of the selected Project will be the base of the statistics evaluation. 

In section Categorical states select the DescriptorsDescriptor 1 and Descriptor 2 are inserted in the first columns of the Output table, the states of Descriptor 3 are inserted as separate columns. You may restrict the categorical states that shall be included for a descriptor by clicking the Select states button besides it. If you only want to evaluate the cross-match of two descriptors, you may de-select the check box before Descriptor 2

In section Legens you may control the appearance of descriptor and state names. By selecting the option Use names you will insert the categorical state names and the descriptor name into the outptu table. By checking the option Use wording, the wording values will be used if available. With the numeric control letters you can control the length of the labels. If you select option Numbers, the sequence numbers of descriptors and categorical states will be inserted. 

Click on button Fill table in section Output to build the cross-reference table (see image below). During calculation the icon changes to and you have the option to abort the process by clicking this button. 

By clicking Save table to file you may store the data as tabulator-separated text file. After saving you may open the text file with an external editor by clicking View saved file (see image below). 

Click on button Show data as diagram to view the generated cross-reference data as diagram (see image below). 

 

Next page: Generate categorical state statisctics - Three descriptor cross-match

Jul 5, 2024

Subsections of Generate State Statisctics

Generate Three Descriptor Statisctics

Generate state statistics - Three descriptor cross-match

In the examples shown so far only a two descriptor cross-match between Descriptor 1 and Descriptor 3 has been shown. When you set the check mark before Descriptor 2, its categorical states will be included in the statsitical evaluation. The second descriptor will then be inserted in the second table column at the Output area. If you do not perform further settings, each combination of the selected states from Descriptor 1 and Descriptor 2 will be listet in the output table as shown below.

You may further restrict the output by clicking on button right besides Descriptor 2. For each categorical state of Descriptor 1 the number of assigned categorical states of Descriptor 2 is shown (see image below left). When you click on a button in column “Assigned states” you may select the categorical states of Descriptor 2 that shall belisted for the corresponding “First state” (see image below middle). If no “Assigned state” is selected, only the “First state” will be evaluated. 

     

After setting the state cross-reference (see image above right) click “OK”. In the state statistics form an active state selection is indicated by the icon (see image below).

 

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance

Maintenance

To open the maintenance form choose Administration → Database … → Maintenance … from the menu. The maintenance form offers functions for evaluation and update of multiple datasets that can hardly be achieved by the regular editing options, which focus on a single dataset. Currently the functions Synchronize databases, Update description scopes, Update resource data, Maintain descriptor trees, Maintain descriptors and Maintain descriptive data are available.

With the button  you can set the timeout for critical database queries, with the button  you can set the timeout for web requests used within maintenance. Feedbacks can be sent with the button .

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Maintenance

Maintenance Descriptions

Maintenance - Maintain descriptive data

To open the maintenance form choose Administration → Database … → Maintenance … from the menu and select the Maintain descriptive data tab. In the Descriptor status data tab you may set or reset the descriptor status of a categorical descriptor depending on its summary data. In the Categorical summary data tab you may shift and copy categorical summary data to a different descriptor or delete values for selected categorical states. In the Quantitative summary data tab you may perform such operations concerning statistical measures. With tab  Description project you may manage the additional projects of your description items. To find and delete corrupted descriptive data choose the Clean descriptive data tab. The tab  Find violation of rules offers query functions to find description items where rules concerning the descriptor usage are violated.

 

Commonly used description selection options

In the sub-panels you may set a descriptor status and move or copy categorical rsp. quantitative summary data. By default all descriptions from the selected project will be searched that fulfill the specified conditions, i.e. a certain categorical state or statistical measure. In certain cases it is neccessary to restrict the possibly affected descriptions by some additional conditions. For this purpose there is the option to define a restriction and/or an exclusion list (see example below).

By opening a query window (button ) you can generate a list of descriptions (see image below) that shall be included in the search (Description restriction) or excluded from the search (Description exclusion).  

The resulting numbers of restricted and excluded descriptions will be displayed in the controls. You may check the selected items by double-clicking the numbers (see images below).

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Descriptions

Maintenance Clean Descriptions

Maintenance - Clean descriptive data

Descriptive data, which can be summary or sampling data, are stored in the database in several tables, that reference the corresponding descriptor rsp. categorical state and hold some additional data. Depending on the descriptor type - categorical, quantitative, text or sequence - different tables are used to represent the descriptive data. Although Diversity Descriptions does not allow to change the type of a descriptor if descriptive data are present, in some cases it cannot be assured that such an action is rejected. The resulting data are then meaningless and will not be displayed within Diversity Descriptions. To find, check and delete such kinds of corrupted descriptive data, select the Maintain descriptive data tab and choose the tab Clean descriptive data.

Select the Data type (“Summary data” or “Sampling data”), the Entity type (i.e. the type of descriptive data in database: “categorical”, “quantitative”, “text” or “sequence”) and the Project. Click on Check for invalid data and all invalid data will be listed (see image below).

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To delete the selected entries from the database click on the button. Instead of deleting the selecting entries you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

You may open a table editor for the selected entries by clicking the Open table editor button (see image below). Here you may check the corrupted data to decide if further measures are required. 

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Description Projects

Maintenance - Description project

Description items belong to one basic projects, that determines the terminology. Additionally they may be assigned to additionalprojects to make them accessible within other contexts. To set or remove additional projects, select the Maintain descriptive data tab and choose the tab Description project.

Select the Project, Addtitional project and the requested operation Set additional project, Remove additional project or Swap projects to exchange the project and additional project. Click on Check for project data and the matching descriptions will be listed (see image below). The Description restriction and Description exclusion lists may be used for refinement of the description selection (see Maintain descriptivedata). 

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To delete the selected entries from the database click on the button. Instead of deleting the selecting entries you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Violations

Maintenance - Find violations of rules

With this form you ma easily search description items, that do not fulfill certain requirements. With the Mandatory descriptors tab you may find descriptions where data for mandatory descriptors are missing. With the Exclusive descriptors tab you may find descriptions that contain multiple states for exclusive descriptors. In the Applicability rules tab you may descriptions that violate rules administered in the Descriptorapplicability data. In the Ambigious descriptions tab you may search for ambigious description titles.  

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Maintenance Violations

Maintenance Ambiguous

Maintenance - Ambiguous description titles

In DiversityDescriptions the description titles may be ambiguous, even within one project. It depends on the informal project strategies if duplicate description titels shall be accepted, therefore there is no kind of highlighting. With this form you can easily find all descriptions with ambigious titles within a project.

After selecting the Project click on Check for violations and all found description items are listed in the table (see image above). If you select the option Ignore same state, mutiple occurances of the same state, e.g. when modifier of frequency values have been selected, will be ignored. By selecting an entry and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may view that dataset in a separate window.

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To save the selected table entries in a tab-separated text file click on the Export data button. Click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Exclusive

Maintenance - Exclusive descriptors

If a descriptor is marked as “exclusive”, in each description item only one categorical state value for this descriptor should be present. When you are editing a description in the Contiuousview violations of this rule are usually highlighted by a yellow background color. With this form you can easily find all descriptions violating the exclusivity condition.

After selecting the Project click on Check for violations and all found description items are listed in the table (see image above). If you select the option Ignore same state, mutiple occurances of the same state, e.g. when modifier of frequency values have been selected, will be ignored. By selecting an entry and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may view that dataset in a separate window.

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To save the selected table entries in a tab-separated text file click on the Export data button. Click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Mandatory

Maintenance - Mandatory descriptors

If a descriptor is marked as “mandatory”, in each description item a value for this descriptor should be present. When you are editing a description in the Contiuous view those missing data as usually highlighted by a yellow background color. With this form you can easily find all descriptions with missing mandatory descriptor data.

After selecting the Project click on Check for violations and all found description items are listed in the table (see image above). You may restrict the query to selected Descriptor types. If you select the option Evaluate status data, any present descriptor status, e.g. “To be checked” or “Data missing”, will be treated as if descriptor data were present. By selecting an entry and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may view that dataset in a separate window.

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To save the selected table entries in a tab-separated text file click on the Export data button. Click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Summary Categorical

Maintenance - Categorical summary data

To shift and copy categorical summary data to a different descriptor or delete values for selected categorical states, select the Maintain descriptive data tab and choose the tab Categorical summary data. In this panel you operate on the categorical summary data of the descriptions. If you want to shift or copy categorical states between descriptors, please use Maintenance - Categoricalstates

Select the Project and the Source descriptor. If you want to select a Target descriptor that is different than the Source descriptor, check the box before the Target descriptor and select a value. Click on Show categorical state mapping and all categorical state values of the selected Source descriptor will be listed in the upper table (see image below). Select the categorical states for which you want to modify the summary data in column >>.

The following operations are available:

  • Delete the summary data by leaving the Target state empty
  • Move the summary data by selecting the Target state
  • Copy the summary data by selecting the Target state and selecting the New column

In case the summary data are moved or copied, all relevant data including modifier and frequency values and notes will be processed. 

After adjusting the required operations for the selected categorical states click on Check for categorical states and all affected summary data will be listed in the lower table (see image above). The Description restriction and Description exclusion lists may be used for refinement of the description selection (see Maintain descriptivedata). For each affected Description and State of the categorical summary data the Action (DELETE, MOVE or INSERT) and New state are specified. If you check the option No state selected, you may search for descriptions that do not reference any state of the Source descriptor and set a state of the selected Target descriptor (see image below). 

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To perform the selected operations click on the button. Instead of updating the database you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Summary Quantitative

Maintenance - Quantitative summary data

To shift and copy quantitative summary data to a different descriptor or delete values for selected statistical measures, select the Maintain descriptive data tab and choose the tab Quantitative summary data

Select the Project and the Source descriptor. If you want to select a Target descriptor that is different than the Source descriptor, check the box before the Target descriptor and select a value. Click on Show statistical measure mapping and the assigned statistical measures of the selected Source descriptor will be listed in the upper table (see image below). If you want so process all available statistical measures, not only that ones assigned to the descriptors in the descriptor tree, check Show all source measures rsp. Show all target measures. Select the statistical measures for which you want to modify the summary data in column >>.

The following operations are available:

  • Delete the summary data by leaving the Target statistical measure empty
  • Move the summary data by selecting the Target statistical measure
  • Copy the summary data by selecting the Target statistical measure and selecting the New column

In case the summary data are moved or copied, all relevant data including modifier values and notes will be processed. 

After adjusting the required operations for the selected categorical states click on Check for statistical measures and all affected summary data will be listed in the lower table (see image above). The Description restriction and Description exclusion lists may be used for refinement of the description selection (see Maintain descriptivedata). For each affected Description and Measure of the quantitative summary data the Action (DELETE, MOVE or INSERT) an New measure are specified. You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To perform the selected operations click on the button. Instead of updating the database you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Summary Status

Maintenance - Descriptor status data

To set or reset a certain descriptor status for dedicated categorical summary data, select the Maintain descriptive data tab and choose the tab Descriptor status data

Select the Project, the Source descriptor and the Target descriptor status. Depending on the Source descriptor type you have different basic options to select the descriptions for which the descriptor data status shall be modified. For quantitative, text and molecular sequence descriptors, you may decide if the selected Descriptor value shall be present (option Value is present) or absent (option No value is present, see image below). This basic restriction may further be refined by selecting Description restriction and Description exclusion lists (see Maintaindescriptive data). Further select the data status and if it shall be set or reset using Action options.

After adjusting the required operations click on Check for descriptor status and all affected summary data will be listed in the lower table (see image above). For each affected Description the Action (DELETE or INSERT) and the Status are specified.

If you select a categorical Source descriptor, you have the basic selection options to modify the descriptor data status for specific Categorical state (option Specific state selected, see image below). In this case use the combobox to adjust the selected state. If you uncheck Specific state selected, you may search for descriptions where any State is present or No state is present. In any case the Description restriction and Description exclusion lists may again be used for further refinement of the description selection (see Maintain descriptive data).

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To perform the selected operations click on the button. Instead of updating the database you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the selected descriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Descriptors

Maintenance - Maintain descriptors

To open the maintenance form choose Administration → Database … → Maintenance … from the menu and select the Maintain descriptors tab. In the Categorical states tab you may shift and copy categorical states to a different descriptor or delete selected categorical states.  

 

 

Jul 5, 2024

Subsections of Descriptors

Maintenance Categorical States

Maintenance - Categorical states

To shift and copy categorical states to a different descriptor or delete selected categorical states, select the Maintain descriptors tab and choose the tab Categorical states. In this panel you operate on the categorical states of the descriptors. If you want to shift or copy categorical summary data in descriptions, please use Maintenance - Categoricalsummary data

Select the Project, the Source descriptor and the Target descriptor. Click on Show categorical state mapping and all categorical state values of the selected Source descriptor will be listed in the upper table (see image below). Select the categorical states you want to modify in column >>.

The following operations are available:

  • Delete the categorical state by leaving the Target state empty
  • Move the categorical state by entering the Target state
  • Copy the categorical state by entering the Target state and selecting the New column

In case the categorical states are moved or copied, associated fields as abbreviation and detail will be processed. State resources will not be copied. 

After adjusting the required operations for the selected categorical states click on Check for categorical states and the number of affected summary and sampling data will be listed in the lower table (see image above). For each State the Action (DELETE, MOVE or INSERT) and New state are specified. You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To perform the selected operations click on the button. If  Instead updating the database you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the affected descriptions.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Resources

Maintenance - Update resource data

To open the maintenance form choose Administration → Database … → Maintenance … from the menu and select the Update resource data tab. In the resource edit forms the resource data, e.g. the file size, of a single resource can be obtained from the remote server addressed by the resource link. If for a large number of resouces the data shall be updated it is much easier to select the Get resource data tab. To find and delete empty resources choose the Clean empty resources tab. 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Resources

Maintenance Clean Resources

Maintenance - Clean resources

In the database the “Resource” table holds the general resource data, e.g. copyright information, and links the resource to the target entity. The “ResourceVariant” table holds the link to the resource and allows to associate several links with distinguished quality levels to a single resource. To find resource entries that are not associated with any resource variant (“empty resources”), select the Update resource data tab and choose the tab Clean empty resources.

Select the Resource target (“Description”, “Descriptor”, “Categorical state” or “Descriptor tree node”) and the Project. Click on Check for empty resources and all resource links of the specified type will be listed where no resource variants are present in the database (see image below).

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To delete the selected resource entries from the database click on the button. Instead of updating the selecting entries you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the corresponding data sets.

You may open a table editor for the selected resources by clicking the Open table editor button (see image below).

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Get Resources

Maintenance - Get resource data

In the resource edit forms the resource data, e.g. the file size, of a single resource can be obtained from the remote server addressed by the resource link. If for a large number of resouces the data shall be updated it is much easier to select the Update resource data tab and choose the tab Get resource data.

Select the Resource target, (“Description”, “Descriptor”, “Categorical state” or “Descriptor tree node”), the Resource type (“image”, “audio”, “video”, “text”, “application” or “other”) and the Project. Click on Check resource data and all resource links of the specified type will be listed where the remote data of (“Mime type”, “File size”, “Width”, “Height” or “Duration”) differ from the database values (see image below). If the acces to a URL was not successfull, this is indicated by a red background color. To see the failure reason, move the mouse cursor over the entry.

The size of the query result list may be adapted by changing the value Number of results or unchecking this option to get the complete list. Usually only database links are checked that do not have any entry for “File size”, “Width”, “Height” and “Duration”. Select Check links with data to check entries with data, e.g. to update manually entered values. Since with this option allways all resources will be processed, the numeric control Skip first rows is available (see image below). So you may adjust Number of results to 200 and Skip first rows to 100 to check only the resource entries 101 to 200. 

When you select the option Update URL with response value, the URL returned by the web server will be compared with the requested URL. If there is a difference, re returned URL will be entered in the table and marked in column URL change (see image above). This option might be useful, if you have resource links stored with protocol type “http://” and the web server was updated to use encryption. In this case the URL changes to “htttps://”.

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To update the database click on the button.

You may open a table editor for the selected resource variants by clicking the Open table editor button (see image below).

Some resources, especially for resource types like “text” or “application”, do not even provide a file size. Therefore you might not get any new matches for subsequent check and update sequences if the number of results is limited. In those cases you should try to increase the number of results or deactivate the Number of results option.

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Scopes

Maintenance - Update description scopes

To open the maintenance form choose Administration → Database … → Maintenance … from the menu and select the Update description scopes tab. If you want to generate scope entries from description data, select the Generate scopes tab. With the Link entries  tab you may insert scope links to another database of the DiversityWorkbench. If you have linked descriptions to entries in DiversityCollection, you may import links of the referenced specimen rsp. observations to other databases by using the Import scopes tab. To find and delete empty scopes choose the Clean empty scopes tab. 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Scopes

Maintenance Clean Scopes

Maintenance - Clean empty scopes

If you want to find and delete scope entries that do not contain any data, select the Update description scopes tab and choose the tab Clean empty scopes.

Select the Scope type, e.g. “Taxon name” and the Project. Click on Check for empty scopes and all descriptions will be listed where no scope of the specified type is present and source data are available (see image below).

The size of the query result list may be adapted by changing the value Number of results or unchecking this option to get the complete list. You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none

If you select the option Include description IDs and start a new query (button Check for empty scopes) the result list will include the column DescriptionID. By selecting an entry and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may directly navigate to that dataset. If you click on button Close form and check list in database , you will return to the main form and find the selected entries in the description result list.

To update the database click on the button.

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Generate Scopes

Maintenance - Generate scopes

Especially if data are imported, e.g. from a DELTA file, data that can be stored as scope of a description are often contained in dedicated text or categorical descriptor data. For taxonomic descriptions often the item/description names reflect the taxonomic names. To generate formal scopes from such “embedded” data select the Update description scopes tab and choose the tab Generate scopes.

Select the Scope type, e.g. “Taxon name” and the Project. You may generate the Scope from description name or select a Source descriptor and the type Text or Categorical. Furthermore the whole source text (description name or text descriptor data) may be selected (option Copy whole text) or only the first parts (option Copy first parts). Click on Check for missing scopes and all descriptions will be listed where no scope of the specified type is present and source data are available (see image below).

The size of the query result list may be adapted by changing the value Number of results or unchecking this option to get the complete list (see image below). You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none

If you select the option Include description IDs the button Inspect dataset will be shown (see image below). By starting a new query (button Check for missing scopes) the result list will now include the column DescriptionID. By selecting an entry and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may directly navigate to that dataset. To update the database click on the button. 

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Import Scopes

Maintenance - Import scopes

If you have linked description items to DiversityCollection, either by as scope type “Specimen” or “Observation”, you have the option to import links to other databases e.g. to a taxon entry that is present in DiversityCollection. Select the Update description scopes tab and choose the tab Import scopes.

Select the Scope type that shall be imported, e.g. “Sampling plot” and the Project. The Link to collection may be “Specimen” or “Observation”. You have three options to search for descriptions that are liked to DiversityCollection:

  • Insert missing scopes searches any description item that is linked to DiversityCollection and you may import the specified links as new scope values.
  • Insert if no scope is present searches only description items that are linked to DiversityCollection and do not yet have an entry of the selected Scope type.
  • Delete not matching scopes offers the option to remove scope entries from description items of the selected Scope type that are not present in the references collection entry.   

For the latter two options you may decide to Ignore unlinked scopes. Click on Search for descriptions and all descriptions will be listed where the selected conditions match (see image below). You may select or deselect all entries of the description list for the database query by clicking the buttons Select all descriptions rsp. Select no description . If you want to view a single description item, click on it in the result list and then click button Inspect dataset .

In a second step you can now check the linked collection entries for matching links to the selected scope type. The size of the query result list may be adapted by changing the value Number of results. Click on button to open the connections administration form where you may connect missing collection databases.

Start a query for links in DiversityCollection with button Check for matching entries. Description entries with found links are marked with green background, without links with yellow background. If Number of results is selected, only the specified number of entries in the descriptions list will be processed. Depending on the selected options the modified entries will be shown and the “Action” will be “INSERT” or “DELETE” (see image below). After updatig the database, you may process the next package in the description list by a further click on Check for matching entries

In case of new entries the “Scope text” will be taken over from DiversityCollection if possible, otherwise it will be set to the selected scope type. After updating the database, you may use Synchronize databases to update the display text in DiversityDescriptions.  

You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none. To update the database click on the button. 

 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Link Scopes

If you have entries in DiversityDescriptions that shall be linked with data in other DiversityWorkbench databases that have a partly equal name, this may generally be done with two subsequent maintenance tasks. An example are taxonomic descriptions in that shall be linked with their corresponding entries in DiversityTaxonNames. In a first step taxon scopes must be generates, e.g. from the first two parts of the description names with Generate scopes. With a second step the generated scope may be linked to the target database using Synchroniuze databases. For descriptions without matching entries in the target database unlinked scopes will be remaining.

To generate the links with one step and avoid generating unlinked scopes select the Update description scopes tab and choose the tab Link entries. Select the Scope type, the Project and the Target database. Option Only if no scope present filters for description items that do not have a scope entry of the selected scope type. Furthermore the whole description name may be selected (option Compare whole text) or only the first parts (option Compare first parts). Click on Check for missing scopes and all descriptions will be listed where no scope of the specified type is present and source data are available (see image below).

The size of the query result list may be adapted by changing the value Number of results or unchecking this option to get the complete list (see image below). You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none

If you select the option Include description IDs the button Inspect dataset will be shown (see image above). By starting a new query (button Check for missing scopes) the result list will now include the column DescriptionID. By selecting an entry and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may directly navigate to that dataset. To update the database click on the button. 

If more than one matching entry is available in the Target database the entry is marked with blue background in the result list (see image above). With button Select value   you may view the available alternatives and select the correct entry (see image below). 

 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Synchronize

Maintenance - Synchronize databases

To open the maintenance form choose Administration → Database … → Maintenance … from the menu and select the Synchronize databases tab. With the maintenance functions you can update values cached from other modules or external webservices. Entries in Diversity Descriptions can be linked with several other modules of the Diversity Workbench, e.g. by the Description scopes. If you link a data source to another module, the URI of the data set in the other module together with one or several cached values will be stored in Diversity Descriptions. Due to changes in the source modules these cached values may differ from the original values. To get the actual values you can use the  synchronize functions for taxonomic names, specimen and observations geographical names, sampling plots, and references. Additionally broken links can be searched an repaired.

 

Commonly used database synchronization options

In the sub-panels several commonly used options and controls are available. First the source database must be selected, where the referenced data are stored. In the example shown below this is the Taxonomy database. Click on button to open the connections administration form where you may connect missing databases. The second parameter that has to be specified is the Descriptions project that contains the datasets which have to be checked or updated. If datasets of Diversity Descriptions are not yet linked to another module, the project of the source database may be specified (Taxonomy project in example below).

By starting a query (button Check for differences, Check for identical names or Start check) you will get a result list of database entries that can be updated (see image below). In this example the first result entry represents two datasets in Diversity Descriptions (column Number). In column DescriptionIds the range of the affected database internal IDs is shown. You may select or deselect single entries of the result list for the database update in column OK.

The size of the query result list may be adapted by changing the value Number of results or unchecking this option to get the complete list (see image below). If datasets of Diversity Descriptions are not yet linked to another module, the query in Diversity Descriptions may be restricted by specifying a value in the field Restrict to names starting with. You may select or deselect all entries of the result list for the database update by clicking the buttons Select all rsp. Select none

If you select the option Include description IDs the buttons Inspect dataset and Close and view will be shown. By starting a new query (button ) the result list will now include the columns Description and DescriptionID instead of DescriptionIds and Number (see image below). Furthermore each dataset entry will now be shown in an own result line.  

By selecting an entry in the result table and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may view the dataset in a sepate window. With button Close and view you can close the maintenance form without changing the database and view or edit all enteries that are checked in column “OK” of the result table in the main program window. 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Synchronize

Maintenance Broken Links

Broken links to other databases occur when the database’s name has been change or if it was moved to a different server. To find and repair broken links to the modules of the Diversity Workbench select the Synchronize databases tab and choose the tab Broken links. The meaning of some generally used controls is explained in the introduction page of database synchronization

Select the Link type, e.g. “Taxon name” to search broken links to DiversityTaxonNames and the Descriptions project. Select the Search for broken links option and start the query with a click on the Search for broken links button. If the link type “Geographic area” or “Specimen” has been selected, an additional selection box for the Descriptions table appears, where you may select from “Description scope” or " Sampling event" rsp. " Sampling unit". Each link of the selected type and project will checked if it can be connected to the referenced database and unsuccessful connection attemts will be listed in the data grid view (see image below).

Keep in mind that the connection check might be unsuccessful for remote databases, if the database connection was not set up before! 

If you prefer to remove some broken links, you may now select them and then click button . If you want to connect the links to a database, chose the new target in combo box Database and click the Check matches in database button. The check is successful, if the new databese contains an entry with the same ID and display text and the results will be selected and shown with white background (see image below).

If in the new database a matching link was found but the display text differs, the entries are marked  with yellow background. For these lines you should check the “New name” column and if the found entry is applicable you may select the entry for update. If no matching entry in the database was found, it is marked with grey background (see image above). To update the database click on the button.

 

Delete unlinked scope entries

As an additional option you may search for unlinked scope entries and remove them completely from the database. Select the option Search for unlinked entries and then click on the Search for broken links button. Select the entries you want to delete and click button (see image below).

 

The webservice “Catalogue of Life” was changed several times. Links to old versions are not readable anymore, therefore new matching entries have to be found. Select the option Search for old Catalogue of Life links and then click on the Search for broken links button. If you only want to remove the invalid links and keep the unlinked scope entry, click on button (see image below).

To find matching entries in the current webservice, select a option Check full name or Compare first parts and click on the Check matches in the database button. If the name in your data does not match the name in the webservice perfectly, it will be marked with a yellow background. If no name matches exactly and there are several entries, the line is marked with blue background (see image below). 

You have the option to select the best match by a click on button Select name (see image below).

Finally, click on the button to enter the results in the database.

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Collection

Maintenance - Collection

To synchronize the entries for the specimen or observations derived from the module DiversityCollection select the Synchronize databases tab and choose the tab Collection. There are two ways to synchronize specimen and observations. You may either Synchronize entities with a link to DiversityCollection for entries where the link to a taxonomic database is already established or you may Synchronize entities missing a link to DiversityCollection where no link is established and you can query for identical names in one of the databases. The meaning of some generally used controls is explained in the introduction page of database synchronization.

Synchronize entities with a link to DiversityCollection

The specimen and observations are stored as field “label” of table DescriptionScope, where the scope type Specimen or Observation specified. Alternatively the field collection_specimen of table SamplingUnit can be updated. Select a collection database, the descriptions project and the scope type that shall be synchronized. Start the query with a click on the  button.

 

The form will list all differences found. To update the database click on the button.

 

Synchronize entities missing a link to DiversityCollection

Select the collection database, optionally a project within this database, a project in the descriptions database, the descriptions teble and the scope type Specimen or Observation to search for identical names. Start the query with a click on the button. To use these similar names check them in the OK column. 

 

The form will list all matches found. To insert the links to the database click on the button.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Gazetteer

Maintenance - Gazetteers

To synchronize the entries for the geographic places derived from the module DiversityGazetteers select the Synchronize databases tab and choose the tab Gazetteers. There are two ways to synchronize geographic names. You may either Synchronize places linked to DiversityGazetteers for entries where the link to a gazetteers database is already established or you may Synchronize places missing a link to DiversityGazetteers where no link is established and you can query for identical names in one of the databases. The meaning of some generally used controls is explained in the introduction page of database synchronization.

Synchronize places linked to DiversityGazetteers

The geographic names are stored as field “label” of table Descriptionscope with the scope type GeographicArea or in field “geographic_area” of table SamplingEvent. Select a gazetteers database, the descriptions project and the descriptions table that shall be synchronized. Start the query with a click on the  button.

 

The form will list all differences found. To update the database click on the button.

 

Synchronize places missing a link to DiversityGazetteers

Select the gazetteers database, optionally a project within this databas, a project in the descriptions database and the descriptions table to search for identical names. Start the query with a click on the  Start check button. To use these similar names check them in the OK column. 

Many places have identical names in different regions. Names where several results were found are marked in blue. To choose the correct name among the list of results, click on the  Select name button and select the correct name from the list as shown below.

Finally, click on the button to enter the results in the database.

 

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance References

Maintenance - References

To synchronize the titles of the references which are linked to the module DiversityReferences select the Synchronize databases tab and choose the tab References. Select the references database and the project for which the reference titles should be synchronized. The references are stored as field “label” of table DescriptionScope, where the scope type Citation is specified. The meaning of some generally used controls is explained in the introduction page of database synchronization.

Start the query with a click on the  button.

The form will list all differences found. To update the database click on the button.

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Sampling Plots

Maintenance - Sampling plots

To synchronize the titles of the references which are linked to the module DiversityReferences select the Synchronize databases tab and choose the tab Sampling plots. Select the references database and the project for which the reference titles should be synchronized. The references are stored as field “label” of table DescriptionScope, where the scope type Citation is specified. The meaning of some generally used controls is explained in the introduction page of database synchronization.

Start the query with a click on the  button.

The form will list all differences found. To update the database click on the button.

 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Taxon Names

Maintenance - Taxonomic names

To synchronize the entries for the taxonomic names derived from the module DiversityTaxonNames select the Synchronize databases tab and choose the tab Taxon names. There are two ways to synchronize taxonomic names. You may either Synchronize taxonomic names linked to an external data source for entries where the link to a taxonomic database is already established or you may Synchronize taxonomic names missing a connection where no link is established and you can query for identical names in one of the databases. The meaning of some generally used controls is explained in the introduction page of database synchronization.

Synchronize taxonomic names linked to an external data source

The taxonomic names are stored as field “label” of table DescriptionScope, where the scope type TaxonName is specified. Select a taxonomy database and the descriptions project that shall be synchronized. Start the query with a click on the  button.

 

The form will list all differences found. To update the database click on the button.

 

Synchronize taxonomic names missing a connection

Select a taxonomic database, optionally a project within this database and a project in the descriptions database to search for identical names. Start the query with a click on the  button. You may either restrict the search to an exact match (= Compare whole name) or to the first parts of the name (= Compare first parts) as shown below. If the names do not match exactly, you may either update the name (= Update similar name) in the descriptions database or import the name from the DiversityTaxonNames as a new scope (= Insert as new name - see options in the window depicted below). In the result list only matching names will be checked (column OK). The other results will be marked indicating the difference. Yellow indicates a difference in the authors while red indicates differences in main parts of the name. To use these similar names check them in the OK column.

 

The form will list all matches found. To insert the links to the database click on the button.

 

Synchronize taxonomic names missing a connection with a websrvice

To synchronize the taxonomic names with a webservice select it as Taxonomy database. You may either compare the entire name or the first parts of the name (see image below and description above). If the name in your data does not match the name in the webservice perfectly, the name will be marked with a yellow background.

If several similar names were found, these lines will be marked with a blue background (see image above). To select one of the similar names click on the Select name button. A window will open as shown below listing all similar names found in the webservice. Select one name and click OK to use it.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Trees

Maintenance - Maintain descriptor trees

To open the maintenance form choose Administration → Database … → Maintenance … from the menu and select the Maintain descriptor trees tab. With the descriptor trees the assignment of descriptors to certain projects is done. Furthermore it is possible to administer the recommended statistical measures and modifiers for quantitive descriptors and the recommended modifier and frequency values for categorical descriptors. If a description item references entities that are not correctly assigned in the descriptor trees, this can be seen in the continious view. In the tab Missing description entities you can easily find and fix such kind of inconsistencies. Furthermore a centralized function to administer Statistical measures Modifier values and Frequency values is provided. Finally superfluous entries may be deleted by using the Clean descriptor trees tab.

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Trees

Maintenance Trees Clean

Maintenance - Clean descriptor trees

To administer the recommended modifier values select the Maintain descriptor trees tab and choose the tab Clean decriptor trees. Select the Project, the Descriptor tree and the Entity type (“Statistical measure”, “Modifier” or “Frequency”) that shall be cleaned. Currently three cleaning options are supported:

  • Unsuitable recommended values - Clear recommended values the do not match the descriptor type, e.g. statistical measures for a categorical descriptor.
  • Recommended values for tree nodes - Clear recommended values that are not directly assigned to a descriptor, but a tree node. You should only perform this operation if you are sure that the neccessary values have been directly assigned to the approriate descriptors.  
  • All values in the descriptor tree - Delete all recommended values. Only descriptor trees can be selected for this option, that are not marked as “complete”. You should only perform this operation if you are sure that the neccessary values have been assigned to a complete descriptor tree of the project.  

To start the search click on the Check for values to clean button. 

 

To start the update of the selected descriptor tree click on the button. 

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Trees Frequency

Maintenance - Frequency values

To administer the recommended frequency values select the Maintain descriptor trees tab and choose the tab Frequency values. Select the Project and the Descriptor tree that shall be checked and click on the Check for frequency values button. Behind the “Descriptor” column all used frequency values are shown in the output table. Values that are not assigned for the selected descriptor tree but anyway available in the project, e.g. due to a different descriptor tree or inherited by a superior tree node, are diplayed with blue background (see image below).

 

New values may be inserted in the table by selecting them in the check list on the left and clicking the Add >> button. The check list shows the frequency values available in your database. Additional values can be inserted in the Modifier/Frequency tabs of Edit descriptor or Edit project. By clicking the button All >> rsp. None >> may check or uncheck all checked values from the list box in the table. The buttons All project >> and No project >> check or uncheck the project specific entries with blue background in the table. If one or more lines in the output tables are selected (click on the fields before the “OK” column), the mentioned functions operate only for the selected lines, otherways for the whole table. With option Fix descriptor columns you may fix the first data grid columns to scroll horizontally thru the value list.  

To store the modifications to the selected descriptor tree click on the button. Instead of updating the selected entries you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the corresponding data sets.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Maintenance Trees Measure

Maintenance - Statistical measures

To administer the recommended statistical measures select the Maintain descriptor trees tab and choose the tab Statistical measures. Select the Project and the Descriptor tree that shall be checked and click on the Check for statistical measures button. Behind the “Descriptor” column all used statistical measures are shown in the output table. Descriptors that have not assigned any statistical measures are marked with yellow background. Values that are not assigned for the selected descriptor tree but anyway available in the project, e.g. due to a different descriptor tree or inherited by a superior tree node, are diplayed with blue background (see image below).

 

New values may be inserted in the table by selecting them in the check list on the left and clicking the Add >> button. By clicking the button All >> rsp. None >> may check or uncheck all checked values from the list box in the table. The buttons All project >> and No project >> check or uncheck the project specific entries with blue background in the table. If one or more lines in the output tables are selected (click on the fields before the “OK” column), the mentioned functions operate only for the selected lines, otherways for the whole table. With option Fix descriptor columns you may fix the first data grid columns to scroll horizontally thru the value list.  

To store the modifications to the selected descriptor tree click on the button. Instead of updating the selected entries you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the corresponding data sets. 

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Trees Missing

Maintenance - Missing description entities

To find description entities that are not correctly assigned to the project’s descriptor trees, select the Maintain descriptor trees tab and choose the tab Missing description entities. Select the Project and the Entity type that shall be checked. Currently the following entity types are supported:

  • Descriptor - Search for descriptors that are referenced in the description data but not assigned to the project’s descriptor tree
  • Statistical measure - Search for statistical measures that are referenced in the description data but not assigned to the quantitative descriptor
  • Modifier - Search for modifier values that are referenced in the description data but not assigned to the quantitative rsp. categorical descriptor
  • Frequency - Search for frequency values that are referenced in the description data but not assigned to the categorical descriptor

By default the option Ignore inherited entities is checked, therefore only descriptors of the own project and recommended values directly assigned to the project descriptor are evaluated. If option Include description IDs is checked you will have the option to inspect the found data sets after the query. Start the query with a click on the Check for missing entities button.

 

If you selected the option Include description IDs the button Inspect dataset will be shown. By selecting an entry and clicking the button Inspect dataset you may directly navigate to that dataset.

Before database update select the Target descriptor tree where missing entities shall be inserted. By default only descriptor trees that are marked as “complete” are shown. You may uncheck option Show only complete trees to display all present descriptor trees.

To update the database click on the button. Instead of updating the selected entries you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the corresponding data sets.

 

May 3, 2024

Maintenance Trees Modifier

Maintenance - Modifier values

To administer the recommended modifier values select the Maintain descriptor trees tab and choose the tab Modifier values. Select the Project and the Descriptor tree that shall be checked and click on the Check for modifier values button. Behind the “Descriptor” column all used modifier values are shown in the output table. Values that are not assigned for the selected descriptor tree but anyway available in the project, e.g. due to a different descriptor tree or inherited by a superior tree node, are diplayed with blue background (see image below).

 

New values may be inserted in the table by selecting them in the check list on the left and clicking the Add >> button. The check list shows the modifier values available in your database. Additional values can be inserted in the Modifier/Frequency tabs of Edit descriptor or Edit project. By clicking the button All >> rsp. None >> may check or uncheck all checked values from the list box in the table. The buttons All project >> and No project >> check or uncheck the project specific entries with blue background in the table. If one or more lines in the output tables are selected (click on the fields before the “OK” column), the mentioned functions operate only for the selected lines, otherways for the whole table. With option Fix descriptor columns you may fix the first data grid columns to scroll horizontally thru the value list. 

To store the modifications to the selected descriptor tree click on the button. Instead of updating the selected entries you may click Close form and check list in database to return to the main program with the corresponding data sets. 

 

Jan 14, 2025

Fequently Asked Questions

Database

  • How to connect to a database.
    • See chapter Connect
    • and the video Video starten: Anmeldung an die Datenbank
  • How to create a documentation of the database
    • see chapter Documentation of database
    • and the video Video starten: Erzeugung am Beispiel einer Tabelle, Inhalt des Ordners, Standardeinstellung zur Erzeugnung des Dokuments, Vorstellung der Details, Erzeugung eines Dokuments mit Standardeinstungen, Inhalt des Ordners mit css Dateien, Darkmode im Browser, CSS-Datei.

Documentation

  • How to adapt the chm manuals for Hugo
  • and the video: Anpassungen für HUGO Video starten: Umzug von chm nach html. Anleitung für Umstellung auf html. Übersetzung von html nach markdown. Auswahl der Dateien im Programm. Pandoc als Voraussetzung für Konvertierung. Ansicht der markdown Dateien. Ersetzen des headers (Frontmatter). Anpassungen für Bilder, Ersatz der Icons durch Vektorgrafiken. Beispiel für Vektorgrafik. Bearbeitung der Liste für Ersetzungen über Tabelle. Laden einer Datei mit Ersetungen. Ansicht der Datei und Laden der Datei. Durchfürung der Ersetzungen.
  • How to export the content of enum tables for inclusion in the manual for HUGO
  • and the video Ausgabe des Inhalts von Aufzählungstabellen Video starten: Auswahl der Aufzählungstabellen, Anwählen der Ausgabeoption, Auswahl der Spalten, Export und Ansicht im Formular und im Browser.
  • How to fix broken links for Hugo
  • and the video: Video starten

  • How to related reference links for Hugo

  • and the video: Video starten

Administration

  • How to set the access to projects
    • see chapter Zugriff auf Projekte
    • and the video Video starten: Einstellungen des Zugriffs auf Projekte, Zugriff auf Daten innerhalb von Projekten

Editing

  • How to set the language of a dataset
    • see chapter Sprache
    • and the video Video starten: Festlegen der Sprache des Inhalts eines Datensatzes.
    • How are addresses retrieved from the hierarchy
      • see chapter Hierarchien
      • and the video Video starten: Haupthierarchie mit Ermittlung der Adresse und zusätzliche Hierarchien.
        • How to remove loops from a hierarchy
          • see chapter Schleifen entfernen
          • and the video Video starten: Entfernen von Schleifen in der Hierarchie anhand von Beispieldaten.
    • How to remove loops in the synonymy
    • How to see the public contanct infos
      • see chapter Öffentliche Kontaktdaten
      • and the video Video starten: Ermittlung der öffentlichen Kontaktdaten anhand zugänglichen Kontaktdaten des aktuellen Eintrags sowie der in der Haupthierarchie verfügbaren Kontaktdaten.
    • How to set the icons of descriptors
      • see chapter Descriptoren - Icons einstellen
      • and the video Video starten: 2 prinzipielle Typen von Deskriptor: Modul zugeordnet oder ohne Modul. 4 Möglichkeiten für die Einstellung der Icons - OHNE ICON: Modul zugeordnet: Default Icon des Moduls. ohne Modul: Default Icon für Deskriptor. MIT ICON: ohne Modul: Ausgabe des gesetzten Icons. Modul zugeordnet: Ausgabe des gesetzten Icons. Default Icon des Moduls wird ersetzt.
    • How to propagate changes to linked data
      • see chapter Änderungen verlinkter Datensätze weiterleiten
      • and the video Video starten: DiversityAgents als Modul in der DWB. Darstellung der Beispieldaten in DiversityCollection und DiversityAgents. Änderung in DiversityAgents, Eintrag des geänderten Datensatzes in Update Liste. Auswahl der zu aktualsierenden Datenbanken. Display types in DiversityAgents. Eintrag von aktuellem Datensatz, Eintrag aller Datensätze, Ansicht der Liste, Löschen der Liste. Aktualisieren des Datensatzes. Kontrolle der Änderungen in DiversityCollection.
    • Spreadsheet

  • How to include column RowGUID to enable changes in the PK of a table
  • see chapter …
  • and the video RowGUID einschliessen Video starten: Erläuterung der RowGUID. Beispieldaten im TableEditor. Laden der Daten im Spreadsheet. Versuch der Änderung einer Spalte die Teil des Primärschlüssels ist. Einschliessen der RowGUID. Versuch der Änderung mit eingeschlossener RowGUID. Ablehnung der Änderung bei Kollision mit Primärschlüssel. Änderung der Daten ohne Kollision. Ergebnis der Bearbeitung.

Import

  • How to import data
    • see chapter Überblick
    • and the video Video starten: Import von Daten anhand des Beispiels im Tutorial.
    • How to check for duplicates
      • see chapter Duplikate
      • and the video Video starten: Prüfung auf in der Datenbank bereits vorhandene Duplikate während des Imports.
    • How to transform data during the import
      • see chapter Transformation
      • and the video Video starten. Transformation von Daten für den Import am Beispiel eines Datums.

Archive

  • How to create an achive including the log tables
  • see chapter Archiv inclusive des Logs
  • and the video Video starten.
    (Aufbau von Logtabellen, Vorstellung der Beispieldaten, Erstellung eines Archivs: Einschliessen der Logtabellen, Suche nach Daten, Anlegen des Archivs. Wechsel in leere Datenbank. Einlesen der Archivdaten: Auswahl des Archivs, Log einschliessen, Einlesen der Daten, Archivdaten einspielen, Meldung zu vorhandenem Projekt. Anmeldebestätigung. Ansicht der Daten einschliesslich der Daten in den Logtabellen)
  • How to create an archive
  • see chapter Archiv erstellen
  • and the video Video starten.
    (Automatisierte Erstellung durch Server, Manuelle Erstellung, Suche nach Daten, Erstellung, Inhalt einer xml-Datei, Protokoll).

General

Mar 26, 2024

Subsections of General

High Resolution

High-resolution displays

More and more computers are nowadays delivered with high-resolution displays. Since Diversity Descriptions is a Windows forms application, which works pixel-oriented, the program window would become smaller and smaller with increasing display resolution.

To face this problem, Windows uses a scaling mechanism, which zooms pixel-oriented applications, which may lead to a burry picture. To avoid this, an alternative is to increase the font sizes within the application and magnify elements like buttons, data grids and so on, which is called “DPI-awareness” of the application. Since the icons within the application are not zoomed automatically, this mechanism usually only works satisfactory with moderate scaling factors of some 125% or 150%. For higher factors the icons within the application will become too small. You can check the scaling factor fo your system in the Windows settings → System → Display, section “Scale and layout”  

If you have problems with DiversityDescriptions with a high-resolution display, please try out if you get better results with the Windows scaling. Therefore right-click the program icon (usually on your desktop), select “Properties” and go to the “Compatibility” tab (see image below).

Please click on button Change high DPI setting and another window as shown below will appear.

Check the option “High DPI caling override” and you will be able to select a different value than the default “Application”. Please try out if “System” or “System (Enhanced)” gives better results. After confirming with OK start the application and check the adjustment.

 

May 16, 2024

Menu

Overview of the menu in DiversityDescriptions:

Connection
    Create database ... Create a new database. This option is only applicable if you have system administrator rights for the database.
    Database ... Choose one of the databases available on the server. Only those databases will be listed to which the user has access permission.
    Reconnect to database Reconnect to the actual database and reload basic data.
         Auto connect   Automatically connect to database (only with windows login).
    Module connections ... Edit the connections to the other modules within the Diversity Workbench.
    Timeout for database ... Set the timeout for database queries.
    Timeout for web requests ... Set the timeout for web requests.
    Transfer previous settings ... Transfer the settings for IP-Address and port of the server, name of the database, login etc. of a previous version of the client to the current version.
    Current server activity ... View current activities on the database server.
    Quit Quit the application and stop all processes started by the application.

Edit
        Descriptions Select edit mode for descriptions.
        Descriptors Select edit mode for descriptors.
        Projects Select edit mode for projects.
    Tranlsations ... Edit or view translations.
    Summarize descriptions ... Summarize description data.
    Summarize sampling data ... Summarize sampling data.
    Edit as HTML form ... Edit the current description in an HTML form.

Grid
    Description grid ... Edit or view descriptions in a grid.
    Sample data grid ... Edit or view sample data in a grid.
    Table editor  
       Projects ... Edit the projects in the query result list. 
       Sampling events ... Edit the sampling events for the descriptions in the query result list. 
       Descriptions ... Edit the descriptions in the query result list. 
       Description scopes ... Edit the scopes of the descriptions in the query result list. 
       Description resources ... Edit the resources for descriptions in the query result list. 
       Descriptors ... Edit the descriptors in the query result list.
       Descriptor resources ... Edit the resources for descriptors in the query result list. 
       Categorical states ... Edit the categorical states of the descriptors in the query result list. 
       Categorical state resources ... Edit the resources for the categorical states of the descriptors in the query result list. 
       Descriptor tree node resources ... Edit the resources for the descriptor tree nodes of the projects in the query result list. 
       Resource variants ... Edit the resources for entities in the query result list. 
       Translations ... Edit the translations for entities in the query result list. 

Query
        Show query Show the query window.  
        Project preference ... Set or view the project preference for query windows.  
    Extended query ... Extended query for description data.  
    Collect descriptions ... Collect descriptions with a separate query form.  

Data
     Save dataset Save the actual dataset in the database.  
     Restore from log ... Restore deleted datasets from the log tables in the database (only for administrator).   
    Generate document ... Generate a document with descriptions, descriptors or projects from the query list.  
    Generate diagram ... Generate a diagram of categorical state usage, cross-match or descriptor usage for a set of description items.  
    Generate state statistics ... Generate statistics for categorical state usage (two or three descriptors cross-match) for a set of description items.  
    Import
       Import wizard Import wizard.  
          Matrix wizard ... Import descriptor, description and sample data from a tabulator separated text file.
          Sample data ... Import sample data for descriptions from a tabulator separated text file.  
          Descriptions ... Import descriptions from a tabulator separated text file.
          Descriptors ... Import descriptors from a tabulator separated text file.
          Import resources Import resources.
             Description resources ... Import description resources from a tabulator separated text file.  
             Descriptor resources ... Import descriptor resources from a tabulator separated text file.
             Categorical state resources ... Import categorical state resources from a tabulator separated text file.
             Descriptor tree node resources ... Import descriptor tree node resources from a tabulator separated text file. 
             Resource variants ... Import resource variants from a tabulator separated text file -special import to append resource variants.
          Import translations Import translations.
             Description translations ... Import description translations from a tabulator separated text file.  
             Descriptor translations ... Import descriptor translations from a tabulator separated text file.
             Categorical state translations ... Import categorical state translations from a tabulator separated text file.
       Organize sessions ... Organize import sessions.  
       Import SDD ... Import SDD files.
      Import DELTA ... Import DELTA files.
       Import questionnaire data ... Import revised data received from HTML forms.  
    Export
       Matrix wizard ... Export descriptor and description data as tabulator separated list and generate an import schema for the Matrix Import Wizard.  
      Export data ... Export data in a structured data file format (SDD, DELTA, EML).  
       Export questionnaires ... Export description data of a project or from a query list as HTML forms.  
       Export lists   Export tabulator separated lists.  
          Sample data list ... Export sample data list.
          Descriptions list ... Export descriptions list.
          Descriptors list ... Export descriptors list.  
         Resource data list ... Export resource data list document for review and possible re-import of modified data.  
         Translations list ... Export translations list document for review and possible re-import of modified data.  
       Export CSV ... Export database tables in CSV format.  
    Cache database ... Export data of selected projects into a cache database.  
    Backup database ... Create a backup of the database.  
    File operations File operations (no database connection needed).  
       Convert SDD file ... Convert a SDD file to DELTA or EML without database access.  
       Convert DELTA file ... Convert an DELTA file to SDD or EML without database access.  
       Check SDD file ...   Check if an SDD file is compliant to the XML schema SDD 1.1 rev 5.  
       Check EML file ...   Check if an EML file is compliant to the XML schema EML 2.1.1.  

Administration
   Change password ... Changing the password of a user.  
   Database  
       Database tools ... Tools for the administration of the objects in the database.
For experts only!
       Documentation ... Generate documentation of the information model.  
       Statistical measures ... Adjust display sequence of statistical measures.  
       Logins ... Administration of the logins of the server their permissions in the databases.  
       Maintenance ... Maintenance of database entries, especially, if connected to other modules.
       Rename database ... Rename the current database.  
       Set published address ... Setting the address published for links by other modules.  
       Check projects ... Check the consistency of the project data.  
    Linked server ... Administration of the linked servers.  
     Projects ... Administration of the projects.  
   Resources directory ... Change the resources directory.  
   Tutorial files ... Copy tutorial files to the resources directory.

Help
    Manual Opens the user manual.  
    Feedback ... Opens a window for sending feedback.  
    Feedback history ... Opens a window for browsing former feedback.  
    Edit feedback ... Opens a window for feedback editing - only for special users possible.  
    Statistics ... Overview of statistical data for the database contents.  
    Info ... Show the version of the program and corresponding information.  
    Websites Websites related to Diversity Descriptions.  
        Download application ... Download Diversity Descriptions from the website of the Diversity Workbench project.  
        Information model ... Inspect the information model on the website of the Diversity Workbench project.  
        SDD homepage ... Visit the TDWG homepage for the SDD standard.  
        EML homepage ... Visit the KNB homepage for the EML standard.  
        DELTA homepage ... Visit the DELTA homepage for the DELTA standard.  
        Example files ... Visit the repository of DiversityDescriptions example files.
    Error log View the actual error log file.  
            Keep error log Change the error log settings to "Keep error log".
            Clear error log at program start Change the error log settings to "Clear error log at program start".  
    Clear error log Clear the actual error log file.  

Update
     Update database ... Update the database to the current version.  
     Update client ... Download the current version of the client.  

 

 

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Statistics

Statistics

For statistical information about the database contents choose Help -> Statistics ….

The Users tab shows information about the users with access to the database. This output may be restrictied to your own data if you do not have sufficient acces rights (see image below).

The Projects tab shows information about the projects in the database and the entered data (see image below). The colums marked with “(total)” include entries that refer to the specified project as an additional project (see Editdescription).

The Descriptor trees tab shows information about the projects in the database, their descriptor trees and nodes and the number of assigned descriptors (see image below).

Jan 14, 2025

Feedback

If you have suggestions for improvement, need any changes in the programm or encouter an error you can give a feedback to the administrator. Click on the ALT and PRINT buttons to get a screen shot of your current form. After creating the screen shot choose Help - Feedback from the menu to open the feedback form as shown below.

 

Click on the Insert image button to insert the screen shot and give a comment about your problem. In the field Topic enter the topic of your feedback (will appear in response e-mail). The Priority can either be empty or set to 3 levels:

  • urgent
  • as soon as possible
  • nice to have

If necessary, enter a date in the field ToDo until when you would like to have the task described in you feedback be solved. Then click on the  Send feedback button to send your feedback to the administrator. If you would like to receive a message when the problem you described is solved, please enter you e-mail address in the field below the description.

To inspect your former feedbacks choose Feedback history from the menu. A window will open where you can browse your past feedback together with the state of progress.

Mar 26, 2024

Internals

For users that need more detailed information about the software including database design etc.

May 3, 2024

Subsections of Internals

Database

Database

The database for DiversityDescriptions is based on Microsoft SQL-Server 2012 and higher.

Organisation of the data

The database consits of three major parts:

1. The “Descriptive terminology” with the main tables “Descriptor” and “CategoricalState” provides the means to express the description details. The two fixed enumeration tables “DataStatus_Enum” and “StatisticalMeasure_Enum” provide values defined in the SDD standard 1.1 rev 5.

2. The “Descriptions” part with the main table “Description” reflects the items themselves. Each description must be assigned to a project (see part 3) and references entries from the descriptive terminology. These references are reflected by the tables “CategoricalSummaryData”, “QuantitativeSummaryData” and “TextDescriptorData”, where additional item specific data are stored.

3. The “Projects” part with the main tables “Project”, “DescriptorTree” and “DescriptorTreeNode” build the anchor for the descriptions, which must be assigned to a project. Further functions are a hierarchical organization of the descriptors and restriction of the descriptive terminology to certain projects. Additionally it is possible, to define recommended values of statistical measure, modifier and frequency associated to certain branches of a descriptor tree or single descriptors. If for a certain project no descriptor tree is created, there is no restriction, i. e. all descriptors are allowed.

The image below shows the main tables of the database.

 

In the graphic the tables of the database are marked according to their logical groups. Additionally the database group “Resources” provides the option to assign links to resource files (pictures, audio, video) to certain descriptors, categorical states or descriptions. The “Auxilliary” group with the main table “BaseEntity” provides unique keys for the most of the other tables for building of relations. Furthermore it allowes a centralized realization of some features, e.g. support of translations supply imports and export to a cache database.

Further details: tables, projects.

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Database

Backup

Backup

Database copy

If you need to backup your database, you have to use the functionality provided by SQL-Server. To do this, you need administration rights in the database you want to create a backup. Open the Management Studio for SQL-Server, choose the database and detach it from the server as shown in the image below.

After detaching the database, you can store a copy of the …_Data.MDF File to keep it as a backup.

After storing the backup you have to attach the database.

A dialog will appear where you have to select the original database file in your directory.

Note: A database copy can only be attached to an SQL server with the same or a higher version. For example if a database that was attached to an SQL-Server 2008 R2 (internal version 10.50) is copied, it is not possible to attach the copy to an SQL-Server 2008 (internal version 10.00).

 

Database backup

If you are logged in to a database with administrator rights, you can start a backup within DiversityDescriptions with menu item Data-> Backup database. In this case the name of the backup is automaticallly generated from the SQL-server version, the database name and data/time of backup. In case of backup success the resulting file path at the SQL server disk will be displayed as in the example below.

To restore the backup to a new database, right-click at “Database” in the Managment Studion for SQ-Server and select “Restore database…”.

In the following panel specify the database name, select “Restore from medium” to specify your backup file and select the backup source (see below). You can overwrite an existing databse by selecting it in that panel instead of specifying a new database name.

Note: The same limitations concerning the SQL-Server versions as mentioned in section “Database copy” are valid for backup handling, too. A backup can only be restored at the same or a higher version of SQL-Server.

May 3, 2024

Connections

Connections to the databases and services

The program will automatically try to connect to all the modules within the Diversity Workbench. To edit these connections choose Connection -> Module connections … from the menu. A form as shown below will open, where you can edit these connections.

To requery the connections use the button. If you want to add a connection to a different server click on the  button and connect to the database you want to add to the list. Added databases will be displayed in green. To remove a connection from the list select it and click on the button. If you have added connections in a former program run, click on button to insert them into the available connections (see right image). If an added connection misses a password, this will be indicated by a red backcolor. Click on the button to enter the missing password. 

Webservices like IndexFungorum will be displayed in blue.

May 3, 2024

Create Database

Create a new database

If you have database system administrator rights, the menue item Connection → Create database … is available, where you may create a new database for your client. A similar option is available if you connect to a database server that does not have any fitting databases and you are using a windows login with sufficient rights. In this case the button will be shown after clicking Connect to server in the connection window (see image below).

After clicking the button, you will be asked to enter the database name (see image below).

The database files will be created in the default database directory of the Microsoft SQL Server. Afterwards the database update form will be opened to install all required database objects (see image below).

Click on button Start update to complete the installation. After creating the new database you should check the login administration to make it it accessible to other users.

 

Jan 14, 2025

Data Project

Information concerning the project access and related tables are stored in the tables shown in the diagram below. The table “Project” relates the table “ProjectProxy”, which holds an optional link to DiversityProjects, with attribute “ProjectProxyID”. The tables “UserProxy”, “ProjectUser” and “ProjectProxy” allow a independent administration of the access functions related to projects and users and are required for the centralized DiversityWorkbench components.

 

 

Index

Table ProjectProxy

The projects as stored in the module DiversityProjects

Column Data type Description
ProjectID int ID of the project to which the specimen belongs (Projects are defined in DiversityProjects)
Project nvarchar (255) The name or title of the project as shown in a user interface (Projects are defined in DiversityProjects)
ProjectURI nvarchar (255) URI of a project in a remote module, e.g. refering to database DiversityProjects

Table ProjectUser

The projects that a user can access

Column Data type Description
LoginName nvarchar (50) A login name which the user uses for access the DivesityWorkbench, Microsoft domains, etc..
ProjectID int ID of the project to which the specimen belongs (Projects are defined in DiversityProjects)
ReadOnly bit If the user has only read access to data of this project
Default value: (0)

Table UserProxy

The user as stored in the module DiversityAgents

Column Data type Description
LoginName nvarchar (50) A login name which the user uses for access the DivesityWorkbench, Microsoft domains, etc..
CombinedNameCache nvarchar (255) The short name of the user, e.g. P. Smith
AgentURI nvarchar (255) URI of a user in a remote module, e.g. refering to database DiversityAgents
Queries xml (MAX) Queries created by the user
ID int ID of the user
PrivacyConsent bit If the user consents the storage of his user name in the database
PrivacyConsentDate datetime The time and date when the user consented or refused the storage of his user name in the database
May 3, 2024

Database Configuratation

Configuration of the database

To configure your Database, choose Administration -> Database → Rename database … to change the name of the database according to your requirements. During this renaming all processes in the database will be terminated (you will get a warning if processes from other host are active).

Afterwards you should adapt the address that is published by the database for access by other modules. Choose Administration -> Database → Set published address … from the menu. This will change the published address to the name of the server where your database is located and an identifier for you database, e.g. http://xy.diversityworkbench.de/Descriptions/

Renaming of the database and adapting of the published address should be done before you start to use the database and name and address should not be changed afterwards as datasets from other modules linked to data in the database would point to outdated addresses otherwise.

 

 

May 16, 2024

Database Documentation

Database documentation

This tool is used to generate a structured documentation of database parts. To use this tool, choose Administration -> Database ->  Documentation … from the menu. A window will open as shown below.

Select the tables that should be included in the documentation, choose among the provided options and click on the button Create … documentation to create a documentation in one of the available formats (HTML, MediaWiki, JSP-Wiki, Semantic Media Wiki). If you create a HTML documentation, a local file named <Database name>.htm is generated in the application directory, that might be copied and edited for own purposes. For MediaWiki and JSP-Wiki you may simply copy and paste the needed parts from the output window.

If you select format “Semantic Media Wiki” an output is generated that fits to terminology platforms as used e.g by TDWG. In this scheme the most important entities are “Concept” and “Collection”. Each “Concept” represents a single table column, which is shown on an own page named <prefix>:<table>.<column>. Each “Collection” represents a single table, which is shown on an own page named <prefix>:<table> (see image below). The “Semantic Media Wiki” option currently only supports output of Tables. Views, Functions and Roles will be ignored. 

If “Generate: XML” is selected, the output is generated in an XML format that may be imported to a semantic media wiki. To show all generated data, the two templates “dwb_concept” and “dwb_relation” must be inserted in the wiki.

 

May 3, 2024

Database Tools

Database tools

These are the tools to handle the basic parts of the database. The most of the functions support developers in introducing and maintining database features. These tools are only available for the owner of the database and should be handled with care as any changes in the database may disable the connection of your client to the database. Before changing any parts of the database it is recommended to backup the current state of the database. To use these tools, choose Administation → Database → Database tools … from the menu. A window will open as shown below.

 

Description

The Description section (see above) shows the basic definitions of the objects in the database and enables you to enter a description for these objects including tables and their columns, functions and their parameter etc. With the buttons SQL for adding, update and both you can generate SQL statements for the creation of the descriptions in your database. Use the button both if you are not sure if a description is already present as it will generate a SQL statement working with existing and missing descriptions (see below).

 

Log table and trigger

In the Log table and trigger section (see below) click on the List tables button to see all tables within the database. The Table section shows the basic definitions of a selected table. If columns for logging the date and responsible user for inserting and updating the data are missing, you can use the Attach … button to attach these columns to the table. Furthermore you may add a RowGUID to the table as e.g. a preparation for a replication.

In the Log table section (see below) you can create a logging table for the selected table in a format as used within the Diversity Workbench. Click on the Show SQL … button to show the SQL-statement that will create the logging table. If an old logging table should be kept, choose the Keep old log table option. If your table should support the version setting from a main table, choose the Add the column LogVersion option. To finally create the logging table click on the Create LogTable … button.

The triggers for insert, update and delete are created in the according sections (see below). If an old trigger exists, its definition will be shown in the upper part of the window. Click on the Show SQL button to see the definition of the trigger according to the current definition of the table in a format as used in the Diversity Workbench. If a trigger should set the version in a main table, which the current table is related to, choose the Add version setting to trigger option. To enable this option you must select the version table first. To finally create the trigger click on the Create trigger button. The update and delete triggers will transfer the original version of the data into the logging tables as defined above, where you can inspect the history of the data sets.

 

Preparation for replication

If you want to use replication within you module, the tables need certain columns and a log table. These preparations can be performed by a script, generated in the section Replication (see below). Select the tables you want to include in the process and create the script. This script can than be included in an update of the database. Please ensure that these changes are only be done by expert staff.

 

Clear logtables

If for any reason you want to clear the log tables of the database, this can be done in the Clear log tab as shown below. Click on the List tables button to list the log tables. Then select those that should be cleared and click on the Clear log of selected tables button (see below). Please keep in mind that any restoration of data from the log is only possible as long as the data can be retrieved from the log.

 

Data protection

To implement the General Data Protection Regulation of the European Union several steps have to be performed in a database:

  • Generate a skript using this tool (see below) to convert all tables and insert objects according to the requirements:
    • Add columns ID, PrivacyConsent and PrivacyConsentDate in table UserProxy
    • Grant update to PrivacyConsent and PrivacyConsentDate in table UserProxy
    • Create update trigger for UserProxy setting the PrivacyConsentDate
    • Create the function providing the ID of the user from UserProxy
    • Create the function providing the name of the user from UserProxy
    • Create the function PrivacyConsentInfo providing common information
    • For every table:
      • Insert users from a table into UserProxy (if missing so far)
      • Insert users from the corresponding log table into UserProxy (if missing so far)
      • Change the constraints for the logging columns (User_Name() ? UserID())
      • Replace user name with ID in logging columns
      • Replace user name with ID in logging columns of the log table
      • Adapt description of the logging columns
  • Include the skript in an update of the database
  • Check the database for update triggers, functions using e.g. CURRENT_USER, USER_NAME, SUSER_SNAME etc. where user names must be replaced with their IDs. Create a script performing these tasks and include it into an update for the database
  • Adapt the client to the now changed informations (e.g. query for responsible etc.)

After these changes the only place where the name of a user is stored is the table UserProxy together with the ID. Removing the name (see below) will remove any information about the user leaving only a number linked to the information within depending data.

To generate a script for the objects and changes needed to implement the General Data Protection Regulation use the Data protection tab as shown below. The generated script will handle the standard objects (logging columns) but not any additional circumstances within the database. For these you need to inspect the database in detail and create a script to handle them on your own.

To set the website where detailed information about the handling of the General Data Protection Regulation within the DiversityWorkbench resp. the current database is provided, click on the button on the Info site tab. If unchanged, the default site for the DiversityWorkbench is set (see below).

If for any reason a user wants his name to be removed from the database, select the users name from the list as shown below and click on the  button (see below).

 

May 16, 2024

Diversity Descriptions Workshop

Index

Table BaseEntity

The BaseEntity is used within the database to provide unique keys

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal object ID, unique across all tables in database (primary key) NO
table_id int References the table name of table entries associated with the BaseEntity; NULL indicates orphaned entries and may be used for garbage collection of otherwise deleted object ids
Default value: NULL
YES
specific_rights_text nvarchar (255) To be used where the licence for an object differs from the default project licence
Default value: NULL
YES
specific_licence_uri nvarchar (255) URI of licence, where different from project licence
Default value: NULL
YES

Table BaseEntityTable_Enum

The BaseEntityTable_Enum contains the names of tables that reference the BaseEntity table

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal object ID of this record (primary key) NO
table nvarchar (255) Name of table that references the BaseEntity table NO

Table CacheDatabase

Table holding the cache databases connected to the database

Column Data type Description Nullable
Server varchar (50) The name or IP of the server where the cache database is located NO
DatabaseName varchar (50) The name of the cache database NO
Port smallint The port of the server where the cache database is located NO
Version varchar (50) The version of the cache database YES

Table CacheMappingDescription

Table holding the description key mappings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
project_id int Reference to the description project (foreign key) NO
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
target_key int Mapped key value for the target of the cache database. NO

Table CacheMappingDescriptor

Table holding the descriptor key mappings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
project_id int Reference to the descriptor project (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
target_key int Mapped key value for the target of the cache database. NO
last_state_key int Highest value of state key. Relevant for key_mapping_level > 0
Default value: (0)
YES

Table CacheMappingState

Table holding the categorical state key mappings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
project_id int Reference to the state project (foreign key) NO
state_id int Reference to the categorical state to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
target_key int Mapped key value for the target of the cache database. NO

Table CacheProject

Table holding the project settings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
project_id int Reference to the description project (foreign key) NO
withheld_data_level tinyint Flag for handling of withheld descriptor data. 0=withhold description; 1=withhold descriptor; 2=do not withhold data
Default value: (0)
YES
key_mapping_level tinyint Flag for handling of key mapping. 0=re-build mapping for each update; 1=keep first mapping; 2=additionally take numeric values of alternate ID for items; >2 as 2 but re-initialize table
Default value: (1)
YES
last_char_key int Highest value of character key. Relevant for key_mapping_level > 0
Default value: (0)
YES
last_item_key int Highest value of item key. Relevant for key_mapping_level > 0
Default value: (0)
YES
last_changes datetime The recent date when data within the project had been changed
Default value: getdate()
YES

Table CategoricalSamplingData

The categorical data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
sampling_unit_id int Reference to the sampling unit (foreign key) NO
state_id int Reference to the state (descriptor is implicit in state_id) (foreign key) NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. "strongly", "at the base", "in autumn") (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
frequency_value int Number of times this category was observed within a single sampling unit
Default value: NULL
YES

Table CategoricalState

The categorical states available for categorical descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which the state belongs (foreign key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of descriptor state NO
abbreviation nvarchar (255) Abbreviated label of descriptor state
Default value: NULL
YES
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the descriptor state definition YES
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (label will be used if this is missing)
Default value: NULL
YES
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which descriptor states are displayed
Default value: '0'
NO

Table CategoricalSummaryData

The categorical data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
state_id int Reference to the state (the descriptor is implicit in state_id) (foreign key) NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. "strongly", "at the base", "in autumn") (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
frequency_id int Optional reference to a frequency modifier definition (e.g. "rarely", "usually", "mostly") (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table DataStatus_Enum

Values of data status used for descriptions according to SDD 1.1 rev 5

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of data status NO
code nvarchar (255) Code of data status NO
abbreviation char (1) Single (intuitive) character NO
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the data status definition YES

Table Description

The description in the database

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of description
Default value: NULL
YES
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the description definition YES
project_id int Each description belongs to exactly one project that determines its terminology (required, foreign key) NO
alternate_id nvarchar (30) Optional alternate id of a description item - should be unique within one project, but not checked by database
Default value: NULL
YES
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (label will be used if this is missing)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table DescriptionProject

The projects where descriptions are accessible

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
description_id int ID of the description that belongs to the project (required, foreign key) NO
project_id int ID of the project to which the description belongs (required, foreign key) NO

Table DescriptionScope

The scope of the description

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of scope
Default value: NULL
YES
dwbURI nvarchar (500) Reference to DiversityWorkbench component
Default value: NULL
YES
type nvarchar (255) Scope type ("GeographicArea", "SamplingPlot", "Citation", "Observation", "Specimen", "TaxonName", "OtherConcept", "Stage", "Part" or "Sex")
Default value: NULL
YES
other_scope_id int Reference to further scopes, e.g. stage, sex etc. (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table Descriptor

Descriptor (= characters, features) define variables

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of descriptor NO
abbreviation nvarchar (255) Abbreviated label of descriptor
Default value: NULL
YES
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the descriptor definition YES
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which descriptors are displayed
Default value: '0'
NO
subclass nvarchar (255) The four character subclasses of SDD are all combined here in one entity and distinguished by this attribute ("categorical", "quantitative", "text" or "sequence")
Default value: 'categorical'
NO
statistical_measurement_scale nvarchar (255) Scale of descriptor: Categorical may be nominal (unordered, “red/green/blue”) or ordinal (ordered, “bad/medium/good”); Quantitative may be interval (°C) or ratio (mass, length, time, K)
Default value: 'nominal'
NO
usually_exclusive tinyint Applicable to categorical (nominal/ordinal) descriptors only. If usually exclusive = 1, then by default the user interface allows only entering one state. Nevertheless, multiple states in the data are valid.
Default value: '0'
NO
state_collection_model nvarchar (255) Handling of multiple values: OrSet/AndSet: unordered set combined with or/and, OrSeq/AndSeq: ordered sequence combined with or/and, WithSeq: example is “green with brown”, Between: an example is “oval to elliptic”
Default value: 'OrSet'
NO
mandatory tinyint Is the scoring of this descriptor mandatory (required) in each item?
Default value: '0'
NO
repeatability nvarchar (255) How reliable and consistent are repeated measurements or scorings of the descriptor by different observers and on different objects? ("ignore", "very low", "low", "below average", "slightly below average", "standard", "slightly above average", "above average", "high" or "very high")
Default value: 'standard'
NO
availability nvarchar (255) How available is the descriptor or concept for identification? ("ignore", "very low", "low", "below average", "slightly below average", "standard", "slightly above average", "above average", "high" or "very high")
Default value: 'standard'
NO
measurement_unit nvarchar (255) A measurement unit (mm, inch, kg, °C, m/s etc.) or dimensionless scaling factor
Default value: NULL
YES
measurement_unit_precedes_value tinyint Set to 1 if the measurement unit precedes the value
Default value: '0'
NO
values_are_integer tinyint Set to 1 if the values are integer
Default value: '0'
NO
min_plausible_value float Applicable to quantitative descriptors only; in support of a plausibility check for values. Example: for tree height this could be 0, i.e. only positive values allowed
Default value: '-1.79e308'
NO
max_plausible_value float Applicable to quantitative descriptors only; in support of a plausibility check for values. Example: for tree height this could be 99
Default value: '1.79e308'
NO
sequence_type nvarchar (255) Type of molecular sequence, "Nucleotide" or "Protein". The value "Nucleotide" covers RNA and DNA sequences
Default value: 'Nucleotide'
NO
symbol_length tinyint The number of letters in each symbol. Nucleotides are always codes with 1-letter symbols, but proteins may use 1 or 3-letter codes (e.g. A or Ala for alanine)
Default value: '1'
NO
enable_ambiguity_symbols tinyint Set to 1 if ambiguity symbols are supported in the sequence string, e.g. R, Y, S, W for nucleotides or B, Z for proteins
Default value: '1'
NO
gap_symbol nvarchar (3) A string identifying the "gap" symbol used in aligned sequences. The gap symbol must always be symbol_length long
Default value: NULL
YES
wording_before nvarchar (255) Representation for natural language output, inserted before the states/value
Default value: NULL
YES
wording_after nvarchar (255) Representation for natural language output, inserted after the states/value
Default value: NULL
YES
data_entry_note nvarchar (MAX) A note or prompt when entering or dealing with data YES
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (label will be used if this is missing)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table DescriptorInapplicability

The descriptor dependency rules

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
controlled_descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which the rule will apply, e.g. which will be inapplicable if controlling state applies to the same description (foreign key) NO
controlling_state_id int Reference to the controlling categorical state; if present in a description, controlled descriptor is affected according to rule NO
rule nvarchar (255) The kind of rule creating a descriptor inapplicability ("inapplicable-if", "applicable-if", "inapplicable-computed-from-applicable")
Default value: 'inapplicable-if'
NO

Table DescriptorStatusData

The status data of a descriptor for a certain description

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which the status value belongs (foreign key) NO
datastatus_id int Reference to a status definition. Status is like a marker why data is missing or in need of revision (examples: “unknown”, “not applicable”, “to be checked”, “data withheld” etc.) (foreign key) NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing additional information (rarely used, not multilingual) YES

Table DescriptorTree

The root and definition of a descriptor tree

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
is_complete tinyint Set to 1 if this tree includes the largest possible set of descriptors for the taxon set associated with a project (i.e. the "master-descriptor tree", other trees being subsets)
Default value: '0'
NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of descriptor tree NO
type nvarchar (255) "mixed", "part-of", "property" or "generalization" NO
project_id int Each tree belongs to exactly one project (required, foreign key) NO

Table DescriptorTreeNode

The descriptor tree nodes representing either nodes of the tree or descriptors (“leafes” of the tree)

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
parent_node_id int Reference to a parent node, creating a true tree; NULL for a root node (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of internal node associated with a concept; NULL for a descriptor node
Default value: NULL
YES
abbreviation nvarchar (255) Abbreviated label of node
Default value: NULL
YES
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which child nodes are displayed
Default value: '0'
NO
descriptortree_id int Reference to a descriptor tree; all nodes must have a direct link to the tree definition (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to a descriptor; NULL if the present node is an inner concept node defining a hierarchy of nodes or descriptors (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the node definition YES

Table DescriptorTreeNodeRecFrequency

Selection of recommended frequency values for descriptor tree parts or single descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
node_id int Reference to the descriptor tree node (foreign key) NO
frequency_id int Reference to the recommended frequency modifier (foreign key) NO

Table DescriptorTreeNodeRecModifier

Selection of recommended modifier values for descriptor tree parts or single descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
node_id int Reference to the descriptor tree node (foreign key) NO
modifier_id int Reference to the recommended modifier (foreign key) NO

Table DescriptorTreeNodeRecStatMeasure

Selection of recommended statistical measures for descriptor tree parts or single descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
node_id int Reference to the descriptor tree node (foreign key) NO
measure_id int Reference to the recommended measure (foreign key) NO

Table Frequency

Definition of frequency modifier values

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of frequency modifier (e.g. "very rare", "rare", "usually" etc.) NO
lower_estimate float Each frequency modifier defines a frequency range, this is the estimated lowest frequency
Default value: '0'
NO
upper_estimate float As above, estimate of upper range for the border; note: ranges may overlap!
Default value: '1'
NO
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which frequency modifiers are to be displayed
Default value: '0'
NO

Table ImportMapping

The import mappings to support mapping of external file keys to database keys

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
object_id int Reference to the object to which the mapping belongs, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO
session_id int Reference to the import session to which the mapping belongs, references ImportMapping (foreign key) NO
table_name varchar (50) Name of the import table NO
parent_key varchar (255) Symbolic key of the parent table NO
external_key nvarchar (255) External key in the import file NO

Table ImportSession

The import sessions to support import of data spread over several files

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
project_id int Each import session belongs to exactly one project (required, foreign key) NO
detail nvarchar (MAX) Detail text explaining the import session definition YES
create_timestamp datetime Date and time when the import session was created
Default value: getdate()
NO
update_timestamp datetime Date and time when the import session was updated
Default value: getdate()
NO

Table Modifier

Definition of modifier values

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
class nvarchar (255) Grouping of modifiers into classes ("Certainty", "Seasonal", "Diurnal", "TreatAsMisinterpretation" or "OtherModifierClass") NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of modifier (e.g. "strong", "probably" etc.) NO
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which modifiers are to be displayed
Default value: '0'
NO

Table MolecularSequenceData

The molecular sequence data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
description_id int Reference to description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to a molecular sequence descriptor to which the sequence text belongs (foreign key) NO
sequence nvarchar (MAX) Molecular sequence text referring to information on one descriptor NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES

Table MolecularSequenceSamplingData

The molecular sequence data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
sampling_unit_id int Reference to a sampling unit (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to a molecular sequence descriptor to which the sequence text belongs (foreign key) NO
sequence nvarchar (MAX) Molecular sequence text referring to information on one descriptor NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES

Table OtherScope

Scope values for description scope values for scope types “Other scope”, “Part”, “Stage” and “Sex”

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of scope (e.g. "male", "female", "adult", "juvenile" etc.) NO
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the scope and delimitation of the present description YES
type nvarchar (255) Describes the scope type ("sex", "stage", "part" or "other") NO
sex_status_id int Reference to sex status value according SDD V5.1 (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table Project

Projects define separated workareas in a single database

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
parent_project_id int Reference to a parent project, creating a subproject; NULL for a root project (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of project (or subproject); each project defines a separate work environment within a shared database by means of defining sets of descriptors (through DescriptorTree) NO
rights_text nvarchar (255) The default rights and licence statement for the entire project; BaseEntity provides means to override this for individual objects
Default value: NULL
YES
licence_uri nvarchar (255) URI of licence for the project; BaseEntity provides means to override this for individual objects
Default value: NULL
YES
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the project (or subproject) YES
primary_language_code nvarchar (3) Language of primary text version (fields directly in tables, may be translated in table Translation); Examples: "de", "en" etc. (ISO 639 language code) NO
ProjectProxyID int Reference to a project definition of DiversityProjects that allows control of access rights
Default value: (0)
NO
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation and cache database (label will be used if this is missing)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table Project_AvailableScope

Scope values available for a certain project

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
project_id int Reference to the project for which a shall be available (foreign key) NO
scope_id int Reference to a scope definition in OtherScope (foreign key) NO

Table QuantitativeSamplingData

The quantitative data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
measure_id int Optional statistical measure (minimum, mean, maximum, ranges, sample size, variance etc.) recorded in value; if NULL, value is a direct measurement (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
sampling_unit_id int Reference to a sampling unit (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to descriptor which the values record (foreign key) NO
value float The value for the statistical measure or single measurement/recording NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. "strongly", "at the base", "in autumn") (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table QuantitativeSummaryData

The quantitative data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
measure_id int Reference to the statistical measure (minimum, mean, maximum, ranges, sample size, variance etc.) recorded in value (foreign key) NO
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor which the values record (foreign key) NO
value float The value of the statistical measure NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. "strongly", "at the base", "in autumn") (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table Resource

Hyperlinks to separate rich text/media objects

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
terminology_role nvarchar (255) Role in relation to descriptors or states ("unknown"=role not known or not specified; "diagnostic"=optimized for identification; "iconic"=icon/thumbnail, needs text; "normative"=defines a resource object; "primary"=display always, informative without text; "secondary"=display only on request)
Default value: 'unknown'
NO
ranking_for_terminology tinyint Ranking of the resource with respect to terminology; range: 0 to 10
Default value: NULL
YES
descriptor_id int Optional reference to a descriptor (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
state_id int Optional reference to a categorical state (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
taxon_role nvarchar (255) Role in relation to taxa or descriptions ("unknown"=role not known or not specified; "diagnostic"=optimized for identification; "iconic"=icon/thumbnail, needs text; "normative"=defines a resource object; "primary"=display always, informative without text; "secondary"=display only on request)
Default value: 'unknown'
NO
ranking_for_taxon_use tinyint Ranking of the resource with respect to taxa or descriptions; range: 0 to 10
Default value: NULL
YES
taxon_id int Optional reference to a taxon (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
description_id int Optional reference to a description (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES
scope_id int Reference to the scope of the resource (e.g. "sex", "stage", "season" etc.)
Default value: NULL
YES
display_embedded tinyint false/0: display as link, true/1: display as embedded media object
Default value: '0'
NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label of (or caption for) the resource, e.g. a text displayed below an image or instead of the link NO
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the resource definition YES
language_code nvarchar (3) Language of the resource itself, use zxx for language neutral/no linguistic content (ISO 639-1)
Default value: NULL
YES
rights_text nvarchar (255) The rights and licence statement for the resource
Default value: NULL
YES
licence_uri nvarchar (255) URI of licence for the resource
Default value: NULL
YES
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which multiple resources are displayed
Default value: '0'
NO
node_id int Optional reference to a descriptor tree node (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)
Default value: NULL
YES

Table ResourceVariant

Different resource variants/instances/service access points

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
resource_id int Reference to the resource to which these variants provide access points (foreign key) NO
variant_id int Reference to the definition of a variant class e.g. "tiny sample", "small sample", "lower quality", "medium quality", "good quality" or "best quality" (foreign key) NO
url nvarchar (255) URL of the resource variant NO
pixel_width int Where applicable (still- or moving image): the width in pixel
Default value: NULL
YES
pixel_height int Where applicable (still- or moving image): the height in pixel
Default value: NULL
YES
duration int Where applicable (sound or moving image): the duration in seconds
Default value: NULL
YES
size int The size of the resource in bytes
Default value: NULL
YES
mime_type nvarchar (255) Type of the resource as MIME type like image/jpeg; color as color/hexrgb
Default value: NULL
YES

Table ResourceVariant_Enum

Classes for resource variants, values are predefined in the database

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of resource variant class ("tiny sample", "small sample", "lower quality", "medium quality", "good quality" or "best quality") NO
code nvarchar (255) Brief code equivalent to the (longer) label NO
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining the resource variant class YES
quality_order int A positive number providing a filter mechanism for "tiny sample" to "best quality"; the smaller the number, the less quality a resource has
Default value: '0'
NO

Table SamplingEvent

A sampling event may contain many sampling units

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
description_id int Reference to the description to which these sampling data belong (foreign key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Free-form text identifying a sampling event to humans. Sampling events have time, location, perhaps purpose and act as a container for multiple sampling units.
Default value: NULL
YES
detail nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text giving detail or description of sampling event YES
date_time datetime Date and time when the event occurred; single point or start of duration
Default value: NULL
YES
datetimespan_end datetime Optional end of a time span or duration within which or during which the event occurred
Default value: NULL
YES
geographic_area nvarchar (255) A geographic area at which the event occurred
Default value: NULL
YES
geographic_area_uri nvarchar (255) Reference to a geographic area in DiversityGazetteers
Default value: NULL
YES
coord_dec_latitude float Latitude of geographical coordinates in signed decimal degrees
Default value: NULL
YES
coord_dec_longitude float Longitude of geographical coordinates in decimal degrees
Default value: NULL
YES
coord_literal nvarchar (255) Free-form string, either in addition to or instead of code (a mapping to the controlled vocabulary may be unavailable or considered ambiguous)
Default value: NULL
YES
coord_geodeticdatum nvarchar (50) Optional, only where knowledge of the geodetic datum is readily available; defaults to WGS84 used in GPS
Default value: NULL
YES

Table SamplingUnit

Sampling unit data

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
sampling_event_id int Reference to a sampling event; keeps paired measurements together (several categorical or quantitative observations at the same time on the same object or object part) (foreign key) NO
collection_specimen nvarchar (255) A collection specimen that is represented by the sampling unit
Default value: NULL
YES
collection_specimen_uri nvarchar (500) Reference to a collection specimen in DiversityCollection
Default value: NULL
YES

Table SexStatus_Enum

Values of sex status predefined according to SDD 1.1 rev 5

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of sex status NO
code nvarchar (255) Code of sex status NO
abbreviation nvarchar (255) One or two (intuitive) characters NO
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the sex status definition YES
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which sex status values are displayed
Default value: '0'
NO

Table StatisticalMeasure_Enum

The statistical measures predefined according SDD 1.1 rev 5

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of statistical measure NO
code nvarchar (255) Code of statistical measure according SDD 1.1 rev 5 NO
abbreviation nvarchar (255) Abbreviation of statistical measure NO
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which statistical measures are displayed
Default value: '0'
NO

Table TextDescriptorData

The text data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
description_id int Reference to description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to a text descriptor to which the free-form text belongs (foreign key) NO
content nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text referring to information on one descriptor NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES

Table TextSamplingData

Free-form text data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
sampling_unit_id int Reference to a sampling unit (foreign key) NO
descriptor_id int Reference to descriptor to which the free-form text belongs (foreign key) NO
content nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text referring to information on one descriptor NO
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the data YES

Table Translation

The translations of entries related to BaseEntity

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO
object_id int Reference to the object to which the translation belongs, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO
language_code nvarchar (3) Language of representation translation (ISO 639 language code) NO
column_id int References the translated column name NO
contents nvarchar (MAX) Translated contents YES

Table TranslationColumn_Enum

The TranslationColumn_Enum contains the column names that are translated in the Translation table

Column Data type Description Nullable
id int Database-internal object ID of this record (primary key) NO
column nvarchar (255) Name of column that is translated in the Translation table NO
May 3, 2024

History

History

To inspect the history of a data set click on the button. A window will open showing all former states of the data in tables with the current data set at the top. 

 

If you have sufficient access rights for the database (role administrator), the buttons Restore deleted and Restore data as in selected line are available (see image below). If you want to restore an old version of a data set, choose the corresponding line in the table and click on the Restore data as in selected line button.

 

If you want to restore a whole data set including the dependent data, click on the Restore deleted button. This function is as well available from the menu Data → Restore from log …. In the upcoming dialogs choose the basic table to start for the search. In the upcoming dialogs enter the date where the query should start and the number of lines from the log table that should be displayed. Finally select the datarow(s) of the root table that should be restored. After that the program will try to recover the data with all depending information.

Depending on selected edit mode (“Descriptions”, “Descriptors” or “Projects”) the marked tables in the overview below may be selected as basic tables for restorage. With “->” dependent tables are marked that will be restored automatically, if the parent has been successfully restored.

  • Edit mode “Descriptions”:
    Translation
    Description -> SamplingEvent -> SamplingUnit
    -> DescriptionScope -> CategoricalSamplingData
    -> CategoricalSummaryData -> QuantitativeSamplingData
    -> QuantitativeSummaryData -> TextSamplingData
    -> TextDescriptorData -> MolecularSequenceSamplingData
    -> MolecularSequenceData
    -> Resource * -> ResourceVariant
  • Edit mode “Descriptors”:
    Translation
    Descriptor -> CategorialState    
    -> Resource * -> ResourceVariant
  • Edit mode “Projects”:
    Translation
    Project -> OtherScope    
    DescriptorTree -> DescriptorTreeNode  
      -> DescriptorTreeNodeRecFrequency  
      -> DescriptorTreeNodeRecModifier
      -> DescriptorTreeNodeRecStatMeasure
    -> Resource * -> ResourceVariant

* Remark: If you restore an object that assigns resources, be aware that during delete processing in many cases the link from the resource to the deleted object was set to null before deleting the resource itself. In those cases after restoring the target object you have take a look in the history to restore the resource link using the button Restore data as in selected line.

After successful restorage a message will give you an overview of the performed actions.

May 16, 2024

Installation Database

Installation of the database

DiversityDescriptions uses Microsoft SQL-Server 2012 or higher as database engine. When you have a database file from an older version of Microsoft SQL-Server, they can be attached to the newer version, since it will be updated automatically. You may use a centralized SQL-Server that is accessible by several users, e.g. over a local area network or run a local database server on your own PC.

If you do not have a database server with DiversityDescriptions already available, you have to install the database engine first. Download the free version of Microsoft SQL Server Express (e.g. SQLEXPRADV_x86_DEU.exe ) from http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/. Start the program and follow the instructions for the installation. After the installation make shure to get the latest updates using Windows Update.

When you have installed and configured your database server, you need an empty database to be used with your client applications. In principle two different procedings are available:

  • Attach a database file
    Download the database files DiversityDescriptions_Base.MDF  and DiversityDescriptions_Base_log.LDF  from http://www.diversityworkbench.net/Portal/ provided as a zip archive (DiversityDescriptions.zip) and copy them into your database directory. Then follow the steps described below.

    or
     

  • Create a new database
    The new application versions provide the option to create a new database and install all required elements. To use this option you have to connect to the database with a login that has system administation rights in the database. This option requires Microsoft SQL Server 2012 or higher.

The first alternative is also feasable, if you get database files from a different server or if you want to relocate the database files to a different disk directory. In the latter case you first have to “Detach” (“Trennen”) your database, move the files to the target directory and then “Attach” (“Anfügen”) it. 

 

Server configuration

To configure your server, launch the SQL Server Configuration Manager (see image below, please consider that in this example the two SQL-Servers “SQLEXPRESS” and “MSSQLSERVER” are installed).

Then click on the “Protocols for SQLEXPRESS” node. Right click on “TCP/IP” in the list of Protocols and choose “enable” for TCP/IP.

Right click on the TCP/IP node and select “Properties” to open a window as shown below.

In the part IPALL clear out the value for “TCP Dynamic Ports”. Give a TCP-Port number to use when making remote connections, e.g. “5432” as shown above. You have to restart the SQL Server Express service before you can connect to your database. 

If you use a database on a centralized server that shall be reachable over a computer network, make sure that the firewall of the server allows access via the port you set for the connections (see below). 

Attach a database file

Start the Microsoft SQL Server Managment Studio and connect to the database server with a system administrator login. Attach the database as shown below: Choose the node “Databases” (“Datenbanken”) and right-click on it to open the context menu (see below). Then choose “Attach” (“Anfügen”) from the context menu. A window will open where you can choose the file DiversityDescriptions_Base.MDF from your database directory and attach it to the database engine. The database files you attach must be created by a database server of the same or a lower version. Usually the Mircosoft SQL Server supports three predecessor versions. E.g. if you are using Microsof SQL Sever 2014, you should be able to attach database files for SQL Server 2014, 2012 and 2008 R2. 

 

Connect to database

Start the program DiversityDescriptions.exe and in the main window click on the button or choose Connection -> Database … from the menu. A window as shown below will open. Here enter the server name or the IP address (here “localhost” for a local database on the own PC) and its IP port (5432 in example below) to connect to your SQL-server and select the database file in your directory.

 

Database configuration

To configure your database, use the client as described in Database configuration.

Jan 14, 2025

Linked server

Linked server

Databases not available on the local server may be accessible via a linked server. To administrate the linked servers, choose Administration → Linked servers … from the menu. A form (see below) will open where you can add linked servers and inspect the content of the available databases.

Use the  resp. buttons to add or remove a linked server. To add a linked server, you need the name of the server and the port, e.g. tnt.diversityworkbench.de, 5432, the login associated with the connection of the linked server e.g. TNT and the password for this login. The available databases will be listed as shown above. To inspect the content, select among the tables or views listed in the right part as shown above. Linked servers have certain restrictions for the availability of data, e.g. XML and geography data are not available via a linked server. For a table or view containing incompatible content you may encounter a corresponding error mentioning the reason for the incompatibility.

May 16, 2024

Logging

Logging

Changes within the database will be documented for each data set together with the time and the responsible user in the columns shown in the image below.

All main tables have a corresponding logging table. If you change or delete a data set, the original data set will be stored in this logging table together with information about by whom and when changes were made last.

May 3, 2024

Diversity Descriptions

The following objects are not included:

  • Logging tables
  • Enumeration tables
  • System objects
  • Objects marked as obsolete
  • Previous versions of objects

TABLES


Table Annotation

One record per annotated object (Char, State, Descr. etc.)

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
object_id int Reference to object to which the annotation belongs, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
language_code nvarchar (3) Language of annotation text (ISO 639 language code) NO -
contributor_id int Contributors of annotations may be different from contributors of the object that is being annotated. Each annotation has only a single contributor. NO Refers to table Contributor
timestamp datetime Date and time when the annotation was entered. Annotations are never changed and only the most recent annotation is valid/current.Default value: getdate() NO -
content nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text annotating an object in the database, e.g. a descriptor, state, modifier, description etc. NO -
is_internal tinyint Set to 1 if text is a project internal note that should not normally be present on public pages. Goal is reduction of “annotation noise”, not confidentiality. At least project contributors will be able to read internals.Default value: ‘0’ NO -
is_latest_revision tinyint Set to 1 if this annotation is the latest by a given contributor. Annotations can never be changed, but each revision creates a new version. Only the latest version is valid.Default value: ‘0’ NO -
MEMO_WhichVersionsInheritIsNotSolved int - NO -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • Contributor

Table BaseEntity

The BaseEntity is used within the database to provide unique keys

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal object ID, unique across all tables in database (primary key) NO -
table_id int References the table name of table entries associated with the BaseEntity; NULL indicates orphaned entries and may be used for garbage collection of otherwise deleted object idsDefault value: NULL YES Refers to table BaseEntityTable_Enum
specific_rights_text nvarchar (255) To be used where the licence for an object differs from the default project licenceDefault value: NULL YES -
specific_licence_uri nvarchar (255) URI of licence, where different from project licenceDefault value: NULL YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntityTable_Enum

Table CacheDatabase

Table holding the cache databases connected to the database

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
Server varchar (50) The name or IP of the server where the cache database is located NO -
DatabaseName varchar (50) The name of the cache database NO -
Port smallint The port of the server where the cache database is located NO -
Version varchar (50) The version of the cache database YES -

Table CacheMappingDescription

Table holding the description key mappings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
project_id int Reference to the description project (foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
target_key int Mapped key value for the target of the cache database. NO -

Depending on:

  • Description
  • Project

Table CacheMappingDescriptor

Table holding the descriptor key mappings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
project_id int Reference to the descriptor project (foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
target_key int Mapped key value for the target of the cache database. NO -
last_state_key int Highest value of state key. Relevant for key_mapping_level > 0Default value: (0) YES -

Depending on:

  • Descriptor
  • Project

Table CacheMappingState

Table holding the categorical state key mappings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
project_id int Reference to the state project (foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
state_id int Reference to the categorical state to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table CategoricalState
target_key int Mapped key value for the target of the cache database. NO -

Depending on:

  • CategoricalState
  • Project

Table CacheProject

Table holding the project settings for the cache database

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
project_id int Reference to the description project (foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
withheld_data_level tinyint Flag for handling of withheld descriptor data. 0=withhold description; 1=withhold descriptor; 2=do not withhold dataDefault value: (0) YES -
key_mapping_level tinyint Flag for handling of key mapping. 0=re-build mapping for each update; 1=keep first mapping; 2=additionally take numeric values of alternate ID for items; >2 as 2 but re-initialize tableDefault value: (1) YES -
last_char_key int Highest value of character key. Relevant for key_mapping_level > 0Default value: (0) YES -
last_item_key int Highest value of item key. Relevant for key_mapping_level > 0Default value: (0) YES -
last_changes datetime The recent date when data within the project had been changedDefault value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Project

Table CategoricalSamplingData

The categorical data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO -
sampling_unit_id int Reference to the sampling unit (foreign key) NO Refers to table SamplingUnit
state_id int Reference to the state (descriptor is implicit in state_id) (foreign key) NO Refers to table CategoricalState
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES -
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. “strongly”, “at the base”, “in autumn”) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Modifier
frequency_value int Number of times this category was observed within a single sampling unitDefault value: NULL YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • CategoricalState
  • Modifier
  • SamplingUnit

Table CategoricalState

The categorical states available for categorical descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which the state belongs (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of descriptor state NO -
abbreviation nvarchar (255) Abbreviated label of descriptor stateDefault value: NULL YES -
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the descriptor state definition YES -
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (label will be used if this is missing)Default value: NULL YES -
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which descriptor states are displayedDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • Descriptor

afterDeleteCategoricalState

afterInsertCategoricalState

trgCrCategoricalState


Table CategoricalSummaryData

The categorical data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
state_id int Reference to the state (the descriptor is implicit in state_id) (foreign key) NO Refers to table CategoricalState
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES -
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. “strongly”, “at the base”, “in autumn”) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Modifier
frequency_id int Optional reference to a frequency modifier definition (e.g. “rarely”, “usually”, “mostly”) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Frequency
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • CategoricalState
  • Description
  • Frequency
  • Modifier

trgCrCategoricalSummaryData


Table Contribution

Multiple contributors may contribute in different roles

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
object_id int Reference to an object which the contributor has created or contributed to, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
contributor_id int Reference to a contributor (foreign key) NO Refers to table Contributor
role nvarchar (255) TODO: expand enumeration, perhaps rather as linked vocabulary?Default value: ‘contributor’ NO -
timestamp datetime Date and time of a contributionDefault value: getdate() NO -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • Contributor

Table Contributor

People contibuting to a work. Roles are recorded in Contribution

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
email nvarchar (255) User’s email addressDefault value: NULL YES -
web_pseudonym nvarchar (255) Optional alternative name to display publicly on the webDefault value: NULL YES -
avatar_uri nvarchar (255) Optional URI to an image representing the userDefault value: NULL YES -
real_name nvarchar (255) Optional name the user gave (full name)Default value: NULL YES -
linked_agent_uri nvarchar (255) Linking to agents managed in an external componentDefault value: NULL YES -

Table Description

The description in the database

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of descriptionDefault value: NULL YES -
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the description definition YES -
project_id int Each description belongs to exactly one project that determines its terminology (required, foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -
alternate_id nvarchar (30) Optional alternate id of a description item - should be unique within one project, but not checked by databaseDefault value: NULL YES -
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (label will be used if this is missing)Default value: NULL YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • Project

afterDeleteDescription

afterInsertDescription


Table DescriptionProject

The projects where descriptions are accessible

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
description_id int ID of the description that belongs to the project (required, foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
project_id int ID of the project to which the description belongs (required, foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data set YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database. YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set last YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated. YES -

Depending on:

  • Description
  • Project

trgCrDescriptionProject


Table DescriptionScope

The scope of the description

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of scopeDefault value: NULL YES -
dwbURI nvarchar (500) Reference to DiversityWorkbench componentDefault value: NULL YES -
type nvarchar (255) Scope type (“GeographicArea”, “SamplingPlot”, “Citation”, “Observation”, “Specimen”, “TaxonName”, “OtherConcept”, “Stage”, “Part” or “Sex”)Default value: NULL YES -
other_scope_id int Reference to further scopes, e.g. stage, sex etc. (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table OtherScope
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Description
  • OtherScope

trgCrDescriptionScope


Table Descriptor

Descriptor (= characters, features) define variables

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of descriptor NO -
abbreviation nvarchar (255) Abbreviated label of descriptorDefault value: NULL YES -
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the descriptor definition YES -
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which descriptors are displayedDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
subclass nvarchar (255) The four character subclasses of SDD are all combined here in one entity and distinguished by this attribute (“categorical”, “quantitative”, “text” or “sequence”)Default value: ‘categorical’ NO -
statistical_measurement_scale nvarchar (255) Scale of descriptor: Categorical may be nominal (unordered, “red/green/blue”) or ordinal (ordered, “bad/medium/good”); Quantitative may be interval (°C) or ratio (mass, length, time, K)Default value: ’nominal' NO -
usually_exclusive tinyint Applicable to categorical (nominal/ordinal) descriptors only. If usually exclusive = 1, then by default the user interface allows only entering one state. Nevertheless, multiple states in the data are valid.Default value: ‘0’ NO -
state_collection_model nvarchar (255) Handling of multiple values: OrSet/AndSet: unordered set combined with or/and, OrSeq/AndSeq: ordered sequence combined with or/and, WithSeq: example is “green with brown”, Between: an example is “oval to elliptic”Default value: ‘OrSet’ NO -
mandatory tinyint Is the scoring of this descriptor mandatory (required) in each item?Default value: ‘0’ NO -
repeatability nvarchar (255) How reliable and consistent are repeated measurements or scorings of the descriptor by different observers and on different objects? (“ignore”, “very low”, “low”, “below average”, “slightly below average”, “standard”, “slightly above average”, “above average”, “high” or “very high”)Default value: ‘standard’ NO -
availability nvarchar (255) How available is the descriptor or concept for identification? (“ignore”, “very low”, “low”, “below average”, “slightly below average”, “standard”, “slightly above average”, “above average”, “high” or “very high”)Default value: ‘standard’ NO -
measurement_unit nvarchar (255) A measurement unit (mm, inch, kg, °C, m/s etc.) or dimensionless scaling factorDefault value: NULL YES -
measurement_unit_precedes_value tinyint Set to 1 if the measurement unit precedes the valueDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
values_are_integer tinyint Set to 1 if the values are integerDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
min_plausible_value float Applicable to quantitative descriptors only; in support of a plausibility check for values. Example: for tree height this could be 0, i.e. only positive values allowedDefault value: ‘-1.79e308’ NO -
max_plausible_value float Applicable to quantitative descriptors only; in support of a plausibility check for values. Example: for tree height this could be 99Default value: ‘1.79e308’ NO -
sequence_type nvarchar (255) Type of molecular sequence, “Nucleotide” or “Protein”. The value “Nucleotide” covers RNA and DNA sequencesDefault value: ‘Nucleotide’ NO -
symbol_length tinyint The number of letters in each symbol. Nucleotides are always codes with 1-letter symbols, but proteins may use 1 or 3-letter codes (e.g. A or Ala for alanine)Default value: ‘1’ NO -
enable_ambiguity_symbols tinyint Set to 1 if ambiguity symbols are supported in the sequence string, e.g. R, Y, S, W for nucleotides or B, Z for proteinsDefault value: ‘1’ NO -
gap_symbol nvarchar (3) A string identifying the “gap” symbol used in aligned sequences. The gap symbol must always be symbol_length longDefault value: NULL YES -
wording_before nvarchar (255) Representation for natural language output, inserted before the states/valueDefault value: NULL YES -
wording_after nvarchar (255) Representation for natural language output, inserted after the states/valueDefault value: NULL YES -
data_entry_note nvarchar (MAX) A note or prompt when entering or dealing with data YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation (label will be used if this is missing)Default value: NULL YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

afterDeleteDescriptor

afterInsertDescriptor


Table DescriptorInapplicability

The descriptor dependency rules

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
controlled_descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which the rule will apply, e.g. which will be inapplicable if controlling state applies to the same description (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
controlling_state_id int Reference to the controlling categorical state; if present in a description, controlled descriptor is affected according to rule NO Refers to table CategoricalState
rule nvarchar (255) The kind of rule creating a descriptor inapplicability (“inapplicable-if”, “applicable-if”, “inapplicable-computed-from-applicable”)Default value: ‘inapplicable-if’ NO -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • CategoricalState
  • Descriptor

Table DescriptorMapping_C2C

Mapping of a categorical state to another categorical state

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
from_state_id int Reference to a categorical state that shall be mapped to target state NO Refers to table CategoricalState
to_state_id int Reference to a categorical state that shall be the target state NO -

Depending on:

  • CategoricalState

Table DescriptorMapping_Q2C

Mapping of a quantitative descriptor to a categorical state

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (foreign key) NO -
from_descr_id int Reference to quantitative descriptor that shall be mapped NO Refers to table Descriptor
from_lowerbound float - NO -
from_upperbound float - NO -
from_statistical_measure_id int - NO Refers to table StatisticalMeasure_Enum
from_statmeas_class_TO_CONSIDER int - NO -
to_state_id int Reference to a categorical state that shall be the target state NO Refers to table CategoricalState

Depending on:

  • CategoricalState
  • Descriptor
  • StatisticalMeasure_Enum

Table DescriptorStatusData

The status data of a descriptor for a certain description

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor to which the status value belongs (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
datastatus_id int Reference to a status definition. Status is like a marker why data is missing or in need of revision (examples: “unknown”, “not applicable”, “to be checked”, “data withheld” etc.) (foreign key) NO Refers to table DataStatus_Enum
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing additional information (rarely used, not multilingual) YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • DataStatus_Enum
  • Description
  • Descriptor

trgCrDescriptorStatusData


Table DescriptorTree

The root and definition of a descriptor tree

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
is_complete tinyint Set to 1 if this tree includes the largest possible set of descriptors for the taxon set associated with a project (i.e. the “master-descriptor tree”, other trees being subsets)Default value: ‘0’ NO -
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of descriptor tree NO -
type nvarchar (255) “mixed”, “part-of”, “property” or “generalization” NO -
project_id int Each tree belongs to exactly one project (required, foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • Project

afterDeleteDescriptorTree

afterInsertDescriptorTree


Table DescriptorTreeNode

The descriptor tree nodes representing either nodes of the tree or descriptors (“leafes” of the tree)

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
parent_node_id int Reference to a parent node, creating a true tree; NULL for a root node (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table DescriptorTreeNode
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of internal node associated with a concept; NULL for a descriptor nodeDefault value: NULL YES -
abbreviation nvarchar (255) Abbreviated label of nodeDefault value: NULL YES -
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which child nodes are displayedDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
descriptortree_id int Reference to a descriptor tree; all nodes must have a direct link to the tree definition (foreign key) NO Refers to table DescriptorTree
descriptor_id int Reference to a descriptor; NULL if the present node is an inner concept node defining a hierarchy of nodes or descriptors (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Descriptor
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the node definition YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • Descriptor
  • DescriptorTree

afterDeleteDescriptorTreeNode

afterInsertDescriptorTreeNode

trgCrDescriptorTreeNode


Table DescriptorTreeNodeRecFrequency

Selection of recommended frequency values for descriptor tree parts or single descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
node_id int Reference to the descriptor tree node (foreign key) NO Refers to table DescriptorTreeNode
frequency_id int Reference to the recommended frequency modifier (foreign key) NO Refers to table Frequency
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • DescriptorTreeNode
  • Frequency

Table DescriptorTreeNodeRecModifier

Selection of recommended modifier values for descriptor tree parts or single descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
node_id int Reference to the descriptor tree node (foreign key) NO Refers to table DescriptorTreeNode
modifier_id int Reference to the recommended modifier (foreign key) NO Refers to table Modifier
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • DescriptorTreeNode
  • Modifier

Table DescriptorTreeNodeRecStatMeasure

Selection of recommended statistical measures for descriptor tree parts or single descriptors

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
node_id int Reference to the descriptor tree node (foreign key) NO Refers to table DescriptorTreeNode
measure_id int Reference to the recommended measure (foreign key) NO Refers to table StatisticalMeasure_Enum
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • DescriptorTreeNode
  • StatisticalMeasure_Enum

Table Frequency

Definition of frequency modifier values

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of frequency modifier (e.g. “very rare”, “rare”, “usually” etc.) NO -
lower_estimate float Each frequency modifier defines a frequency range, this is the estimated lowest frequencyDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
upper_estimate float As above, estimate of upper range for the border; note: ranges may overlap!Default value: ‘1’ NO -
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which frequency modifiers are to be displayedDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

afterDeleteFrequency

afterInsertFrequency


Table Identifier

Objects may have multiple external identifiers

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
object_id int Reference to object that is identified by the uri, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
uri nvarchar (255) URI (globally unique identifier, including IRIs) for the object (descriptor/character, taxon, etc.). Local IDs should be entered using a consistent method (e.g. if organisation x uses local id “char 123” create “x.org:EXTERNAL_LINK:char:123”) NO -
match nvarchar (255) Match of URI to linked object, see definitions according to skos:exactMatch etc.Default value: ’exact' NO -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

Table ImportMapping

The import mappings to support mapping of external file keys to database keys

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
object_id int Reference to the object to which the mapping belongs, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
session_id int Reference to the import session to which the mapping belongs, references ImportMapping (foreign key) NO Refers to table ImportSession
table_name varchar (50) Name of the import table NO -
parent_key varchar (255) Symbolic key of the parent table NO -
external_key nvarchar (255) External key in the import file NO -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • ImportSession

afterInsertImportMapping


Table ImportSession

The import sessions to support import of data spread over several files

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
project_id int Each import session belongs to exactly one project (required, foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
detail nvarchar (MAX) Detail text explaining the import session definition YES -
create_timestamp datetime Date and time when the import session was createdDefault value: getdate() NO -
update_timestamp datetime Date and time when the import session was updatedDefault value: getdate() NO -

Depending on:

  • Project

Table Modifier

Definition of modifier values

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
class nvarchar (255) Grouping of modifiers into classes (“Certainty”, “Seasonal”, “Diurnal”, “TreatAsMisinterpretation” or “OtherModifierClass”) NO -
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of modifier (e.g. “strong”, “probably” etc.) NO -
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which modifiers are to be displayedDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

afterDeleteModifier

afterInsertModifier


Table MolecularSequenceData

The molecular sequence data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
description_id int Reference to description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
descriptor_id int Reference to a molecular sequence descriptor to which the sequence text belongs (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
sequence nvarchar (MAX) Molecular sequence text referring to information on one descriptor NO -
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Description
  • Descriptor

trgCrMolecularSequenceData


Table MolecularSequenceSamplingData

The molecular sequence data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
sampling_unit_id int Reference to a sampling unit (foreign key) NO Refers to table SamplingUnit
descriptor_id int Reference to a molecular sequence descriptor to which the sequence text belongs (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
sequence nvarchar (MAX) Molecular sequence text referring to information on one descriptor NO -
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Descriptor
  • SamplingUnit

Table OtherScope

Scope values for description scope values for scope types “Other scope”, “Part”, “Stage” and “Sex”

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of scope (e.g. “male”, “female”, “adult”, “juvenile” etc.) NO -
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the scope and delimitation of the present description YES -
type nvarchar (255) Describes the scope type (“sex”, “stage”, “part” or “other”) NO -
sex_status_id int Reference to sex status value according SDD V5.1 (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table SexStatus_Enum
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • SexStatus_Enum

afterDeleteOtherScope

afterInsertOtherScope


Table Project

Projects define separated workareas in a single database

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
parent_project_id int Reference to a parent project, creating a subproject; NULL for a root project (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Project
label nvarchar (255) Short label (or name) of project (or subproject); each project defines a separate work environment within a shared database by means of defining sets of descriptors (through DescriptorTree) NO -
rights_text nvarchar (255) The default rights and licence statement for the entire project; BaseEntity provides means to override this for individual objectsDefault value: NULL YES -
licence_uri nvarchar (255) URI of licence for the project; BaseEntity provides means to override this for individual objectsDefault value: NULL YES -
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the project (or subproject) YES -
primary_language_code nvarchar (3) Language of primary text version (fields directly in tables, may be translated in table Translation); Examples: “de”, “en” etc. (ISO 639 language code) NO -
ProjectProxyID int Reference to a project definition of DiversityProjects that allows control of access rightsDefault value: (0) NO Refers to table ProjectProxy
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -
wording nvarchar (255) Optional separate wording for natural language generation and cache database (label will be used if this is missing) YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • ProjectProxy

afterDeleteProject

afterInsertProject


Table Project_AvailableScope

Scope values available for a certain project

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
project_id int Reference to the project for which a shall be available (foreign key) NO Refers to table Project
scope_id int Reference to a scope definition in OtherScope (foreign key) NO Refers to table OtherScope
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • OtherScope
  • Project

Table ProjectUser

The projects that a user can access

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
LoginName nvarchar (50) A login name which the user uses for access the DivesityWorkbench, Microsoft domains, etc.. NO Refers to table UserProxy
ProjectID int ID of the project defined in DiversityProjects - negative value for local project NO Refers to table ProjectProxy
ReadOnly bit If the user has only read access to data of this projectDefault value: (0) YES -

Depending on:

  • ProjectProxy
  • UserProxy

Table QuantitativeSamplingData

The quantitative data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
measure_id int Optional statistical measure (minimum, mean, maximum, ranges, sample size, variance etc.) recorded in value; if NULL, value is a direct measurement (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table StatisticalMeasure_Enum
sampling_unit_id int Reference to a sampling unit (foreign key) NO Refers to table SamplingUnit
descriptor_id int Reference to descriptor which the values record (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
value float The value for the statistical measure or single measurement/recording NO -
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES -
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. “strongly”, “at the base”, “in autumn”) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Modifier
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Descriptor
  • Modifier
  • SamplingUnit
  • StatisticalMeasure_Enum

Table QuantitativeSummaryData

The quantitative data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
measure_id int Reference to the statistical measure (minimum, mean, maximum, ranges, sample size, variance etc.) recorded in value (foreign key) NO Refers to table StatisticalMeasure_Enum
description_id int Reference to the description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
descriptor_id int Reference to the descriptor which the values record (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
value float The value of the statistical measure NO -
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES -
modifier_id int Optional reference to a modifier definition (e.g. “strongly”, “at the base”, “in autumn”) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Modifier
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Description
  • Descriptor
  • Modifier
  • StatisticalMeasure_Enum

trgCrQuantitativeSummaryData


Table Resource

Hyperlinks to separate rich text/media objects

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
terminology_role nvarchar (255) Role in relation to descriptors or states (“unknown”=role not known or not specified; “diagnostic”=optimized for identification; “iconic”=icon/thumbnail, needs text; “normative”=defines a resource object; “primary”=display always, informative without text; “secondary”=display only on request)Default value: ‘unknown’ NO -
ranking_for_terminology tinyint Ranking of the resource with respect to terminology; range: 0 to 10Default value: NULL YES -
descriptor_id int Optional reference to a descriptor (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Descriptor
state_id int Optional reference to a categorical state (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table CategoricalState
taxon_role nvarchar (255) Role in relation to taxa or descriptions (“unknown”=role not known or not specified; “diagnostic”=optimized for identification; “iconic”=icon/thumbnail, needs text; “normative”=defines a resource object; “primary”=display always, informative without text; “secondary”=display only on request)Default value: ‘unknown’ NO -
ranking_for_taxon_use tinyint Ranking of the resource with respect to taxa or descriptions; range: 0 to 10Default value: NULL YES -
taxon_id int Optional reference to a taxon (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES -
description_id int Optional reference to a description (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table Description
scope_id int Reference to the scope of the resource (e.g. “sex”, “stage”, “season” etc.)Default value: NULL YES -
display_embedded tinyint false/0: display as link, true/1: display as embedded media objectDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
label nvarchar (255) Short label of (or caption for) the resource, e.g. a text displayed below an image or instead of the link NO -
detail nvarchar (MAX) Additional detail text explaining or commenting on the resource definition YES -
language_code nvarchar (3) Language of the resource itself, use zxx for language neutral/no linguistic content (ISO 639-1)Default value: NULL YES -
rights_text nvarchar (255) The rights and licence statement for the resourceDefault value: NULL YES -
licence_uri nvarchar (255) URI of licence for the resourceDefault value: NULL YES -
display_order int A positive number defining the sequence in which multiple resources are displayedDefault value: ‘0’ NO -
node_id int Optional reference to a descriptor tree node (at least 1 of description_id, node_id, descriptor_id, state_id or taxon_id must be present) (foreign key)Default value: NULL YES Refers to table DescriptorTreeNode
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • CategoricalState
  • Description
  • Descriptor
  • DescriptorTreeNode

afterDeleteResource

afterInsertResource


Table ResourceVariant

Different resource variants/instances/service access points

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record, references BaseEntity (primary key) NO -
resource_id int Reference to the resource to which these variants provide access points (foreign key) NO Refers to table Resource
variant_id int Reference to the definition of a variant class e.g. “tiny sample”, “small sample”, “lower quality”, “medium quality”, “good quality” or “best quality” (foreign key) NO Refers to table ResourceVariant_Enum
url nvarchar (255) URL of the resource variant NO -
pixel_width int Where applicable (still- or moving image): the width in pixelDefault value: NULL YES -
pixel_height int Where applicable (still- or moving image): the height in pixelDefault value: NULL YES -
duration int Where applicable (sound or moving image): the duration in secondsDefault value: NULL YES -
size int The size of the resource in bytesDefault value: NULL YES -
mime_type nvarchar (255) Type of the resource as MIME type like image/jpeg; color as color/hexrgbDefault value: NULL YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Resource
  • ResourceVariant_Enum

Table SamplingEvent

A sampling event may contain many sampling units

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
description_id int Reference to the description to which these sampling data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
label nvarchar (255) Free-form text identifying a sampling event to humans. Sampling events have time, location, perhaps purpose and act as a container for multiple sampling units.Default value: NULL YES -
detail nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text giving detail or description of sampling event YES -
date_time datetime Date and time when the event occurred; single point or start of durationDefault value: NULL YES -
datetimespan_end datetime Optional end of a time span or duration within which or during which the event occurredDefault value: NULL YES -
geographic_area nvarchar (255) A geographic area at which the event occurredDefault value: NULL YES -
geographic_area_uri nvarchar (255) Reference to a geographic area in DiversityGazetteersDefault value: NULL YES -
coord_dec_latitude float Latitude of geographical coordinates in signed decimal degreesDefault value: NULL YES -
coord_dec_longitude float Longitude of geographical coordinates in decimal degreesDefault value: NULL YES -
coord_literal nvarchar (255) Free-form string, either in addition to or instead of code (a mapping to the controlled vocabulary may be unavailable or considered ambiguous)Default value: NULL YES -
coord_geodeticdatum nvarchar (50) Optional, only where knowledge of the geodetic datum is readily available; defaults to WGS84 used in GPSDefault value: NULL YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • Description

afterDeleteSamplingEvent

afterInsertSamplingEvent


Table SamplingUnit

Sampling unit data

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
sampling_event_id int Reference to a sampling event; keeps paired measurements together (several categorical or quantitative observations at the same time on the same object or object part) (foreign key) NO Refers to table SamplingEvent
collection_specimen nvarchar (255) A collection specimen that is represented by the sampling unitDefault value: NULL YES -
collection_specimen_uri nvarchar (500) Reference to a collection specimen in DiversityCollectionDefault value: NULL YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • SamplingEvent

Table Tag

Objects may have multiple tags (= keywords)

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
tag nvarchar (255) Tag (= keyword) to categorize objects like descriptors, states, descriptions NO -
object_id int Reference to object to which the tag belongs, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

Table TextDescriptorData

The text data of a description

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
description_id int Reference to description to which these data belong (foreign key) NO Refers to table Description
descriptor_id int Reference to a text descriptor to which the free-form text belongs (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
content nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text referring to information on one descriptor NO -
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the values YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Description
  • Descriptor

trgCrTextDescriptorData


Table TextSamplingData

Free-form text data recorded for a sampling event

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
sampling_unit_id int Reference to a sampling unit (foreign key) NO Refers to table SamplingUnit
descriptor_id int Reference to descriptor to which the free-form text belongs (foreign key) NO Refers to table Descriptor
content nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text referring to information on one descriptor NO -
notes nvarchar (MAX) Free-form text detailing special cases or additional data beyond the data YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • Descriptor
  • SamplingUnit

Table TODO_MultilingualCharDataNotes

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
table_is_just_a_note-Work_needs_to_be_done int - NO -
memo_char_and_taxon_notes_is_already_redundant_due_to_annotation int - NO -
memo_char_data_are_not_an_object_thus_not_annotated int - NO -

Table Translation

The translations of entries related to BaseEntity

Column Data type Description Nullable Relation
id int Database-internal ID of this record (primary key) NO -
object_id int Reference to the object to which the translation belongs, references BaseEntity (foreign key) NO Refers to table BaseEntity
language_code nvarchar (3) Language of representation translation (ISO 639 language code) NO -
column_id int References the translated column name NO Refers to table TranslationColumn_Enum
contents nvarchar (MAX) Translated contents YES -
LogInsertedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the creator of this data setDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogInsertedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were first entered (typed or imported) into this database.Default value: getdate() YES -
LogUpdatedBy nvarchar (50) ID of the person to update this data set lastDefault value: [dbo].UserID YES -
LogUpdatedWhen smalldatetime Date and time when the data were last updated.Default value: getdate() YES -

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity
  • TranslationColumn_Enum
May 3, 2024

Diversity Descriptions enumeration tables

Enumeration tables

The following objects are not included:

  • Logging tables
  • System objects
  • Objects marked as obsolete
  • Previous versions of objects

Table


Table BaseEntityTable_Enum

The BaseEntityTable_Enum contains the names of tables that reference the BaseEntity table

Dependent tables:

  • BaseEntity

Table DataStatus_Enum

Values of data status used for descriptions according to SDD 1.1 rev 5

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

Dependent tables:

  • DescriptorStatusData

afterDeleteDataStatus_Enum

afterInsertDataStatus_Enum


Table ResourceVariant_Enum

Classes for resource variants, values are predefined in the database

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

Dependent tables:

  • ResourceVariant

afterDeleteResourceVariant_Enum

afterInsertResourceVariant_Enum


Table SexStatus_Enum

Values of sex status predefined according to SDD 1.1 rev 5

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

Dependent tables:

  • OtherScope

afterDeleteSexStatus_Enum

afterInsertSexStatus_Enum


Table StatisticalMeasure_Enum

The statistical measures predefined according SDD 1.1 rev 5

Depending on:

  • BaseEntity

Dependent tables:

  • DescriptorMapping_Q2C
  • DescriptorTreeNodeRecStatMeasure
  • QuantitativeSamplingData
  • QuantitativeSummaryData

afterDeleteStatisticalMeasure_Enum

afterInsertStatisticalMeasure_Enum


Table TranslationColumn_Enum

The TranslationColumn_Enum contains the column names that are translated in the Translation table

Dependent tables:

  • Translation
May 3, 2024

License

License

This manual is copyrighted work licensed under a Creative CommonsLicense.

All material in this manual is the property of the contributing authors and fully copyrighted. By choosing this way of publication, the contributing authors have agreed to license the work under a Creative Commons License permitting reproduction, distribution, and derivative works, requiring attribution, notice, and share-alike, and prohibiting commercial use.

 For information about the license of the client software choose Help -> Info …

The client software is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation.

The client software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNUGeneral Public License (GPL) for more details.

May 3, 2024

Resources directory

Resources directory

In the resources directory all files are stored that have been generated by Diversity Descriptions, e.g. due to export. Furthermore you may store files here that shall be used for data import into the Diversity Descriptions database and the error log file. The resources directory may be set via the menu Administration-> Resources directory … (see image below).

There are 3 possibilities for the resources directory:

  • Select the “Home directory” of the user (may  be definded via %HOMEDRIVE%%HOMEPATH%)
  •   Select the “My Documents” directory of the user
  • Select any directory you have read/write access (User defined)

The default is set to Home. Below this node the directories “DiversityWorkbench” will be created and below that “DiversityDescriptions”, which will contain all files that a Diversity Descripiton user needs user need access to. If you install additional Diversity Workbench applikations and use resources directory option “Home directory”, they will all get dedicated directories under “..<user>\DiversityWorkbench\”.

Certain directories are hidden (Query, Settings, Spreadsheet) and are handled by the software i.e. the content should not be changed by the user. The other folders (Export, Import and so on) are a copy of folders placed in the program directory (see below).

 

Tutorial files  

For DiversityDescriptions a number of tutorial files are available that provide examples, e.g. for using the matrix import wizard. To copy the tutorial files into your resources directory select Administration->  Tutorial files … from the menu. 

Jan 14, 2025

Version

Version

For information about the version of the client application and the database choose Help-> Info …

The current version in the example above is 4.6.0. The required database version is 3.3.7.

 

May 3, 2024

Update

Update of database and client

If either the database or the client needs to be updated, the menu will show an additional entry: Update.

Database update

To update the database, choose Update Update database … from the menu. See chapter Database update for details.

Client update

To update the client, choose Update Update client … and download the lastest version of the client. ee chapter Update client for details.

Mar 26, 2024

Subsections of Update

Update Client

Replace the files and folders of your installation of DiversityCollection with the files you received by e-mail or downloaded from the DiversityWorkbench portal. The database will not be influenced by this replacement. After starting the new software you need to transfer the settings of the previous version. When you start the program and connect to a database, the program will check if it is compatible with the database or if the database needs an update. In any of these cases an update entry in the menu will appear. If a new version of the client is available, this menu will contain an update client … entry. Click on it to open the webpage where you may download the client as shown below.

 

Mar 26, 2024

Update Database

Update database to current version

If you are the owner of the database (Database role = dbo) and the database needs to be updated, the menu will contain an update database … entry. Select this entry to open a window as shown below to run the provided update scripts, delivered with the client software. These scripts need to run consecutively, so e.g. to update from version 2.5.1 to 2.5.4 you either have to run the script DiversityCollectionUpdate_020501_To_020504 or the scripts DiversityCollectionUpdate_020501_To_020502, DiversityCollectionUpdate_020502_To_020503 and DiversityCollectionUpdate_020503_To_020504. The program will guide you through these steps and check for the scripts. All you need to do is click the Start update button. 

Update of all databases on a server

If you are database owner and have a windows login to the database server (user=dbo), you have the option to update all DiversityCollection databases on this server by starting the application with command line parameters. Open a command line window, navigate to the program directory and start DiversityCollection with the keyword “UpdateDatebase”, the server name (or IP address) and the port number:

DiversityCollection.exe UpdateDatabase 127.0.0.1 5432

The program will connect to the server and update all available databases to the current version. If you want to exclude dedicated databases from update, create a text file named “ExcludeDb.txt” that contains the excluded database names - each name in a separate line - and locate it in the resources directory. The update will be done in the background without opening a program window. When the update processing is finished, an overview of the performed actions will be written into the protocol file “Updatereport.log” in directory resources/Updates.

Mar 26, 2024

Errorlog

If any error messages show up while working with the application, you can find further details concerning the part of the application where the error occurred and the parameters involved in the file e.g. DiversityCollectionError.log in the Module DiversityCollection located in your resources directory.

To open the errorlog, choose Help - ErrorLog from the menu. A window will open showing the content of the errolog. By default the errorlog will be reset at program start. You can keep the errorlog if needed by chossing Help - Errorlog - Keep error log from the menu. A button will appear that allows you to clear the error log manually: Help - Clear ErrorLog.

Mar 26, 2024

Workbench

Diversity Workbench

The Diversity Workbench is composed of components for building and managing biodiversity information, each of which focuses on a particular domain. Each component can provide services to the other components. DiversityDescriptions can link data to the modules DiversityCollection, DiversityTaxonNames, DiversityGazetteers and DiversityReferences as illustrated in the image below. DiversityProjects together with DiversityAgents provide support for administration of data access rights.

 

The modules communicate with each other to provide their services for the other modules.

May 3, 2024

Subsections of Workbench

Module Related Entry

Module related entry

The Diversity Workbench  is a set of components for building and managing biodiversity information, each of which focuses on a particular domain. Each module provides services for the other modules. To use the service of a module, you need access to the database of the module and optionally the module application placed in your application directory. Entries related to an external module have a standard interface in the main form. There are 2 states of this interface:

1 - the value is only set in the local database with no connection to the remote module

In this state, you can either type the value or select it from the values that are already available in the database. To get a list of the available values type the beginning of the value (you may use wildcards) and click on the  button. If you want to set a relation to the remote module, click on the  button. A window will open where you may select an entry from the foreign database.

 

2 - the value is related to the remote module

If the value has a relation to the remote module, the interface will appear as shown above. To release the connection to the remote module click on the button. If you need further information about the value, click on the  button. This will open a form, showing an overview of the related value.

If the client application of the module is available you can inspect the details of the entry.  

 

3 - relation to a webservice

Some modules provide the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. For example DiversityTaxonNames gives you access to the taxonomic names of IndexFungorum. To establish a connection to an external webservice, click on the  button. As with the link to modules within the Diversity Workbench a window will open where you can choose from either Diversity Workbench modules or external Webservices. See Webservice for further details.

Jan 14, 2025

Modules

Modules

The Diversity Workbench  is a set of components for building and managing biodiversity information, each of which focuses on a particular domain. 

DiversityAgents Administration of the agents, i.e. people and institutions which should be documented with e.g. their addresses
<img src=“img/IcoDiversityCollection.gif” data-align=“left”
height=“16” /> DiversityCollection Administration of the scientific collections, specimens within these collections and observations
<img src=“img/IcoDiversityDescriptions.gif” data-align=“left”
height=“16” /> DiversityDescriptions Administration of the descriptive data
<img src=“img/IcoDiversityGazetteer.gif” data-align=“left”
height=“16” /> DiversityGazetteers A data collection to enable the linking of geographical records with the Getty Thesaurus of Geographical Names (TGN), the German GN250 database and other sources of geographical names
DiversityProjects Administration of projects
<img src=“img/IcoDiversityReferences.gif” data-align=“left”
height=“16” /> DiversityReferences Administration of litarature references
<img src=“img/IcoDiversityTaxonNames.gif” data-align=“left”
height=“16” /> DiversityTaxonNames   Administration of taxonomic names, their synonyms and hierarchical position

Each module provides services for the other modules. To use the service of a module, you need access to the database of the module and optionally the module application placed in your application directory. 

May 3, 2024

Webservice

Webservice - foreign sources

Some modules within the Diversity Workbench provide the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. For example DiversityTaxonNames gives you access to the taxonomic names of IndexFungorum. To establish a connection to an external webservice, click on the  button. A window will open where you can choose from either Diversity Workbench modules or external Webservices. Some currently provided webservices are:

The Catalogue of Life

Index Fungorum

Pan-European Species directories Infrastructure

Recent Literature on Lichens

 

Jan 14, 2025

Subsections of Webservice

Webservice Catalogue Of Life

Catalogue of Life - webservice

Diversity Workbench provides the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. The webservice provided by the Catalogue ofLife allows linkage of taxon names. To establish a connection to this external webservice, click on the  button. A window will open where you can choose this webservice (see below). Remark: By selecting “CatalogueOfLife” you can search in the 2014 annual check list, by selecting “CatalogueOfLife_2” you can search in a newed, updated edition, which includes higher taxa.

In the field Name in Query conditions enter you search string and click on the button to start the query. In the list of the left upper part the results of the query will be listed. In the right part of the window additional information is shown as provided by the webservice. If available, the lower part of the window will show the webpage of the related information.

Higher taxa and for synonyms the accepted name will be shown as e.g. shown above. To inspect one of these entries, click on the linked entry of the ID. To take the link from the webservice into your database choose one of the entries in the list and click OK. The entry will change as shown below.

If you double-click on the link area a window will open, providing you with the retrieval information of the webservice. 

To get the information related to an entry as provided by the webservice, click on the  button. A window will open as shown below where the informations of the webservice are listed in the upper part. If available, additional informations provided on a corresponding website will be shown in the lower part.

If you want to remove the link to the webservice, click on the  button. This will only remove the relation to the webservice, not the cached name.

 

 

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Webservice Index Fungorum

Index Fungorum - webservice

Diversity Workbench provides the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. The webservice provided by the IndexFungorum allows linkage of taxon names. To establish a connection to this external webservice, click on the  button. A window will open where you can choose this webservice (see below). 

Enter the query restriction for the name in the Name field in Query conditions. The maximal number of records you get can be set in the max. results field (choose a low number if you have a slow connection to the internet). Then click on the search button to start the query. In the list of the left upper part the results of the query will be listed. In the right part of the window additional information is shown as provided by the webservice. For certain entries buttons will appear, as e.g. shown above for the basionym and the current name of a scientific name. Click on these buttons if you want to change to one of these related datasets from the webservice. If available, the informations provided on the corresponding website is shown in the lower part. To take the link from the webservice into your database choose one of the entries and click OK. The entry will change as shown below.

If you double-click on the link area a window will open, providing you with the retrieval information of the webservice. 

To get the whole information related to this entry as provided by the webservice, click on the  button. A window will open as shown below where the informations of the webservice are listed, If available, the lower part will show the corresponding informations of a website.

If you want to remove the link to the webservice, click on the the  button. This will only remove the relation to the webservice, not the cached name.

May 3, 2024

Webservice Myco Bank

MycoBank Database - webservice

Some modules within the DiversityWorkbench provide the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. For example DiversityTaxonNames gives you access to the taxonomic names of the MycoBank database. To establish a connection to this webservice, click on the button. A window will open where you can choose MycoBank from the database list (see below). 

Enter the query restriction for the name in the Name field in Query conditions. Click on the search button to start the query. In the list in the left upper part the results of the query will be listed. On the right part of the window additional information is shown as provided by the webservice. If available, the information provided on the corresponding website is shown in the lower part. To include the link from the webservice into your database choose one of the entries and click OK. The entry will change as shown below.

If you double-click on the link area , a window will open providing you with the retrieval information of the webservice. 

To receive the entire information related to this entry as provided by the webservice click on the button. A window will open as shown below where information on the webservice is listed. If available, the lower part will show the corresponding information of a website.

If you wish to remove the link to the webservice, click on the button. This will only remove the relation to the webservice, not the cached name.

May 3, 2024

Webservice Palaeo DB

The Palaeontolgy Database - webservice

Diversity Workbench provides the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. The webservice provided by the PalaeontologyDatabase allows linkage of taxon names. To establish a connection to this external webservice, click on the  button. A window will open where you can choose this webservice (see below).

In the field Name in Query conditions enter you search string and click on the button to start the query. In the list of the left upper part the results of the query will be listed. In the right part of the window additional information is shown as provided by the webservice. The lower part of the window will show the webpage of the related information.

For synonyms, the accepted name will be shown as well as e.g. shown above. To change to the accepted name, click on the linked entry of the ID - in the example above id: 57254. To take the link from the webservice into your database choose one of the entries in the list and click OK. The entry will change as shown below.

If you double-click on the link area a window will open, providing you with the retrieval information of the webservice. 

To get the information related to an entry as provided by the webservice, click on the  button. A window will open as shown below where the informations of the webservice are listed in the upper part. If available, additional informations provided on a corresponding website will be shown in the lower part.

If you want to remove the link to the webservice, click on the  button. This will only remove the relation to the webservice, not the cached name.

 

 

 

 

 

May 3, 2024

Webservice PESI

Pan-European Species directories Infrastructure - webservice

Some modules within the DiversityWorkbench provide the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. For example DiversityTaxonNames gives you access to the taxonomic names of the Pan-European Species directories Infrastructure (PESI). To establish a connection to this webservice, click on the button. A window will open where you can choose PESI from the database list (see below). 

Enter the query restriction for the name in the Name field in Query conditions. Click on the search button to start the query. In the list in the left upper part the results of the query will be listed. On the right part of the window additional information is shown as provided by the webservice. If available, the information provided on the corresponding website is shown in the lower part. To include the link from the webservice into your database choose one of the entries and click OK. The entry will change as shown below.

If you double-click on the link area , a window will open providing you with the retrieval information of the webservice. 

To receive the entire information related to this entry as provided by the webservice click on the button. A window will open as shown below where information on the webservice is listed. If available, the lower part will show the corresponding information of a website.

If you wish to remove the link to the webservice, click on the button. This will only remove the relation to the webservice, not the cached name.

May 3, 2024

Webservice RLL

Recent Literature on Lichens - webservice

Some modules within the DiversityWorkbench provide the possibility to link your data to an external webservice. For example DiversityReferences gives you access to the webservice RecentLiterature on Lichens. To establish a connection to this webservice, click on the button. A window will open where you can choose RLL from the database list (see below). 

Enter the query restriction for the name in the Name field in Query conditions. Click on the search button to start the query. In the list in the left upper part the results of the query will be listed. On the right part of the window additional information is shown as provided by the webservice. If available, the information provided on the corresponding website is shown in the lower part. To include the link from the webservice into your database choose one of the entries and click OK. The entry will change as shown below.

If you double-click on the link area , a window will open providing you with the retrieval information of the webservice. 

To receive the entire information related to this entry as provided by the webservice click on the button. A window will open as shown below where information on the webservice is listed. If available, the lower part will show the corresponding information of a website.

If you wish to remove the link to the webservice, click on the button. This will only remove the relation to the webservice, not the cached name.